[go: up one dir, main page]

US20080234202A1 - Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues - Google Patents

Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080234202A1
US20080234202A1 US11/787,658 US78765807A US2008234202A1 US 20080234202 A1 US20080234202 A1 US 20080234202A1 US 78765807 A US78765807 A US 78765807A US 2008234202 A1 US2008234202 A1 US 2008234202A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
peptide
compound
residue
formula
alkyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/787,658
Inventor
Justin O. Brower
Thomas A. Dix
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
ARGOLYN BIOSCIENCES Inc
Medical University of South Carolina MUSC
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US11/787,658 priority Critical patent/US20080234202A1/en
Assigned to ARGOLYN BIOSCIENCES, INC. reassignment ARGOLYN BIOSCIENCES, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BROWER, JUSTIN O.
Assigned to MEDICAL UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH CAROLINA reassignment MEDICAL UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH CAROLINA ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: DIX, THOMAS A
Publication of US20080234202A1 publication Critical patent/US20080234202A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C279/00—Derivatives of guanidine, i.e. compounds containing the group, the singly-bound nitrogen atoms not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
    • C07C279/04—Derivatives of guanidine, i.e. compounds containing the group, the singly-bound nitrogen atoms not being part of nitro or nitroso groups having nitrogen atoms of guanidine groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of a carbon skeleton
    • C07C279/14—Derivatives of guanidine, i.e. compounds containing the group, the singly-bound nitrogen atoms not being part of nitro or nitroso groups having nitrogen atoms of guanidine groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of a carbon skeleton being further substituted by carboxyl groups
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A61P29/02—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID] without antiinflammatory effect
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/02—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the hypothalamic hormones, e.g. TRH, GnRH, CRH, GRH, somatostatin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/24—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the sex hormones
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/10—Antioedematous agents; Diuretics
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C229/00—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/02—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/04—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
    • C07C229/06—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/08—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton the nitrogen atom of the amino group being further bound to hydrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C229/00—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/02—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/04—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
    • C07C229/06—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/10—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton the nitrogen atom of the amino group being further bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C229/12—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton the nitrogen atom of the amino group being further bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings to carbon atoms of acyclic carbon skeletons
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C257/00—Compounds containing carboxyl groups, the doubly-bound oxygen atom of a carboxyl group being replaced by a doubly-bound nitrogen atom, this nitrogen atom not being further bound to an oxygen atom, e.g. imino-ethers, amidines
    • C07C257/10—Compounds containing carboxyl groups, the doubly-bound oxygen atom of a carboxyl group being replaced by a doubly-bound nitrogen atom, this nitrogen atom not being further bound to an oxygen atom, e.g. imino-ethers, amidines with replacement of the other oxygen atom of the carboxyl group by nitrogen atoms, e.g. amidines
    • C07C257/14—Compounds containing carboxyl groups, the doubly-bound oxygen atom of a carboxyl group being replaced by a doubly-bound nitrogen atom, this nitrogen atom not being further bound to an oxygen atom, e.g. imino-ethers, amidines with replacement of the other oxygen atom of the carboxyl group by nitrogen atoms, e.g. amidines having carbon atoms of amidino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D231/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
    • C07D231/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D231/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D233/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D233/44—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C07D233/46—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical with only hydrogen atoms attached to said nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D233/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D233/44—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C07D233/48—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical with acyclic hydrocarbon or substituted acyclic hydrocarbon radicals, attached to said nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D239/08—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with hetero atoms directly attached in position 2
    • C07D239/12—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C07D239/14—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, attached to said nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K7/00—Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K7/04—Linear peptides containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K7/08—Linear peptides containing only normal peptide links having 12 to 20 amino acids
    • C07K7/083—Neurotensin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • Naturally occurring endogenous peptides are ideal drug candidate leads by virtue of their myriad activities in promoting and regulating biological processes. Inherent in the chemistry and biology of peptides, however, are several factors that also make them poor drug candidates. Peptides most often exert localized effects and are rapidly degraded within the body. In addition, most peptides are unable to cross biological membranes, including the small intestine and blood brain barrier (BBB). Finally, peptides often bind to more than one receptor or receptor subtype, thus rarely showing the selectivity required of a viable drug candidate. Therefore, for a peptide to become a viable drug candidate, improvements in blood stability, receptor selectivity, and barrier crossing should be made without eliminating inherent binding affinity.
  • BBB blood brain barrier
  • NT neurotensin
  • NTR neurotensin receptors
  • NT Although full activity of NT resides in its C-terminal six amino acid sequence (NH 2 -Arg (8) -Arg (9) -Pro (10) -Tyr (11) -Ile (12) -Leu (3) -COOH, designated NT[8-13], see Carraway & Leeman, J. Biol. Chem. 250:1907 (1975)), the C-terminal six amino acid sequence does not have activity when administered IP or orally due to its instability in blood and inability to cross the blood brain and/or gut barrier.
  • the present invention concerns alpha-desamino amino acid compounds (desamino amino acid compounds) that are capable of carrying positively charged side chains, their synthesis, their application as substitutes for natural amino acid moieties of biologically active peptides and the resulting peptides as well.
  • alpha-desamino arginine, lysine and ornithine as well as their substituted and derivatized side chain analogs constitute preferred embodiments of the invention.
  • These desamino amino acid compounds can be substituted for arginine and/or lysine moieties in any known, biologically active peptide such that the substituted peptide will be truncated at the substitution position.
  • these desamino amino acid compounds can be coupled to the amino group of the N-terminus of any known biologically active peptide to produce an extended peptide.
  • the truncated and extended peptides have significant biological selectivity and biological half lives owing to their resistance toward amino peptidase degradation.
  • the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound having Formula I:
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 5;
  • n is zero or an integer of 1;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are, independently, hydrogen or branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C 1 -C 6 or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination and with the proviso that a maximum of two of R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 may be selected to be the aromatic, substituted aromatic, heteroaromatic or substituted heteroaromatic group, and provided that when m is 0 or 1 and n is 0 to 5, R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are not all H
  • C ⁇ is a carbon atom having either R or S stereochemistry if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula II:
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 6, preferably, 2 to 5;
  • X and Y are independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C 1 -C 6 ;
  • X-Y is (CH 2 ) z , wherein z is an integer of from 1-8, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R 4 is hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, and;
  • C ⁇ is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • a third aspect of the present invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula III:
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 5;
  • X-Y is (CH 2 ) 2 , wherein z is an integer of from 0 to 6, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R 6 , and R 7 are, independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination; and
  • C ⁇ is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ , is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • a fourth aspect of the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula IV:
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are, independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination and with the proviso that a maximum of two of R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 may be selected to be the aromatic, substituted aromatic, heteroaromatic or substituted heteroaromatic group; and
  • C ⁇ is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • a fifth aspect of the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula V:
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are, independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C 1 -C 6 , or an aromatic group of C 6 -C 18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C 4 -C 18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination and with the proviso that a maximum of two of R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 may be selected to be the aromatic, substituted aromatic, heteroaromatic or substituted heteroaromatic group; and
  • C ⁇ is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • a further aspect of the invention relates to the addition of the non-natural desamino amino acid compounds of the invention to the N-terminus amino group of biologically active peptides or their substitution for naturally occurring congener amino acid moieties of biologically active peptides.
  • Preferred congener moieties include arginine and/or lysine.
  • the addition to the N-terminus amino group of a known, biologically active peptide provides an extended peptide that has selective, long lasting biological activity of the same kind as the known, biologically active peptide.
  • the addition can be accomplished by known methods for coupling acid and amine groups together to form amide bonds, including use of acyl azide coupling, carbodiimide coupling, acid ion exchange resin, triaminoboranes and enzyme coupling.
  • a preferred method involves the use of an amino exopeptidase under conditions that promote the peptide bond formation.
  • the semisynthetic peptides are produced by substituting a non-natural amino acid compound for the N-terminal arginine residue of NT (8-13), e.g., ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS226, ABS227, ABS228, ABS230, ABS232, ABS234, or ABS239.
  • a non-natural amino acid compound for the N-terminal arginine residue of NT (8-13), e.g., ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS226, ABS227, ABS228, ABS230, ABS232, ABS234, or ABS239.
  • Preferred embodiments of the peptides on which the extended peptides are based include biologically active peptides useful for treatment or prevention of malconditions.
  • a list of preferred categories and examples is included in the sections below. Some preferred categories include but are not limited to transcription factors, ligands for cellular receptors, hormones and extracellular binding peptides.
  • Some preferred examples include but are not limited to enkephlin, LHRH and analogs, neuropeptides, glycoincretins, integrin and analogs, glucagons and glucagon-like peptides, antithrombotic peptides, cytokines and interleukins, transferrins, interferons, endothelins, natriuretic hormones, extracellular kinase ligands, angiotensin enzyme inhibitors, peptide antiviral compounds, thrombin, substance P, substance G, somatotropin, somatostatin, GnRH and analogues, secretin, bradykinin, vasopressin and analogues, insulin and analogs thereof, growth factors, as well as others.
  • the extended peptide is formed by coupling the N-terminus amino group of a basis peptide to the carboxyl group of a desamino amino acid compound of the invention.
  • substitution of desamino amino acid moiety for an arginine or lysine moiety of a biologically active peptide provides a truncated peptide having selective, long-lasting biological activity.
  • Any known biologically active peptide having an arginine and/or lysine moiety within its amino acid sequence can serve as the basis for the corresponding truncated peptide.
  • the truncated peptide will have the same downstream sequence as the known, biologically active peptide but the upstream sequence will be absent.
  • ARG or LYS moiety will be exchanged for a desamino amino acid moiety, thus providing the truncated peptide.
  • Several known biologically active peptides are penultimately formed as pro-peptides with an arginine or lysine moiety at the pro-peptide or precursor cleavage position, or are formed as final peptides containing an arginine or lysine moiety at a position that can be cleaved to provide an active truncated peptide. Trypsin is an enzyme specific for such cleavage points. Examples include glucagon-like peptide, neurotensin, proinsulin, and thrombin. The truncated versions of these examples with a desamino amino acid compound substituted for the arginine or lysine moiety provide selective, long-lasting biological activity.
  • a further aspect of the invention includes pharmaceutical and cosmetic compositions of the desamino amino acid compound, of the extended or truncated peptide, and combinations thereof.
  • Unit dosage forms and biologically effective formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions are included.
  • the cosmetic formulations include appropriate oil, creme, wax or aqueous base cosmetic carriers.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention includes methods of screening, diagnosis and treatment using the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention and/or the addition or truncated peptides.
  • One embodiment of the invention is a truncated neurotensin peptide having a desamino amino acid as its N-terminus amino acid moiety.
  • An embodiment of the invention also is directed to processes and intermediates disclosed and claimed herein that are useful for preparing compounds of the inventions, such as compounds of Formula I, II, III, IV and/or V and peptides that contain such compounds.
  • One class of such intermediates includes the N-protected or carboxyl protected or N- and carboxyl protected compounds of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V. These protected intermediates are described in detail in the following sections of the application.
  • Another class of such intermediates includes the carboxylate salts of the compounds of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V, the organic or inorganic acid amine salts of those compounds and the double salts (carboxylate, amine salts).
  • An embodiment of the present invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of Formula (XI):
  • X is OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue; or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n 1 to about 10
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R 1 , R 2 or R 3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • Another embodiment of the present invention concerns a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (XIII):
  • X is OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n 1 to about 10;
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R 4 or R 5 is not a Boc group;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of formula (XIII):
  • X is OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R at each occurrence is independently H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n 1 to about 10;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • R 4 and R 5 are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R 4 or R 5 is not a Boc group;
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof
  • FIG. 1 Structure comparisons of NT(8-13), an intermediate NT analogue, and ABS201.
  • FIG. 2 Representative Examples of Compounds of Formulas I-V.
  • FIG. 3A-3C Scheme for Synthesis of Compounds of Formulas I-V.
  • FIG. 4 Asymmetric synthesis of ⁇ -bromo acids.
  • FIG. 5 Synthesis of ethylene-bridged (N ⁇ to N ⁇ ) arginine analogues.
  • FIG. 6 Synthesis of cyclic and acyclic arginine analogues.
  • FIG. 7 Peptide synthesis of representative peptides of the invention.
  • FIG. 8A-8C Comparisons of induced hypothermia by ⁇ -methyl NT(8-13) analogues.
  • FIG. 9 Hypothermic effects of ABS201 after IP (solid symbols) and oral administration (open symbols) at 2 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg, respectively.
  • FIG. 10A-10B Comparison of hypothermic effects after IP and oral administration for KH29 ( 10 A) and KH30 ( 10 B).
  • FIG. 11A-11B Dose-response curves for ABS201 after IP administration.
  • FIG. 12 Dose-dependent hypothermic response to ABS201 after oral administration.
  • FIG. 13 Attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity after IP administration of ABS201.
  • FIG. 14 Attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity after oral administration of ABS201.
  • FIG. 15 Reversal of PPI induced in Brattleboro rats by ABS201 administered orally.
  • FIG. 16 Effect of ABS201 and haloperidol on catalepsy.
  • FIG. 17 Hypothermic effects of chronic administration of ABS201 after daily dose of 5 mg/kg ABS201.
  • FIG. 18 Effect of repeated daily administration of ABS201 on d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion after daily doses of 5 mg/kg ABS201.
  • FIG. 19 Synthesis of Fmoc-Proline-OH*.
  • FIG. 23 Comparison of the sites of absorbtion of ABS 201 in the GI tract.
  • FIG. 24 Antinociceptive Activity of ABS201 (5 mg/kg) and Morphine (5 mg/kg).
  • FIG. 25 Evaluation of ABS tolerance in rats dosed daily with 5 mg/kg ABS201 for 5 days as determined by of MPEs.
  • FIG. 26 The structures of NT[8-13] and peptides ABS1, ABS13, ABS201, ABS15, ABS16, ABS 17 and ABS19, which exhibit enhanced NTR-2 to NTR-1 binding affinities.
  • FIG. 27 Structures of peptides designed to be better NTR-2 selective ligands.
  • FIG. 28 Analgesic effects of (A) ABS201, (B) ABS205, (C) ABS210, (D) ABS212, and (E) ABS220 administered by gavage at a dose of 20 mg/kg.
  • FIG. 29 Analgesic effect of (A) ABS232 and (B)ABS239 administered by gavage at a dose of 20 mg/kg.
  • FIG. 30 Analgesic effects of ABS212 determined using the hotplate assay. Comparison of the analgesic effects of ABS212 (10 mg/kg) and morphine (5 mg/kg) (A); dose response data for ABS212 administered by I.P. injection (B) or orally (C).
  • FIG. 31 Analgesic effects of ABS212 determined using the formalin assay. Comparison of the analgesic effects of ABS212 (10 mg/kg) and morphine (5 mg/kg) (A); dose response data for ABS212 administered by I.P. injection (B) or orally (C).
  • FIG. 32 Dose response data for ABS212 administered I.P.(A) and orally (B) as determined in the tail flick assay.
  • FIG. 33 Effects of ABS212 administered by I.P. injection determined using the Chung model of neuropathic pain.
  • alkyl refers to a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl and the like.
  • Preferred alkyl groups herein contain from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkenyl refers to a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms, with preferred groups within this class containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and structural formula containing a carbon-carbon double bond.
  • alkynyl refers to a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms, with preferred groups within this class containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and a structural formula containing a carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the term “lower” refers to a moiety having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • alkylating agent as provided herein is a compound with the structural formula RX, where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group as previously described, and X, which is preferably a halide such as chloride, bromide or iodide.
  • non-natural amino acid refers to an organic compound that is a congener of a natural amino acid in that it has a structure similar to a natural amino acid so that it mimics the structure and reactivity of a natural amino acid.
  • the non-natural amino acid as defined herein generally increases or enhances the properties of a peptide (e.g., selectivity, stability) when the non-natural amino acid is either substituted for a natural amino acid unit of a peptide or otherwise incorporated into a peptide.
  • peptide refers to a class of compounds composed of amino acids chemically bound together.
  • the amino acids are chemically bound together via amide linkages (—CONH—); however, the amino acids may be bound together by other chemical bonds known in the art.
  • the amino acids may be bound by amine linkages.
  • Peptide as used herein includes oligomers of amino acids and small and large peptides, including polypeptides.
  • the term “activity” refers to a biological activity.
  • pharmacological activity refers to the inherent physical properties of a peptide or polypeptide. These properties include but are not limited to half-life, solubility, and stability and other pharmacokinetic properties.
  • organic acid salt refers to the salt form of an amine group with an alkyl or aryl C 1 -C 9 carboxylic, sulfonic, or phosphoric acid.
  • inorganic acid salt refers to the salt form of an amine group with a mineral acid such as hydrochloric, sulfuric, sulfonic, phosphoric, nitric, nitrous, or hydrobromic acid.
  • aromatic of C 6 to C 18 refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon such as phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, or an arylalkyl hydrocarbon such as benzyl, phenethyl or naphthylmethylenyl.
  • heteroaromatic of C 4 to C 18 and of one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination refers to a heteroaromatic hydrocarbon containing one or two heteroatoms or an alkyl heteroaromatic hydrocarbon such as thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, azathienyl, azafuryl, pyridinyl, thiapyridinyl, pyrazinyl, methylenylpyridinyl, ethylenylpyridinyl, methylenylpyrrolyl and the like.
  • R or S in connection with stereochemistry has the ordinary meaning designating the optical isomerism of the selected carbon.
  • R in this context should not be confused with R as a substituents.
  • the chemical, pharmaceutical and biological terms used herein follow the ordinary and customary meanings one of skill, such as a Ph.D. researcher in the field would attribute to them. Such meanings may be found in appropriate technical dictionaries and treatises such as but not limited to “Hawley's Condensed Chemical Dictionary”, 11 th Ed., Sax and Lewis Editors, Van Nostrand Reinhold Publishing, New York, N.Y. 1987; “Concise Chemical and Technical Dictionary”, 4 th enlarged Ed.
  • the present invention is directed to certain desamino amino acid compounds, their incorporation as extenders or as congeners in known biologically active peptides, and the use of the compounds and peptides in medical diagnosis, treatment and screening.
  • Several aspects of the invention concern the mimicry of the desamino amino acid compounds for the natural amino acids arginine and/or lysine.
  • congeners for these natural amino acid moieties in known biologically active peptides By their use as congeners for these natural amino acid moieties in known biologically active peptides, truncated versions of the peptides can be prepared in which the biological activity is more selective and longer lasting than that of the known peptide.
  • By their use as extenders their position as the N-terminal moiety adduct of a known biologically active peptide will also provide longer lasting biological activity than that of the known peptide.
  • Neurotensin is a 13 amino acid peptide having neurological properties. Its cleavage at AA7 to produce truncated neurotensin (8-13) provides a peptide having selective biological activity. According to the invention, conversion of the AA8 arginine to a desamino amino acid moiety results in a peptide also having significant and selective biological activity.
  • FIG. 1 The examples of NT and the converted versions are shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the biologically active peptides of the present invention have the desamino amino acid moiety as their N-terminal moiety.
  • These peptides have known amino acid sequences of biologically active amino acids wherein the desamino amino acid is either covalently coupled through an amide bond with the N-terminus amine group of the known peptide (extended peptide) or is substituted for its corresponding congener moiety (analogous natural amino acid moiety) within the peptide (truncated version).
  • the peptide becomes truncated at the position of substitution so that the desamino amino acid moiety becomes the new N-terminus and the amino acid residues upstream of this position are no longer part of the sequence (truncated peptide).
  • the extended and truncated peptides can have longer lifetimes in vivo and can have biological activities like those of the natural peptides except that the activities will be more selective.
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl of C 1 -C 5 , more preferably hydrogen or methyl, provided that when m is 0 or 1 and n is 0 to 5, R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are not all H. In another embodiment, n is 4. In yet a further embodiment, R is an H, methyl, ethyl or propyl. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • n 4, m is 0, R 1 is hydrogen, R 2 is methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, m is 1, R 1 and R 2 are methyl, R 3 is hydrogen or methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, m is 1, R 1 is methyl, R 2 , and R 3 are hydrogen, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, m is 1, R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are hydrogen, the compound of formula I is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • m 0, R 1 and R 2 are methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3 m is 0, R 1 and R 2 are ethyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • esters or salts of any of the foregoing preferred embodiments a-l are also preferred.
  • Preferred embodiments of Formula II include those wherein when n is 3, dashed line a is not present. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein X is hydrogen, and wherein Y and R 4 are the same lower branched or straight chain alkyl. In yet another preferred embodiment, R 4 and R 5 are, independently, hydrogen or methyl.
  • dashed line a is not present
  • X is hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl of C 1 -C 5 , preferably methyl or ethyl
  • Y is hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl of C 1 -C 5 , preferably methyl
  • dashed line a is present and z is 2, and preferably, n is 3.
  • Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • n 3
  • dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R 4 is methyl, X is hydrogen, Y is methyl, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • dashed line a 3
  • the compound of formula II is an acid
  • z 2
  • R 4 is hydrogen
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • dashed line a 3
  • the compound of formula II is an acid
  • z 2
  • R 4 is methyl
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R 4 is hydrogen, X is methyl, Y is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R 4 is hydrogen, X is ethyl, Y is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4
  • dashed line a is present, the compound of formula II is an acid, z is 2, R 4 is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • dashed line a 3
  • the compound of formula II is an acid
  • z 2
  • R 4 is methyl
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • esters or salts of any of the forgoing preferred embodiments a-l are also preferred.
  • a third aspect of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention is illustrated by Formula III.
  • Preferred embodiments of Formula III include those wherein R 6 and R 7 are independently, hydrogen or lower alkyl or straight chain alkyl of C 1 -C 5 , preferably hydrogen or methyl, even more preferably all are hydrogen.
  • z is 2 or 3, preferably 3.
  • n is 3.
  • Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • n 2
  • z 2
  • R 6 and R 7 are hydrogen
  • the compound of formula III is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, z is 2, R 6 and R 7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, z is 3, R 6 and R 7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, z is 2, R 6 and R 7 are methyl, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, z is 3, R 6 and R 7 are methyl, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • esters or salts of the preferred foregoing embodiments a-j are also preferred.
  • a fourth aspect of the invention is provided by the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula IV.
  • Preferred embodiments of the compounds of Formula IV include those wherein R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are, independently, hydrogen or lower straight or branched chain alkyl of C 1 -C 5 , preferably hydrogen, methyl or ethyl.
  • R 10 is methyl.
  • R 9 is hydrogen
  • R 10 is methyl
  • R 11 is hydrogen
  • n is 3.
  • Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • n 3
  • R 9 and R 11 are hydrogen
  • R 10 is methyl
  • the compound of formula IV is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • R 9 is hydrogen
  • R 10 and R 11 are methyl
  • the compound of formula IV is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • R 9 is hydrogen
  • R 10 is methyl
  • R 11 is ethyl
  • the compound of formula IV is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 2
  • R 9 and R 11 are hydrogen
  • R 10 is methyl
  • the compound of formula IV is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 2
  • R 9 is hydrogen
  • R 10 and R 11 are methyl
  • the compound of formula IV is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4
  • R 9 is are hydrogen
  • R 10 is methyl
  • R 11 is ethyl
  • the compound of formula IV is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • esters or salts of the foregoing preferred embodiments a-f are also preferred.
  • a fifth aspect of the invention is provided by the desamino amino acid compounds of formula V.
  • Preferred embodiments of the compounds of formula V include those wherein R 12 , R 13 , and R 14 are, independently, hydrogen or lower straight or branched chain alkyl of C 1 -C 5 , preferably hydrogen, methyl or ethyl.
  • R 12 is methyl.
  • R 13 can be hydrogen
  • R 14 can methyl, ethyl or propyl
  • R 13 and R 14 can be any combination of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl or propyl
  • n is 2 or 3.
  • Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • n 3
  • R 12 and R 13 are hydrogen
  • R 14 is methyl
  • the compound of formula V is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • R 12 is methyl
  • R 13 and R 14 are methyl
  • the compound of formula V is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 3
  • R 12 is methyl
  • R 13 is methyl
  • R 14 is ethyl
  • the compound of formula V is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 2
  • R 12 is methyl
  • R 13 is hydrogen and R 14 is methyl
  • the compound of formula V is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 2
  • R 12 is methyl
  • R 13 and R 14 are methyl
  • the compound of formula V is an acid
  • the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • n 4, R 12 is methyl, R 13 is methyl, and R 14 is ethyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at C ⁇ is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • esters or salts of the foregoing preferred embodiments a-f are also preferred.
  • Especially preferred non-natural desamino amino acid compounds of the invention include the formulas provided in FIG. 2 wherein R is H, methyl or ethyl.
  • Certain embodiments of the invention provide protected intermediates and protected non-natural amino acids of the invention. Certain embodiments provide protected intermediates and protected non-natural amino acids of the invention, wherein the side chain amine group is protected by a protecting group that prevents undesired reaction of the amino group and is removable by a chemical method that does not also cause amide group cleavage. Certain embodiments provide protected intermediates and protected non-natural amino acids of the invention, wherein the side chain carboxyl group is protected by a protecting group that prevents undesired reaction of the carboxyl group and is removable by a chemical method that does not also cause carboxyl group cleavage.
  • the protecting group is t-butoxy carbonyl (BOC) or fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC).
  • the protecting group is BOC, FMOC, Alloc (allyloxycarbonyl), CBZ (benzyloxycarbonyl), Pbf (2,2,4,6,7-pentamethyldihydrobenzofuran-5-sulfonyl), NO2 (nitro), Pmc (2,2,5,7,8-pentamethylchroman-6-sulfonyl), Mtr (4-methoxy-2,3,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonyl), or Tos (tosyl).
  • the structures of the non-natural desamino amino acids of formulas I-V are similar to those of the naturally occurring amino acids lysine, arginine as well as the naturally occurring glutamate biosynthesis intermediate, ornithine.
  • the compounds of the invention differ from the corresponding natural amino acids due, inter alia, a longer or shorter methylene bridge between the (i) carboxyl terminus, which forms the N-terminus bond with the adjacent amino acid unit in a peptide, (ii) the presence of a —H or an alkyl group in place of the alpha amino group, and (iii) the organo group substitution of the amine side chain.
  • the extended bridge of the invention compared to the natural amino acid bridge is one carbon length longer or shorter (i.e., the homo- or des-forms).
  • the compounds of the invention have, inter alia, longer, shorter, or equivalent methylene bridge lengths and have substitutions at various moieties, form different moieties, or link moieties to form ring structures, compared to the comparable natural amino acid.
  • each of the compounds of the invention can be prepared as the acid, amide, salt or ester.
  • the non-natural amino acids of the present invention will be charged; however; in cell membranes and other non-polar regions of the cell, the non-natural amino acids may not be charged.
  • the ester group of the non-natural amino acids of the present invention is methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, benzyl or allyl.
  • the counter-ion for the salts of the non-natural amino acids is sodium, potassium, ammonium and tetra-alkyl ammonium.
  • Some embodiments of the invention provide semisynthetic peptides comprising a non-natural amino acid compound of the invention.
  • the semisynthetic peptide comprises a non-natural amino acid compound as its N-terminus moiety.
  • the semisynthetic peptide comprises a non-natural amino acid compound as the N-terminal moiety of a semisynthetic peptide of neurotensin (8-13).
  • the semisynthetic peptide is ABS201, ABS202, ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS226, ABS227, ABS228, ABS230, ABS232, ABS234 or ABS239.
  • the semisynthetic peptide has an extended half-life in vivo as compared to a peptide having the same sequence as the semisynthetic peptide that does not comprise the non-natural amino acid compound substituted as its N-terminus moiety.
  • the semisynthetic peptide has analgesic and/or antipsychotic activity. Examples of semisynthetic peptides having antipsychotic and/or analgesic activity are shown in the tables below.
  • compositions comprising a peptide of the invention and a pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the peptide is present in unit dosage form.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide cosmetic formulations comprising a non-natural amino acid compound of the invention and a cosmetic base formulation. Certain embodiments of the present invention provide cosmetic formulations comprising a semisynthetic peptide of the invention and a cosmetic base formulation. In certain embodiments, the cosmetic base formulation is an aqueous or oil base.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the non-natural amino acid compounds of the invention for use in medical therapy.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of the non-natural amino acid compounds of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating psychosis in a mammal. Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of the semisynthetic peptides of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating psychosis in a mammal. In certain embodiments, the psychosis is schizophrenia.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of a compound of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating cancer, obesity, Parkingson's disease or psychostimulatn abuse in a mammal.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of a compound of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating pain in a mammal.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the semisynthetic peptides of the invention for use in medical therapy.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to lower the body temperature of a patient, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a semisynthetic peptide of the invention so as to lower the body temperature of the patient.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to lower the body temperature of a patient, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to lower the body temperature of the patient.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat a patient with psychosis, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a peptide of the invention so as to treat the psychosis.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat a patient with psychosis, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to treat the psychosis.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat cancer, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a peptide of any of the invention so as to treat the cancer.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat cancer, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to treat the cancer.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat pain, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a peptide of the invention so as to treat the pain.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat pain, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to treat the pain.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method for screening a peptide containing a non-natural amino acid compound for an activity, comprising the steps of: a) measuring a biological activity of a first peptide having a known amino acid sequence; and b) measuring the same biological activity of a semisynthetic peptide of any of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • the biological activity is poptosis, apoptosis, cell signaling, ligand binding, transcription, translation, metabolism, cell growth, cell differentiation, homeostasis, half-life, solubility, or stability.
  • the biological activity includes a direct or indirect assessment of the ability of the semisynthetic peptide to pass through a biological barrier.
  • the biological activity is selectivity.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of treating a patient with a disease that is affected by administration to the patient of a known first peptide, comprising administering to the patient a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of increasing the ability of a known first peptide to cross a biological barrier of a subject, comprising substituting a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • the barrier comprises the blood brain barrier, a cell membrane, intestinal epithelium, skin, or blood-ocular.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of increasing the selectivity of a known peptide, comprising substituting for the known peptide a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of increasing the resistance of a known peptide to digestion by a peptidase, comprising substituting for the known peptide a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of treating a patient with a disease that is affected by administration to the patient of a known first peptide that crosses a body barrier, comprising administering to the patient a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of treating a patient with a disease of the brain that is affected by administration to the patient of a known first peptide, comprising administering to the patient a semisynthetic peptide of any of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method for preparing a semisynthetic peptide with an extended half-life in vivo comprising substituting for a known peptide a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • the preparation of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention follows the overall synthetic scheme depicted in FIG. 3 .
  • the first step in this process is the production of omega halogen carboxylic acids having a methylene unit chain length corresponding to n of formulas I through V.
  • this intermediate is designated as compound 27.
  • compound 27 Following the production of compound 27, its ⁇ -halo group can be easily displaced with excess nucleophilic agent to produce the desamino amino acid compounds of Formulas I-V.
  • the omega halogen compound can be used directly in succeeding steps.
  • the R group is added through the following synthesis.
  • the reaction conditions for production of compound 27 involve protection of the carboxyl group of an omega carboxylic acid by formation of an acyl oxazolone.
  • the acyl oxazolone is converted to an enolate and the enolate is combined with an alkylating agent such as alkyl iodide or alkyl mesylate to form compound 27.
  • an alkylating agent such as alkyl iodide or alkyl mesylate
  • the omega halo carboxylic acid compounds 25 can be converted to any of the side chain modifications by coupling the appropriate side chain moiety and the omega halo group of compound 25. Appropriate protection of the carboxyl group is also advantageously employed.
  • the conditions for these reactions, and the appropriate alkylating and substituting agents follow the teaching set forth in “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 4 th Edition, J. March, Wiley InterScience, New York, N.Y. 1992, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the omega halo carboxylic acid compound 27 can be combined with the appropriate amine nucleophile such as ammonia, a primary amine or a secondary amine.
  • the formulas of the amine nucleophiles correspond to the side chain moiety of Formula I.
  • the reaction conditions will follow those appropriate for amine nucleophilic substitution as are disclosed in “Advanced Organic Chemistry” cited above and incorporated herein as if fully repeated. These compounds can be used directly in the following peptide synthesis provided that the side chain amine group is appropriately protected or otherwise inhibited from carboxyl condensation.
  • the omega halo compound 27 may first be protected at the carboxyl position and then can be reacted sequentially with a diamine and cyanogen bromide. Deprotection and purification will afford the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula II. These compounds can be used directly in peptide synthesis with appropriate side chain protection.
  • the compounds of Formulas III and IV can also be prepared by addition of the side chain moiety to the omega halo carboxylic acid compounds 27. In this instance, protection of the carboxyl group is unnecessary.
  • Preparation of the appropriate thiourea compound can be accomplished by addition of an alkylating agent such as an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl halide to thiourea, N-substituted thiourea or N,N-disubstituted thiourea (commercially available).
  • an alkylating agent such as an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl halide
  • the appropriate cyclic thiourea compounds can be prepared by combining an alkylating agent such as an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl halide with the corresponding unsubstituted, N-substituted or N,N-disubstituted cyclic diazathione (commercially available).
  • the crude reaction products can be purified by known methods such as ion-exchange chromatography to yield the desamino amino acid compounds of Formulas III and IV which can be used directly in peptide synthesis with appropriate side chain protection.
  • the compounds of formula V can be prepared by first protection of the carboxyl group as an acyl oxazolone. Subsequent to formation of the protected carboxylic acid, an organic substituent at the alpha carbon (R) can be added if desired following the procedure given above. In the next step, the omega halo group can be reacted with cyanide to form an omega cyano protected carboxylic acid. This intermediate can be reacted with an alkali metal organo amine (XNR 13 R 14 ) to form the amidine anion. The amidine anion may be quenched with acid, water or an alkyl halide to form either the unsubstituted imine moiety of the amidine or the alkyl substituted imine moiety of the amidine, respectively. This amidine protected carboxylic acid may then be employed in the synthetic scheme described above for production of the desired peptide.
  • the side chains of the compounds of Formulas I-V may either be appropriately protected or determined to be sufficiently hindered that they will not enter into a peptide condensation reaction.
  • the side chain of the compounds of Formula I is a primary amine group, it may be appropriately protected according to the teaching of the art associated with peptide synthesis. See for example, the review of amine protecting groups provided in “Compendium of Organic Synthetic Methods,” I&S Harrison, Wiley Interscience, New York, N.Y., 1971, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • an appropriate protecting group can be t-butoxy carbonyl having the acronym BOC or fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl having the acronym FMOC.
  • the BOC and FMOC protecting groups can be removed by mild treatment with acid, such as aqueous trifluoroacetic acid, and base, such as piperidine, respectively.
  • the omega halo carboxylic acid compound 27 can be coupled with the penultimate peptide to form an omega halo acyl moiety at the N-terminus of the penultimate peptide. Because the omega halo carboxylic acid compound 27 does not contain an amino moiety on its side chain, protection and spurious peptide formation are of less concern.
  • the amino moiety can undergo nucleophilic reaction with the omega halo group of the acylated penultimate peptide as described above for formation of the compounds of Formulas I-V. The desired peptide having a residue of a compound of Formula I-V at its N-terminus is produced.
  • appropriate protection of carboxyl and amino side chains and appropriate protection of the C-terminus may be employed to prevent undesirable reactions of these groups.
  • the invention includes the truncated and extended peptides which contain as their N-terminus moiety the residue of the compound of Formula I, II, III, IV or V.
  • These peptides can be synthesized by the Merrifield solid phase method, which is an established method for preparing peptides to those skilled in the art. See R. B. Merrifield, Science, 232, 341-347 (1986), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference for an explanation of, and conditions for the Merrifield solid phase peptide synthesis.
  • the peptide minus the N-terminal amino acid unit, or penultimate peptide can be expressed recombinantly by known biological methods and the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula I-V can be added as the N-terminus by enzymatic condensation using an aminopeptidase. See “Enzyme Structure and Mechanism,” Alan Fersht, W. H. Freeman, New York, N.Y. (1985), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, for an explanation of, and conditions for, recombinant expression of peptides.
  • the Formulas I-V compounds can be appropriately protected at the side chain amino group with standard protecting groups. In a preferred embodiment, the protecting groups are BOC and/or FMOC.
  • the penultimate peptide can be produced in bulk and then coupled to any of the Formula I-V compounds using the protection and coupling techniques of the Merrifield solid phase synthesis.
  • an appropriate anchor resin designed for amino group exposure the carboxy terminus amino acid unit of the peptide having an amino protecting group such as an FMOC group is anchored to the resin through a selectively cleavable carboxyl coupling link.
  • the amino group of the anchored carboxy terminus unit is then deprotected and the additional amino protected amino acid units are then sequentially coupled in proper sequence.
  • Each coupling step will involve deprotection of the protected amino group of the anchored peptide chain followed by peptide condensation between that unprotected amino group and the carboxyl group of the next amino acid unit.
  • the condensation can be facilely obtained by carbodiimide coupling, by Schotten Bauman reaction or by activated acyl group condensation. These condensation reactions are described in “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, cited above. Protection of amine and carboxyl side chains using appropriate protecting groups that differ from the protecting groups of the alpha amino group entering into the peptide condensation will enable selective peptide condensation of the sequential amino acid units. Selection of appropriate protection groups and conditions for solid phase peptide synthesis are described in the Merrifield reference, cited above.
  • the penultimate peptides may also be produced by recombinant expression.
  • This biological method involves re-engineering a microbe to express the penultimate peptide.
  • a DNA segment encoding the penultimate peptide sequence can be inserted in proper reading from into a plasmid or other vector capable of causing microbial expression of the DNA.
  • the vector will also contain appropriate control, promoter and selection DNA segments.
  • the microbe mixture can be selected for appropriate transfection by treatment with the corresponding selection agent.
  • the agent will be an antibiotic and the vector will contain a sequence encoding the corresponding detoxifying enzyme for the antibiotic. Chloramphenacol and penicillin are two of such agents.
  • the penultimate peptide may be purified by known techniques such as lyophilization, chromatography and the like. These recombinant techniques for peptide expression are fully set forth in “Cold Spring Harbor—Current Protocols in Molecular Biology,” Wiley Interscience, Cold Spring Harbor (2003), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the penultimate sequence of the peptide, NT(9-13), can be synthesized in bulk using p-alkoxybenzyl alcohol solid phase methodology (65) and stored in the fully protected form.
  • N ⁇ -Fmoc-leucine, N ⁇ -Fmoc-isoleucine, N ⁇ -Fmoc-tert-leucine, N ⁇ -Fmoc-(But)-tyrosine, N ⁇ -Fmoc-(Boc)-tryptophan, N ⁇ -Fmoc-proline, and N ⁇ -Fmoc-(Pbf)-arginine were purchased from Advanced Chemtech (Louisville, Ky.). PyBOP® was purchased from Novabiochem (San Diego, Calif.).
  • N-hydroxybenzoriazole HABt
  • DIPEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine
  • TIS triisopropylsilane
  • TAS trifluoroacetic acid
  • Fmoc fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl
  • NH 3 ammonia
  • NH 2 CH 3 methylamine
  • NH(CH 3 ) 2 dimethylamine
  • N(CH 3 ) 3 trimethylamine
  • EtOH ethanol.
  • resin-bound N ⁇ -Fmoc-leucine can be swelled in DMF prior to Fmoc cleavage with piperidine (20% in DMF).
  • the piperidine solution can be removed with vacuum filtration and the resin-bound amino acid washed with DMF and CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • Amino acids (4 eq) can be activated in DMF with HOBt (4 eq), PyBOP (4 eq), and DIPEA (10 eq) and added directly to the peptide reaction vessel.
  • the amino acid couplings can be conducted for approximately 6 hr, the resin washed with DMF and CH 2 Cl 2 and monitored with the Kaiser test (66) for the presence of free amines. Residues can be recoupled when necessary.
  • Reverse phase high pressure liquid chromatography can be used to purify the foregoing crude peptides.
  • a Waters dual pump system in combination with a Waters C18 radial compression column can be used for this purpose.
  • Effluent can be monitored by UV absorbance at 280 nm.
  • the invention provides a method for screening a peptide for an activity or pharmacological activity.
  • the method includes the steps of: a) measuring an activity or pharmacological activity of a peptide having a selected natural amino acid sequence, and b) measuring the same activity or pharmacological activity of an extended or truncated peptide based upon the same amino acid sequence as the foregoing peptide wherein the N-terminus is a non-natural amino acid having the formula I-V, described above; and c) comparing the measured activity or pharmacological activity of the peptides from steps a) and b) to determine whether the peptide of step b) has the desired activity or pharmacological activity.
  • the activities for which the present invention screens can include any activity associated with a biologically active peptide or peptidomimetic.
  • the following is a partial list of the many activities that can be determined in the present screening method:
  • Receptor agonist/antagonist activity A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: “The RBI Handbook of Receptor Classification and Signal Transduction” K. J. Watling, J. W. Kebebian, J. L. Neumeyer, eds. Research Biochemicals International, Natick, Mass., 1995, and references therein. Methods of analysis can be found in: T. Kenakin “Pharmacologic Analysis of Drug-Receptor Interactions” 2 nd Ed. Raven Press, New York, 1993, and references therein.
  • Enzyme inhibition A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: H. Zollner “Handbook of Enzyme Inhibitors”, 2 nd Ed. VCH Weinheim, FRG, 1989, and references therein.
  • Anticancer activities A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: I. J. Fidler and R. J. White “Design of Models for Testing Cancer Therapeutic Agents”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1982, and references therein.
  • Antibiotic and antiviral (especially anti-HIV) activities A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: “antibiotics in Laboratory Medicine”, 3 rd Ed., V. Lorian, ed. Williams and Wilkens, Baltimore, 1991, and references therein. A compendia of anti-HIV screens for measuring these activities can be found in: “HIV Volume 2: Biochemistry, Molecular Biology and Drug Discovery”, J. Karn, ed., IRL Press, Oxford, 1995, and references therein.
  • Immunomodulatory activity A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: V. St. Georgiev (1990) “Immunomodulatory Activity of Small Peptides” Trends Pharm. Sci. 11, 373-378.
  • Pharmacokinetic properties The pharmacological activities assayed in the screening method include half-life, solubility, or stability, among others.
  • methods of analysis and measurement of pharmacokinetic properties can be found in: J.-P. Labaune “Handbook of Pharmacokinetics: Toxicity Assessment of Chemicals”, Ellis Horwood Ltd., Chichester, 1989, and references therein.
  • the peptide of step a) can consist of natural amino acids.
  • the peptide of step a) can contain mostly natural amino acids, but also contain one or a small number of non-natural amino acids.
  • Such a peptide is considered to consist essentially of natural amino acids.
  • the peptide of step b) will be the truncated or extended peptide of the invention as described above.
  • the structures of the non-natural amino acids of formulas I-V will be similar to those of the naturally occurring amino acids, lysine and arginine.
  • any extended or truncated peptide can be compared to any peptide having the same downstream sequence and having a known activity or pharmacological activity to determine whether or not the extended or truncated peptide has the same or similar activity or pharmacological activity at the same or different level.
  • the present screening method can also be used to detect an activity or pharmacological activity exhibited by the extended or truncated peptide. Also, the screening method can be used to detect and measure qualitative and quantitative differences in the same or similar activity or pharmacological activity.
  • the methods of the present invention provide evaluation of the alteration of activity of the extended or truncated peptide.
  • the hydrophobicity of the peptide is increased, which can result indirectly in increased binding activity when the desamino amino acid moiety is involved in binding (e.g., receptor-ligand binding, enzyme-cofactor binding, enzyme-substrate binding) and since binding strength is correlated with activity, a peptide higher potency (higher measured activity level) can result.
  • the desamino amino acids of the present invention also can enhance or increase the pharmacological activity of a peptide.
  • a peptide containing a non-natural amino acid is more able to pass a body barrier (e.g., blood brain, blood ocular, skin, intestinal epithelium).
  • a body barrier e.g., blood brain, blood ocular, skin, intestinal epithelium.
  • the desamino amino acids impart increased selectivity and stability to a peptide, the pharmacological activity can also be screened when compared to other peptides.
  • the invention further relates to a method of treating or preventing in a subject a malcondition comprising administering to the subject an extended or truncated peptide having as its N-terminus an amino acid having the formula I-V.
  • the basis peptide from which the extended or truncated peptide is formed will have or will be believed to have a biochemical, physiological, pharmacological or biological relationship with the malcondition to be treated or prevented.
  • the malcondition may be a disease, biological or organic disfunction or an undesirable biological condition that is not ordinarily regarded as a disease or disfunction, such as but not limited to cosmetic malconditions such as skin blotches, acne, and the like.
  • the subject may be a medical or veterinary patient including mammals such as humans, and non-humans mammamls such as dogs, cats, cows, sheep, pigs as well as avian.
  • the malconditions that can be treated or prevented and the peptides that can be used are numerous.
  • a neurotensin peptide analogue that incorporates a non-natural amino acid of the invention can be synthesized.
  • Such a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be used to treat obesity, diabetes, sexual dysfunction, Parkingson's disease, atherosclerosis, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, hypercholesterolemia, or hypertrigylceridemia.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used to induce vasodilation, muscle relaxation, or to decrease appetite.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be used to treat hyperthermia; hypothermia; gastrointestinal ulcers; substance abuse; depression; Alzheimer's disease; tardive dyskinesia; panic attack; gastrointestinal reflux disorder; irritable bowel syndrome; diarrhea; cholic; dyspepsia; pancreatitis; esophagitis; gastroparesis; neurological diseases such as schizophrenia, psychoses, anxiety, manic depression, delirium dementia, severe mental retardation, and dyskinesias such as Huntington's disease and Tourett's syndrome; fungal and viral infections, including HIV-1 and HIV-2 infections; pain (i.e., an analgesic); cancer (including gastrointesitinal tumors); anorexia; bulimia; asthma; Parkinson's disease; acute heart failure; hypotension; hypertension; urinary retention; osteoporosis; angina pectoris; myocardial infarction; allergies; inflammation; or benign prostatic hypertrophy.
  • the methods of treatment of the present invention can also include combination therapy where other pharmaceutically active compounds useful for the treatment of obesity or other diseases are used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention.
  • an obese patient or a patient at risk of becoming obese can be administered a combination of: 1) a synthetic NT peptide of the invention; and 2) an additional compound useful to treat obesity, diabetes [including (NIDDM) and the conditions and/or diseases associated with diabetes, such as nephropathy, neuropathy, retinopathy, cardiomyopathy, cataracts, and polycystic ovary syndrome], atherosclerosis, hypercholesterolemia, hypertrigylceridemia, sexual dysfunction (including erectile dysfunction), insulin resistance, or impaired glucose tolerance, or combinations of compounds useful to treat these diseases.
  • classes of compounds that can be used to treat obesity include the active compound(s) in appetite suppressants such as Adipex®, Bontril®, Desoxyn Gradumet®, Fastin®, Ionamin®, and Meridia®, and lipase inhibitors such as Xenical®.
  • appetite suppressants such as Adipex®, Bontril®, Desoxyn Gradumet®, Fastin®, Ionamin®, and Meridia®
  • lipase inhibitors such as Xenical®.
  • Additional anti-obesity agents that can be used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention include a ⁇ 3-adrenergic receptor agonist, a cholecystokinin-A agonist, a monoamine reuptake inhibitor, a sympathomimetic agent, a serotoninergic agent, a dopamine agonist, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor agonist or mimetic, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor analog, a cannabinoid receptor antagonist, a melanin concentrating hormone antagonist, leptin, a leptin analog, a leptin receptor agonist, a galanin antagonist, a bombesin agonist, a neuropeptide-Y antagonist (including NPY-1 and NPY-5), a thyromimetic agent, dehydroepiandrosterone or an analog thereof, a glucocorticoid receptor agonist or antagonist, an orexin receptor antagonist, a
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be administered in combination with a compound that is known to treat hypertension.
  • a compound that is known to treat hypertension examples include calcium blockers, ACE inhibitors, diuretics, angiotensin II receptor blockers, .beta.-blockers, and alpha.-adrenergic blockers.
  • combinations of compounds in the above-recited classes have been used to treat hypertension.
  • Some examples of specific compounds that can be used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention include quinapril; amlodipine, including the besylate salt; nifedipine; doxazosin, including the mesylate salt; and prazosin, including the hydrochloride salt.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be used in combination with compounds useful for the treatment of diabetes, including impaired glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (Type 1) and non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM or Type 2). Also intended to be encompassed in the treatment of diabetes are the diabetic complications, such as neuropathy, nephropathy, retinopathy, cardiomyopathy or cataracts.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used in combination with an aldose reductase inhibitor.
  • Aldose reductase inhibitors constitute a class of compounds that have become widely known for their utility in treating conditions arising from complications of diabetes, such as diabetic neuropathy and nephropathy. Such compounds are well known to those skilled in the art and are readily identified by standard biological tests.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used in combination with a sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitor.
  • Sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitors lower fructose levels and have been used to treat or prevent diabetic complications such as neuropathy, retinopathy, nephropathy, cardiomyopathy, microangiopathy, and macroangiopathy.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used in combination with a glucocorticoid receptor antagonist.
  • the glucocorticoid receptor (GR) is present in glucocorticoid responsive cells where it resides in the cytosol in an inactive state until it is stimulated by an agonist. Upon stimulation the glucocorticoid receptor translocates to the cell nucleus where it specifically interacts with DNA and/or protein(s) and regulates transcription in a glucocorticoid responsive manner.
  • GR antagonists can be used in the treatment of diseases associated with an excess or a deficiency of glucocorticoids in the body.
  • they may be used to treat the following: obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, hypertension, Syndrome X, depression, anxiety, glaucoma, human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) or acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS), neurodegeneration (for example, Alzheimer's and Parkinson's), cognition enhancement, Cushing's Syndrome, Addison's Disease, osteoporosis, frailty, inflammatory diseases (such as osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, asthma and rhinitis), adrenal dysfunction, viral infection, immunodeficiency, immunomodulation, autoimmune diseases, allergies, wound healing, compulsive behavior, multi-drug resistance, addiction, psychosis, anorexia, cachexia, post-traumatic stress syndrome, post-surgical bone fracture, medical catabolism and prevention of muscle frailty.
  • HCV human immunodeficiency virus
  • AIDS acquired immunodeficiency syndrome
  • neurodegeneration for example, Alzheimer's and Parkinson's
  • cognition enhancement for example, Alzheimer's and Parkinson'
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be administered in combination with other pharmaceutical agents such as cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitors and cholesterol absorption inhibitors, especially HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and HMG-CoA synthase inhibitors, HMG-CoA reductase and synthase gene expression inhibitors, CETP inhibitors, bile acid sequesterants, fibrates, ACAT inhibitors, squalene synthetase inhibitors, anti-oxidants and niacin.
  • a a synthetic NT peptide of the invention may also be administered in combination with naturally occurring compounds that act to lower plasma cholesterol levels. These naturally occurring compounds are commonly called nutraceuticals and include, for example, garlic extract, Benecol®, and niacin.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention be administered with a lipase inhibitor and/or a glucosidase inhibitor, which are typically used in the treatment of conditions resulting from the presence of excess triglycerides, free fatty acids, cholesterol, cholesterol esters or glucose including, inter alia, obesity, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, Syndrome X, and the like.
  • Any lipase inhibitor or glucosidase inhibitor may be used in a combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention.
  • Preferred lipase inhibitors comprise gastric or pancreatic lipase inhibitors such as orlistat.
  • Preferred glucosidase inhibitors comprise amylase inhibitors.
  • a lipase inhibitor is a compound that inhibits the metabolic cleavage of dietary triglycerides into free fatty acids and monoglycerides. Under normal physiological conditions, lipolysis occurs via a two-step process that involves acylation of an activated serine moiety of the lipase enzyme.
  • a fatty acid-lipase hemiacetal intermediate which is then cleaved to release a diglyceride.
  • the lipase-fatty acid intermediate is cleaved, resulting in free lipase, a monoglyceride and a fatty acid.
  • the resultant free fatty acids and monoglycerides are incorporated into bile acid-phospholipid micelles, which are subsequently absorbed at the level of the brush border of the small intestine.
  • the micelles eventually enter the peripheral circulation as chylomicrons.
  • lipase inhibitors that selectively limit or inhibit the absorption of ingested fat precursors are useful in the treatment of conditions including obesity, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, Syndrome X, and the like.
  • lipase inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • glucosidase inhibitor may be used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention, however, a generally preferred glucosidase inhibitor is an amylase inhibitor.
  • An amylase inhibitor is a glucosidase inhibitor that inhibits the enzymatic degradation of starch or glycogen into maltose. The inhibition of such enzymatic degradation is beneficial in reducing amounts of bioavailable sugars, including glucose and maltose, and the concomitant deleterious conditions resulting therefrom.
  • Glucosidase and amylase inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the present invention includes the use of a synthetic NT peptide of the invention in combination with apo B secretion/MTP inhibitors.
  • a variety of apo B secretion/MTP inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • a synthetic NT peptide of the invention also can be used in combination with one or more additional compounds that are neurotensin receptor ligands.
  • Non-natural amino acids of the invention can also be incorporated into other peptides to treat malconditions as set out below.
  • Peptides for triggering B and T cell activity can be used to treat autoimmune disease, including uveitis, collagen-induced, adjuvant and rheumatoid arthritis, thyroiditis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis and diabetes.
  • autoimmune disease including uveitis, collagen-induced, adjuvant and rheumatoid arthritis, thyroiditis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis and diabetes.
  • these peptides are interleukins (referenced in Aulitzky, WE; Schuler, M; Peschel, C.; Huber, C.; Interleukins. Clinical pharmacology and therapeutic use. Drugs. 48(5):667-77, November 1994) and cytokines (referenced in Peters, M.; Actions of cytokines on the immune response and viral interactions: an overview. Hepatology. 23(4):909-16, April 1996).
  • Enkephlin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat AIDS, ARC, and cancer, pain modulation, Huntington's, Parkinson's diseases.
  • LHRH and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat prostatic tumors and reproductive physiopathology, including breast cancer, and infertility.
  • Peptides and peptidomimetics that target crucial enzymes, oncogenes or oncogene products, tumor-suppressor genes and their products, growth factors and their corresponding receptors can be used to treat cancer. Examples of these peptides are described in Unger, C. Current concepts of treatment in medical oncology: new anticancer drugs. Journal of Cancer Research & Clinical Oncology. 122(4):189-98, 1996.
  • Neuropeptide Y and other pancreatic polypeptides, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat stress, anxiety, depression and associated vasoconstrictive activities.
  • Gluco-incretins including gastric inhibitory polypeptide, glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide, PACAP/Glucagon and glucagon-like polypeptide-1 and 2 and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat Type II diabetic hyperglycaemia.
  • Atrial natriuretic factor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat congestive heart failure.
  • Integrin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat osteoporosis, scar formation, bone synthesis, inhibition of vascular occlusion, and inhibition of tumor invasion and metastasis.
  • Glucagon, glucagon-like peptide 1, PACAP/Glucagon, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diabetes cardiovascular emergencies.
  • Antithrombotic peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovascular and cerebrovascular diseases.
  • examples of these peptides RGD, D-Phe-Pro-Arg and others named are described in Ojima I.; Chakravarty S.; Dong Q. Antithrombotic agents: from RGD to peptide mimetics. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry. 3(4):337-60, 1995.
  • Cytokines/interleukins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat inflammatory disease, immune response dysfunction, hematopoiesis, mycosis fungoides, aplastic anemia, thrombocytopenia, and malignant melanoma.
  • Examples of these peptides are Interleukins, referenced in Aulitzky et al. and Peters et al.
  • Endothelin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat arterial hypertension, myocardial infarction, congestive heart failure, atherosclerosis, shock conditions, renal failure, asthma and vasospasm
  • Natriuretic hormones and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovasicular disease and acute renal failure. Examples of these peptides are named and described in Espiner, E. A;. Richards, A. M.; Yandle, T. G.; Nicholls, M. G.; Natriuretic hormones. Endocrinology & Metabolism Clinics of North America. 24(3):481-509, 1995.
  • Peptides that activate or inhibit tyrosine kinase, or bind to TK-activating or inhibiting peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat chronic myelogenous and acute lymphocytic leukemias, breast and ovarian cancers and other tyrosine kinase associated diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Smithgall, TE.; SH2 and SH3 domains: potential targets for anti-cancer drug design. Journal of Pharmacological & Toxicological Methods. 34(3):125-32, 1995.
  • Renin inhibitors analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovascular disease, including hypertension and congestive heart failure. Examples of these peptides are described in Rosenberg, S. H.; Renin inhibition. Cardiovascular Drugs & Therapy. 9(5):645-55, 1995.
  • Angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovascular disease, including hypertension and congestive heart failure.
  • Peptides that activate or inhibit tyrosine phosphorylases can be used to treat cardiovascular diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Srivastava, A. K.; Protein tyrosine phosphorylation in cardiovascular system. Molecular & Cellular Biochemistry. 149-150:87-94, 1995.
  • Peptide based antivirals can be used to treat viral diseases.
  • these peptides are described in Toes, R. E.; Feltkamp, M. C.; Ressing, M. E.; Vierboom, M. P.; Blom, R. J.; Brandt, R. M; Hartman, M.; Offringa, R.; Melief, C. J.; Kast, W. M.; Cellular immunity against DNA tumour viruses: possibilities for peptide-based vaccines and immune escape. Biochemical Society Transactions. 23(3):692-6, 1995.
  • Corticotropin releasing factor and peptide analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat disease associated with high CRF, i.e Alzheimer's disease, anorexia nervosa, depressive disorders, arthritis, and multiple sclerosis.
  • Peptide agonists and antagonists of platelet-derived wound-healing formula can be used as a therapy for donor tissue limitations and wound-healing constraints in surgery. Examples of these peptides are described in Rudkin, G. H.; Miller, T. A.; Growth factors in surgery. Plastic & Reconstructive Surgery. 97(2):469-76, 1996.
  • Fibronectin, fibrinopeptide inhibitors and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat metastasis (i.e. enzyme inhibition, tumor cell migration, invasion, and metastasis).
  • metastasis i.e. enzyme inhibition, tumor cell migration, invasion, and metastasis.
  • Chemokine types of cytokine, including interleukin-8, RANTES, and monocyte chemotactic peptide
  • agonists and antagonists can be used to treat arthritis, hypersensitivity, angiogenesis, renal disease, glomerulonephritis, inflammation, and hematopoiesis.
  • Neutral endopeptidase inhibitors and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat hypertension and inflammation. Examples of these peptides are described in Gregoire, J. R; Sheps, S. G; Newer antihypertensive drugs. Current Opinion in Cardiology. 10(5):445-9, 1995.
  • Substance P and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat immune system dysfunction, pain transmission/perception and in autonomic reflexes and behaviors.
  • Alpha-melanocyte-stimulating hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat AIDS, rheumatoid arthritis, and myocardial infarction.
  • Bradykinin (BK) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat inflammatory diseases (edema, etc), asthma, allergic reactions (rhinitis, etc), anesthetic uses, and septic shock.
  • Secretin can be used to treat cardiovascular emergencies.
  • GnRH and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat hormone-dependent breast and prostate tumors.
  • Somatostatin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat gut neuroendocrine tumors.
  • Gastrin, Gastrin Releasing Peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as an adjuvant to chemotherapy or surgery in small cell lung cancer and other malignancies, or to treat allergic respiratory diseases, asthma and allergic rhinitis.
  • Laminin, the Laminin derivative antimetastatic drug YIGSR peptide, Laminin-derived synthetic peptides analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat tumor cell growth, angiogenesis, regeneration studies, vascularization of the eye with diabetes, and ischemia.
  • the peptides of this category can inhibit the tumor growth and metastasis of leukemic cells and may be useful as a potential therapeutic reagent for leukaemic infiltrations. Peptides containing this sequence also inhibit experimental metastasis.
  • Exemplary references include McGowan K A. Marinkovich M P. Laminins and human disease. Microscopy Research & Technique. 51(3):262-79, Nov. 1, 2000; Yoshida N. Ishii E.
  • Defensins, corticostatins, dermaseptins, mangainins, and other antibiotic (antibacterial and antimicrobial) peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat infections, tissue inflammation and endocrine regulation.
  • Vasopressin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, stress and Diabetes insipidus.
  • Oxytocin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders and to induce labor.
  • ACTH-related peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as neurotrophic, neuroprotective, and peripheral demyelinating neuropathy agents.
  • Amyloid-beta peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat Alzheimer's disease.
  • Epidermal growth factor, receptor, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat necrotizing enterocolitis, Zollinger-Ellison syndrome, gastrointestinal ulceration, colitis, and congenital microvillus atrophycarcinomas.
  • Leukocyte adhesion molecules and their ligands, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat atherosclerosis, inflammation. Examples of these peptides are described in Barker, J. N.; Adhesion molecules in cutaneous inflammation. Ciba Foundation Symposium. 189:91-101.
  • Major histocompatibility complex (MHC) binding peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat autoimmune, immunodysfunctional, immuno modulatory diseases and as well as used for their corresponding therapies.
  • MHC Major histocompatibility complex
  • Examples of these peptides are described in Appella, E.; Padlan, E. A.; Hunt, D. F; Analysis of the structure of naturally processed peptides bound by class I and class II major histocompatibility complex molecules. EXS. 73:105-19, 1995.
  • Corticotropin releasing factor can be used to treat neurological disorders.
  • Neurotrophins including brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF), nerve growth factor, and neurotrophin 3 and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders.
  • BDNF brain-derived neurotrophic factor
  • nerve growth factor nerve growth factor
  • neurotrophin 3 analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders.
  • Cytotoxic T-cell activating peptides can be used to treat infectious diseases and cancer. Examples of these peptides are described in: Chesnut R. W.; Sette, A.; Celis, E.; Wentworth, P.; Kubo, R. T.; Alexander, J.; Ishioka, G.; Vitiello, A.; Grey, H. M; Design and testing of peptide-based cytotoxic T-cell-mediated immunotherapeutics to treat infectious diseases and cancer. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology. 6:847-74, 1995.
  • Peptide immunogens for prevention of HIV-1 and HTLV-I retroviral infections can be used to treat AIDS. Examples of these peptides are described in Hart, M. K.; Palker, T. J.; Haynes, B F; Design of experimental synthetic peptide immunogens for prevention of HIV-1 and HTLV-I retroviral infections. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology. 6:821-45, 1995.
  • Galanin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat Alzheimer's disease, depression, eating disorders, chronic pain, prevention of ischemic damage, and growth hormone modulation.
  • Tachykinins neurokinin A and neurokinin B
  • analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat pain transmission/perception and in autonomic reflexes and behaviors.
  • RGD containing peptides can be used to treat various diseases involved with cell adhesion, antithrombotics, and acute renal failure.
  • Osteogenic growth peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as treatment of systemic bone loss. Examples of these peptides are described in Bab IA. Regulatory role of osteogenic growth peptide in proliferation, osteogenesis, and hemopoiesis. Clinical Orthopaedics & Related Research. (313):64-8, 1995.
  • Parathyroid hormone, parathyroid hormone related-peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diseases affecting calcium homeostasis (hypercalcemia), bone metabolism, vascular disease, and atherosclerosis.
  • Kallidin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat tissue injury or inflammation and pain signaling pathological conditions of the CNS.
  • T cell receptor peptide vaccines and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used in immunotherapy. Examples of these peptides are described in Brostoff, S W; T cell receptor peptide vaccines as immunotherapy. Agents & Actions—Supplements. 47:53-8, 1995.
  • Platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat non-neoplastic hyperproliferative disorders, therapy for donor tissue limitations and wound-healing constraints in surgery.
  • PDGF Platelet-derived growth factor
  • Amylin, calcitonin gene related peptides (CGRP) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat insulin-dependent diabetes.
  • Vasoactive intestinal polypeptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat allergic respiratory diseases, asthma and allergic rhinitis, and nervous control of reproductive functions.
  • Growth hormone-releasing hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat growth hormone deficiency and immunomodulation.
  • HIV protease inhibiting peptides can be used to treat AIDS. Examples of these peptides are described in Bugelski, P. J.; Kirsh, R.; Hart, T. K; HIV protease inhibitors: effects on viral maturation and physiologic function in macrophages. Journal of Leukocyte Biology. 56(3):374-80, 1994.
  • Thymopoietin active fragment peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat rheumatoid arthritis and virus infections.
  • Cecropins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as antibacterials.
  • Thyroid releasing hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat spinal cord injury and shock.
  • Erythropoietin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat anemia.
  • Fibroblast growth factor FGF
  • receptor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be as stimulation of bone formation, as well as used as a treatment for Kaposi's sarcoma, neuron regeneration, prostate growth, tumor growth inhibition, and angiogenesis.
  • Stem cell factor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat anemias.
  • GP120, GP160, CD4 fragment peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat AIDS.
  • Insulin-like growth factor, receptor, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat breast and other cancers, noninsulin-dependen diabetest mellitus, cell proliferation, apoptosis, hematopoiesis, AIDS, growth disorders, osteoporosis,and insulin resistance.
  • Colony stimulating factors granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor, and macrophage colony-stimulating factor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat anemias.
  • Lymphocyte activating peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for immunomodulation.
  • these peptides are described in Loleit, M.; Deres, K.; Wiesmuller, K. H.; Jung, G.; Eckert, M.; Bessler, W. G; Biological activity of the Escherichia coli lipoprotein: detection of novel lymphocyte activating peptide segments of the molecule and their conformational characterization. Biological Chemistry Hoppe-Seyler. 375(6):407-12, June 1994.
  • Tuftsin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for immunomodulation.
  • Prolactin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat rheumatic diseases, systemic lupus erythematosus, and hyperprolactemia.
  • Angiotensin II and receptor(s) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat hypertension, hemodynamic regulation, neurological disorders, diabetic nephropathies, aortoarterities induced RVH, hyperaldosteronism, heavy metal induced cardiovascular effects, diabetes mellitus and thyroid dysfunction.
  • Dynorphin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, pain management, algesia, spinal cord injury and epilepsy.
  • Calcitonin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, immune system dysfunction, calcium homeostasis, and osteoporosis.
  • Pituitary adenylate cyclase activating polypeptide can play a role in growth, signal transduction vasoactivity roles, exact role in diseases not determined yet.
  • Cholecystokinin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat feeding disorders, panic disorders, and anti-opioid properties.
  • Pepstatin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as pepsin and HIV protease inhibitors (AIDS).
  • Bestatin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat muscular dystrophy, anticancer, antileukemia, immune response modulator, and acute non-lymphocytic leukemia.
  • Leupeptin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as a protease inhibitor, exact role in diseases not determined yet.
  • Luteinizing hormone and releasing hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as a infertility male contraceptive.
  • Neurotensin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used, e.g., as antipsychotic, analgesic, anti-cancer, and/or neuroprotective agents, e.g., for treating stroke victims, e.g., by inducing hypothermia so as to provide neuroprotection.
  • Motilin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for the control of gastric emptying.
  • Insulin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diabetes.
  • TGF Transforming growth factor
  • analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for cell proliferation and differentiation, cancer treatment, immunoregulation, therapy for donor tissue limitations, and wound-healing constraints in surgery.
  • Bone morphogenetic proteins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as therapy for donor tissue limitations, osteogenesis, and wound-healing constraints in surgery.
  • Bombesin and Enterostatin as well as their analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to prevent the proliferation of tumor cells, modulation of feeding, and neuroendocrine functions. These peptides fall within a supercategory of the neuromedins described above. These peptides are described in such exemplary references as Yamada K. Wada E. Wada K. Bombesin-like peptides: studies on food intake and social behaviour with receptor knock-out mice. Annals of Medicine. 32(8):519-29, November 2000; Ohki-Hamazaki H. Neuromedin B. Progress in Neurobiology. 62(3):297-312, October 2000; Still CD. Future trends in weight management. Journal of the American Osteopathic Association.
  • Glucagon, glucagon-like peptide 1 and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diabetes cardiovascular emergencies.
  • Endorphins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, alleviating pain, treatment of opioid abuse, obesity, and diabetes.
  • Examples of these peptides are named and described in Dalayeun, J. F.; Nores, J. M.; Bergal, S.; Physiology of beta-endorphins. A close-up view and a review of the literature. Biomedicine & Pharmacotherapy. 47(8):311-20, 1993.
  • Miscellaneous opioid peptides including (but not limited to) adrenal peptide E, alpha casein fragment, beta casomorphin, dermorphin, kyotorphin, metophamide neuropeptide FF (NPFF), melanocyte inhibiting factor, and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, alleviating pain, as well as for the treatment of opioid abuse.
  • adrenal peptide E alpha casein fragment
  • beta casomorphin beta casomorphin
  • dermorphin dermorphin
  • kyotorphin metophamide neuropeptide FF (NPFF)
  • NPFF metophamide neuropeptide FF
  • melanocyte inhibiting factor melanocyte inhibiting factor
  • analogues melanocyte inhibiting factor
  • Vasotocin and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for clinical uses to be determined.
  • Protein kinase C and inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cancer, apoptosis, smooth muscle function, and Alzheimer's disease. Examples of these peptides are named and described in Philip, P. A.; Harris, A. L; Potential for protein kinase C inhibitors in cancer therapy. Cancer Treatment & Research. 78:3-27, 1995.
  • Amyloid, amyloid fibrin, fragments and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurodegenerative diseases and diabetes.
  • Calpain and other calmodulin-inhibitory proteins and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurodegenerative disorders, cerebral ischaemia, cataracts, myocardial ischaemia, muscular dystrophy and platelet aggregation.
  • Charybdotoxin, Apamin and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for treatment of neurodegenerative diseases and pain and cerebral ischemia.
  • Phospholipase A2 and receptor inhibiting/activating peptides and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat acute pancreatitis, pancreatic cancer, abdominal trauma, and inflammation, e.g., sepsis, infections, acute pancreatitis, various forms of arthritis, cancer, complications of pregnancy, and postoperative states.
  • Potassium channel activating and inhibiting proteins and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat various diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Edwards, G.; Weston, A. H; Pharmacology of the potassium channel openers. Cardiovascular Drugs & Therapy. 9 Suppl 2:185-93, March 1995.
  • IgG activators, inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat autoimmune diseases and immune dysfunctions.
  • Examples of these peptides are described in Mouthon, L.; Kaveri, S. V.; Spalter, S. H.; Lacroix-Desmazes, S.; Lefranc, C.; Desai, R.; Kazatchkine, M. D; Mechanisms of action of intravenous immune globulin in immune-mediated diseases. Clinical & Experimental Immunology. 104 Suppl 1:3-9, 1996.
  • Endotoxin and inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for decreasing cardiac output, systemic hypotension, decreased blood flow and O 2 delivery to tissues, intense pulmonary vasoconstriction and hypertension, bronchoconstriction, increased permeability, pulmonary oedema, ventilation-to-perfusion inequalities, hypoxaemia, and haemoconcentration.
  • Endotoxin and inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for decreasing cardiac output, systemic hypotension, decreased blood flow and O 2 delivery to tissues, intense pulmonary vasoconstriction and hypertension, bronchoconstriction, increased permeability, pulmonary oedema, ventilation-to-perfusion inequalities, hypoxaemia, and haemoconcentration.
  • these peptides are named and described in Burrell, R; Human responses to bacterial endotoxin. Circulatory Shock. 43(3):137-53, July 1994.
  • Orphan receptor ligands including but not limited to ADNF, Adrenomedullin, Apelin, Ghrelin, Mastoparan (MCD peptides), Melanin concentrating hormone, Nociceptin/Nocistatin, Orexin, Receptor activity modulating protein, Urotensin).
  • ADNF Adrenomedullin
  • Apelin Adrenomedullin
  • Ghrelin Ghrelin
  • Mastoparan MCD peptides
  • Melanin concentrating hormone Nociceptin/Nocistatin
  • Orexin Mastoparan
  • Melanin concentrating hormone Nociceptin/Nocistatin
  • Orexin Receptor activity modulating protein
  • Urotensin Receptor activity modulating protein
  • Glycoprotein IIb/IIIa inhibitors The central role of platelet-rich thrombus in the pathogenesis of acute coronary syndromes (ACSs) is well-known.
  • Glycoprotein IIb/IIIa (Gp IIb/IIIa) receptor antagonists are potent inhibitors of platelet function that may be expected to affect favorably the natural history of ACSs.
  • Exemplary references for this category include Bhatt D L. Topol E J. Current role of platelet glycoprotein IIb/IIIa inhibitors in acute coronary syndromes. JAMA. 284(12):1549-58, 2000; Kereiakes D J. Oral blockade of the platelet glycoprotein IIb/IIIa receptor: fact or fancy?.American Heart Journal.
  • the invention relates to a method of increasing the ability of a peptide to cross a body barrier of a subject by use of the extended or truncated peptide having as its N-terminus a residue of the compound formula I-V.
  • the invention further relates to a method of treating or preventing in a subject a disease or condition treated or prevented by the administration of an extended or truncated peptide, whereby the extended or truncated peptide crosses the body barrier in higher amounts than the peptide having no non-natural amino acid.
  • the invention also relates to a method of treating or preventing in a subject a disease or condition of the brain treated or prevented by the administration of an extended or truncated peptide.
  • body barrier is defined herein as a cellular membrane or other structure that functions to prevent free (e.g., diffusional) passage of certain molecules.
  • body barriers include, but are not limited to, the blood brain barrier, a cell membrane, intestinal epithelium, skin cell, or the blood-ocular.
  • the body barrier is the blood brain barrier.
  • Certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method of increasing the selectivity of a chosen peptide through use of an extended or truncated peptide based upon the sequence of the chosen peptide as described above.
  • a peptide containing arginine and/or lysine can be converted according to the invention into an extended or truncated peptide in order to increase the selectivity of the peptide.
  • any of the non-natural amino acids disclosed herein can be used to increase the selectivity of a peptide.
  • the peptides of the invention can be used in any therapeutic procedure available to one of skill in the art to treat any disease or physiological problem with which the corresponding known peptide is associated.
  • the peptides of the invention can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a mammalian host, such as a human patient, in a variety of dosage forms adapted to the chosen route of administration, i.e., orally or parenterally, by intravenous, intramuscular, topical or subcutaneous routes.
  • the peptides may be systemically administered, for example, intravenously or intraperitoneally by infusion or injection.
  • Solutions of the peptide or peptide conjugate can be prepared in water, optionally mixed with a nontoxic surfactant.
  • Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, triacetin, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • the pharmaceutical dosage forms suitable for injection or infusion can include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions or sterile powders comprising the active ingredient(s) that are adapted for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable or infusible solutions or dispersions, optionally encapsulated in liposomes.
  • the liquid carrier or vehicle can be a solvent or liquid dispersion medium comprising, for example, water, ethanol, a polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and the like), vegetable oils, nontoxic glyceryl esters, and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the formation of liposomes, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions or by the use of surfactants.
  • the prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, buffers or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the peptide or peptide conjugate in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filter sterilization.
  • the preferred methods for preparation of such powders are vacuum drying and freeze drying techniques, which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient present in the previously sterile-filtered solutions.
  • the peptides of the invention can also be administered orally, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle such as an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle such as an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier.
  • the peptides may be enclosed in hard or soft shell gelatin capsules, may be compressed into tablets, or may be incorporated directly with the food of the patient's diet.
  • the peptide or peptide conjugate may be combined with one or more excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like.
  • Such compositions and preparations should contain at least 0.1% of active compound.
  • compositions and preparations may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 2 to about 60% to about 90% of the weight of a given unit dosage form.
  • amount of peptide in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that an effective dosage level will be obtained.
  • the tablets, troches, pills, capsules, and the like may also contain the following: binders such as gum tragacanth, acacia, corn starch or gelatin; excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid and the like; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent such as sucrose, fructose, lactose or aspartame or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, oil of wintergreen, or cherry flavoring may be added.
  • a liquid carrier such as a vegetable oil or a polyethylene glycol.
  • any material used in preparing any unit dosage form should be pharmaceutically acceptable and substantially non-toxic in the amounts employed.
  • the peptides of the invention may be incorporated into sustained-release preparations and devices.
  • Useful solid carriers include finely divided solids such as talc, clay, microcrystalline cellulose, silica, alumina and the like.
  • Useful liquid carriers include water, alcohols or glycols or water-alcohol/glycol blends, in which the present compounds can be dissolved or dispersed at effective levels, optionally with the aid of non-toxic surfactants.
  • Adjuvants such as fragrances and additional antimicrobial agents can be added to optimize the properties for a given use.
  • Thickeners such as synthetic polymers, fatty acids, fatty acid salts and esters, fatty alcohols, modified celluloses or modified mineral materials can also be employed with liquid carriers to form spreadable pastes, gels, ointments, soaps, and the like, for application directly to the skin of the user.
  • Useful dosages of the peptides of the invention can be determined by correlating their in vitro activity, and in vivo activity in animal models described herein.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of peptide of the invention necessarily varies with the subject and the disease or physiological problem to be treated and correlates with the effective amounts of the corresponding known peptide.
  • a therapeutic amount between 30 to 112,000 ⁇ g per kg of body weight can be effective for intravenous administration.
  • the amount can be varied depending on the method of administration.
  • the amount of the peptide of the invention, required for use in treatment will also vary with the route of administration, but also the nature of the condition being treated and the age and condition of the patient and will be ultimately at the discretion of the attendant physician or clinician.
  • the compound can conveniently be administered in unit dosage form; for example, containing 1 to 1000 mg, conveniently 10 to 750 mg, most conveniently, 20 to 500 mg of peptide per unit dosage form.
  • the peptide should be administered to achieve peak plasma concentrations of from about 0.1 to about 75 ⁇ M, preferably, about 1 to 50 ⁇ M, most preferably, about 2 to about 30 ⁇ M. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of a 0.05 to 5% solution of the peptide, optionally in saline, or orally administered as a bolus containing about 1-100 mg of the peptide. Desirable blood levels may be maintained by continuous infusion to provide about 0.01-5.0 mg/kg/hr or by intermittent infusions containing about 0.4-15 mg/kg of the active ingredient(s).
  • the desired dose may conveniently be presented in a single dose, as divided doses, or as a continuous infusion.
  • the desired dose can also be administered at appropriate intervals, for example, as two, three, four or more sub-doses per day.
  • a cosmetic composition of the present invention contains the typical and common base carriers as well as a desamino amino acid compound of the invention.
  • the compound of the invention will be in the form of an ester, amide or salt for this purpose.
  • the cosmetic base will depend upon the kind of make-up being formulated: face creme, face powder, pancake make-up, skin creme, lip stick, rouge and the like.
  • These bases will contain appropriate, nontoxic colorants, emuliants, oils, waxes, solvents, emulsifiers, fatty acids, alcohols or esters, gums, inorganic inert builders and the like.
  • the gums may include various known polysaccharide compounds, for example, cellulose, hemicellulose, gum arabic, tragacanth gum, tamarind gum, pectin, starch, mannan, guar gum, locust bean gum, quince seed gum, alginic acid, carrageenan, agar, xanthane gum, dextran, pullulan, chitin, chitosan, hyaluronic acid, chondroitin sulfuric acid, etc., derivatives of polysaccharide compounds, for example, carboxymethylated derivatives, sulfate derivatives, phosphated derivatives, methylated derivatives, ethylated derivatives, addition derivatives of alkylene oxide such as ethylene oxide or propylene oxide, acylated derivatives, cationated derivatives, low molecular weight derivatives, and other polysaccharide derivatives may be mentioned.
  • polysaccharide compounds for example, carboxymethylated derivatives, sul
  • Powder components based on inorganic components such as talc, kaolin, mica, sericite, dolomite, phlogopite, synthetic mica, lepidolite, biotite, lithia mica, vermiculite, magnesium carbonate, calcium carbonate, aluminum silicate, barium silicate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, strontium silicate, metal salts of tungstenic acid, magnesium, silica, zeolite, barium sulfate, sintered calcium sulfate (sintered gypsum), calcium phosphate, fluorapatite, hydroxyapatite, ceramic powder, metal soap (zinc myristate, calcium palmitate, ammonium stearate), boronitride, etc.; and organic powder components such as polyamide resin powder (nylon powder), polyethylene powder, polymethyl methacrylate powder, polystyrene powder, copolymer resin powder of
  • powder components obtained by treating the surfaces of these powder components by a silicone compound, fluorine-modified silicone compound, fluorine compound, higher aliphatic acid, higher alcohol, aliphatic acid ester, metal soap, alkyl phosphate, etc. may be formulated into the external composition of the present invention depending upon the need.
  • inorganic white pigments such as titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, inorganic red pigments such as iron oxide (bengala), iron titanate, inorganic brown pigments such as .gamma.-iron oxide
  • inorganic yellow pigments such as yellow iron oxide, yellow earth
  • inorganic black pigments such as black iron oxide, carbon black, lower titanium oxide
  • inorganic violet pigments such as mango violet, cobalt violet
  • inorganic green pigments such as chromium oxide, chromium hydroxide, cobalt titanate
  • blue pigments such as prussian blue, ultramarine
  • pearl pigments such as titanium oxide coated mica, titanium oxide coated bismuth oxichloride, titanium oxide coated talc, colored titanium oxide coated mica, bismuth oxichloride, fish scales
  • metal powder pigments such as aluminum powder, copper powder
  • Lithol rubine B (Red No. 201), Lithol rubine BCA (Red No. 202), Lake red CBA (Red No. 204), Lithol red (Red No. 205), Deep maroon (Red No. 220), Helidone pink CN (Red No. 226), Permatone Red (Red No. 228), Permanent red F5R (Red No. 405), Permanent orange (Orange No. 203), Benzidine Orange (Orange No. 204), Benzidine yellow G (Yellow No. 205), Hanza Yellow (Yellow No. 401), Blue No. 404, and other organic pigments; Erythrosine (Red No. 3), Phloxine B (Red No.
  • Acid red (Red No. 106), Fast acid magenta (Red No. 227), Eosine YS (Red No. 230), Violamine R (Red No. 401), Oil red XO (Red No. 505), Orange II (Orange No. 205), Tartrazine (Yellow No. 4), Sunset yellow FCF (Yellow No. 5), Uranine (Yellow No. 202), Quinoline yellow (Yellow No. 203), Fast green FCF (Green No. 3), Brilliant blue FCF (Blue No. 1) may be mentioned.
  • the cosmetic composition of the present invention may be formulated with a liquid.
  • a volatile component ordinarily used in external compositions such as cosmetics.
  • volatile silicone oil for example, volatile silicone oil, water, or a lower alcohol (or mixtures of the same).
  • These volatile components may be suitably selected depending upon the specific form of the external composition of the present invention (for example, the later mentioned “roughness correcting composition” or “makeup composition” etc.) or type of carrier (for example, oil base or emulsion base etc.).
  • type of carrier for example, oil base or emulsion base etc.
  • the volatile silicone oil it is possible to use a volatile silicone oil which is used in the field of cosmetics and other external compositions. It is not particularly limited. Specifically, for example, a low boiling point linear silicone oil such as hexamethyl disiloxane, octamethyl trisiloxane, decamethyl cyclopentasiloxane, dodecamethyl cyclohexasiloxane, and tetradecamethyl cycloheptasiloxane; a low boiling point cyclic silicone oil such as octamethyl cyclotetrasiloxane, decamethyl cyclopentasiloxane, dodecamethyl cyclohexasiloxane, and tetradecamethyl cycloheptasiloxane; etc. may be mentioned.
  • a low boiling point linear silicone oil such as hexamethyl disiloxane, octamethyl trisiloxane, decamethyl cyclopentasi
  • the external composition of the present invention may contain, depending upon the need, the following other components as auxiliary components to an extent not detracting from the desired effect of the present invention.
  • hydrocarbon oils such as liquid paraffin, isoliquid paraffin, squalane, oils and fats such as olive oil, palm oil, coconut oil, macadamia nut oil, jojoba oil; higher alcohols such as isostearyl alcohol; ester oils such as higher aliphatic oils and isopropyl myristate, etc.
  • formulating a polar oil in the external composition of the present invention enables improvement of the stability with the elapse of time.
  • a benzophenon derivative, para-aminobenzoate derivative, para-methoxysuccinate derivative, salicylate derivative, and other UV absorbers may be blended in the external composition of the present invention.
  • the cosmetic formulation of the present invention may be produced in an appropriate medium including but not limited to a paste, a powder, a cake, a creme, an oil, a lotion, a grease, a wax or similar cosmetic bases.
  • the process to produce involves combining the cosmetic ingredients and desamino amino acid compound of any of formulas I-V preferably as the ester, amide or salt.
  • the combination is mixed, kneaded, rolled, ground, heated or otherwise treated to form a substantially homogeneous mass or mixture for use. These steps can be accomplished by use of a kneader, grind wheel, rollers, mixer, heat exchanger, extruder and the like.
  • the invention is exemplified by modification of the natural peptide neurotensin.
  • the gackground, modification and biological activity of neurotensin and the corresponding peptides of the invention are discussed.
  • NT Neurotensin
  • CNS central nervous system
  • NT neurotensin
  • hypothermia antinociception, attenuation of d-amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion, and potentiation of barbiturate-induced sedation are promoted by direct injection of NT into the brain.
  • NT acts as a hormone to induce hypotension and decrease gastric acid secretion.
  • NT is a linear tridecapeptide with the following sequence: pGlu-Leu-Tyr-Glu-Asn-Lys-Pro-Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-Leu-OH.
  • pGlu-Leu-Tyr-Glu-Asn-Lys-Pro-Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-Leu-OH was shown that the C-terminal hexapeptide fragment, Arg 8 -Arg 9 -Pro 10 -Tyr 11 -Ile 12 -Leu 13 [NT(8-13)], was equipotent at producing the physiological effects of NT in vitro and in vivo.
  • NTR 1 NT receptor 1
  • human NTR 1 has been successfully cloned and expressed. Both are classic G-protein coupled receptors containing seven transmembrane (7TM) domains and share 84% homology.
  • Second messenger systems including cGMP production, calcium mobilization, and phosphatidylinositol turnover, are triggered upon NTR 1 activation.
  • the mRNA for NTR 1 is expressed in both rat and human brain and intestine.
  • a second NT receptor (NTR 2 ) with a substantially lower affinity for NT than NTR 1 , (K d 2.5 and 0.5 nM respectively), also has been identified in rat and human brain (23-25).
  • NTR 2 is also a 7TM/G-protein coupled receptor, yet has a shorter N-terminal extracellular tail and a longer third intracytoplasmic loop compared to NTR 1 .
  • a third receptor (NTR 3 ) was cloned from a human brain cDNA library and found to be identical to the previously cloned gp95/sortilin.
  • NTR 3 is a non-G-protein coupled sorting protein having only a single transmembrane region.
  • NT neuropeptide derived neuropeptide
  • Advances in the dopamine theory of schizophrenia support that a flaw in the convergence of various neural circuits on the mesolimbic dopamine system is responsible for the development of the disorder.
  • the anatomical positioning of the NT system is such that it interacts with the glutaminergic, dopaminergic, GABAergic, and serotonergic systems within the brain.
  • the NT and dopamine systems are closely related within the nucleus accumbens, the area of the brain believed to be responsible for delusions and hallucinations.
  • NTR 1 receptors are dense in the ventral tegmental area, a brain region closely associated with the neuronal systems described above. Almost 90% of NT receptors are located on dopaminergic neurons and over 80% of dopamine neurons in the brain express NTR 1 .
  • Co-localization of the NT system with brain regions implicated in schizophrenia also imply its involvement.
  • NT was hypothesized as an “endogenous neuroleptic” and NT(8-13) was identified as its active fragment, efforts have been made to develop NT(8-13) derivatives as potential antipsychotics.
  • amino acid substitutions at Arg 8 , Arg 9 , Tyr 11 , and Ile 12 have yielded several analogues that are centrally active after peripheral administration.
  • An Eisai compound (the Eisai hexapeptide) was the first NT(8-13) analogue that elicited behavioral effects after peripheral administration.
  • the various modifications incorporated in this peptide resulted in a 700-fold loss of binding affinity at NTR 1 .
  • this analogue was not able to elicit central activity after oral administration.
  • An embodiment of the present invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of Formula (XI):
  • X is OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue; or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • n 1 to about 10
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R 1 , R 2 or R 3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • An embodiment of the invention also concerns a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (XIII):
  • X is OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n 1 to about 10;
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R 4 or R 5 is not a Boc group;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of formula (XIII):
  • X is OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R at each occurrence is independently H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n 1 to about 10;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • R 4 and R 5 are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R 4 or R 5 is not a Boc group;
  • R 6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof
  • Y as a leaving group, undergoes nucleophilic displacement by NR 1 R 2 R 3 (in the preparation of formula (XI)), or by R 1 NH 2 (in the preparation of formula (XV)), at the carbon center to which Y is attached.
  • a poorer leaving group Y such as chloro may be adequate for the practice of the method of the invention.
  • a less reactive amine for example an aniline derivative, may require the selection of a better leaving group Y, such as triflate or bromo, by the skilled artisan.
  • the compound of formula (XII) can be a dipeptide, a polypeptide, a free peptide or an immobilized polypeptide, a peptide analog (for example, having a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group other than a methyl group in place of the ⁇ -amino group), all containing a precursor sidechain —(CH 2 ) n+1 Y, wherein n is 1 to about 10.
  • a compound of formula (XII), for example, a compound including the types of sidechains found on ribosomal aminoacids can have those sidechains in blocked form (e.g., amines substituted with Boc groups, Cbz groups, and the like) when the reaction with the reagent amine (NR 1 R 2 R 3 or R 1 NH 2 ) is carried out, or, alternatively, the sidechains can all be unblocked as long as there is no sidechain that can react with the reagent amine at a higher rate than does the precursor sidechain —(CH 2 ) n+1 Y.
  • blocked form e.g., amines substituted with Boc groups, Cbz groups, and the like
  • a sidechain blocking group as are well known in the art for use with the assorted sidechain functionalities as are found in natural aminoacids (carboxylates, phenols, thiols, carboxamides, and the like)
  • the sidechain should not be protected in such as way as to activate it for nucleophilic displacement by the reagent amine.
  • Such protecting groups are well known in the art, and a suitable blocking group can be selected without undue experimentation by the skilled artisan.
  • none of the sidechains found in natural (ribosomal) aminoacids interfere with the reaction of the invention, therefore sidechain protected is unneeded for the purpose of carrying out the reaction of the invention.
  • any sidechain functionalities that are prone to nucleophilic displacement by the amine NR 1 R 2 R 3 should be suitably protected unless it is the intention that those functionalities undergo the displacement reaction.
  • any sidechain functionalities that are prone to nucleophilic displacement by the amine NR 1 R 2 R 3 should be suitably protected unless it is the intention that those functionalities undergo the displacement reaction.
  • an amine for instance via conversion to a sulfonate ester followed by displacement with the reagent amine
  • the other hydroxyl-containing sidechain should be suitably protected prior to carrying out the method of the invention.
  • the selection of blocking groups when needed to protect sidechain functionalities is readily made by a person of ordinary skill without undue experimentation based on well-known blocking groups for the kinds of sidechain functionalities that may be encountered.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R 1 , R 2 or R 3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, and wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • compounds of formula (I) that may be prepared by a method of the invention include N-methyllysine, N,N-dimethyllysine, and the quarternary ammonium metho salt of N,N-dimethyllysine.
  • Other N ⁇ -alkyllysine derivatives such as N-benzyllysine, N-picolyllysine, and the like, can also be prepared.
  • N-alkyl or N-aryl lysine derivatives is meant herein lysine derivatives bearing the substituent on the sidechain ( ⁇ ) amino group.
  • X can be OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; and Z can be H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; provided that when Z is NHR, X is an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or is an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer.
  • Z can be hydrogen or alkyl.
  • Z and X cannot both be bonded to a polymer; furthermore, at least one of Z and X must comprise an aminoacid residue, a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively bonded to a polymer.
  • the ratio of the reagent amine to the substrate precursor peptide can vary; preferably an excess of reagent amine is used. Molar ratios can vary between about 1:1 up to about 100:1 of the reagent amine to the precursor peptide. Higher ratios of reagent amine are advantageously used to suppress possible unwanted side reactions, for example, if a precursor group —(CH 2 ) n+1 Y is present in the same molecule with another nucleophilic sidechain group, such as a thiol (cysteine), an amine (lysine), or a non-natural group of high nucleophilicity, use of a large excess of reagent amine is favored in reducing the amount of intra- or intermolecular coupling. Larger excesses of the reagent amine also serve to increase the reaction rate and to drive the reaction to completion due to the bimolecular kinetics of the nucleophilic displacement reaction.
  • a compound of formula (XII) to a compound of formula (XI) or a compound of formula (XV) can be carried out in any suitable solvent.
  • suitable solvents such as water, methanol, ethanol, or a mixture thereof.
  • Other solvents such as dipolar aprotic solvents that are capable of dissolving the substrates and which may enhance the rate of nucleophilic displacement of Y by the reagent amine can also be used.
  • Examples are DMSO, DMF, DMAc, NMP, and the like.
  • suitable nonpolar solvents such as chloroform and dichloromethane can also be used.
  • reaction time and temperature can be varied depending upon the specific reaction in question to provide a reasonable yield of the desired product within a relatively short period of time.
  • the reaction can be carried out at about 20-80° C., for a time period of about 1 hr to about 7 days.
  • reaction temperatures can be as high as about 100° C. or 120° C. using a solvent with a reflux temperature that exceeds the given temperature.
  • the conversion of a compound of formula (XV) to a compound of formula (XIII) via contact of the compound of formula (XV) with a compound of formula (XIV) takes place by addition of the NHR 1 group of the compound of formula (XV) to the compound of formula (XIV) with elimination of the SR 6 group.
  • the compound of formula (XV) can be a dipeptide, a polypeptide, a free peptide or an immobilized polypeptide, a peptide analog (for example, having a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group such as a methyl group in place of the ⁇ -amino group), all containing a sidechain amino group bearing at least a single hydrogen atom.
  • This amino group bears an R 1 group, wherein R 1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, and wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • a compound of formula (XV), for example, which can be a compound including the types of sidechains found on ribosomal aminoacids, can have those sidechains in blocked form (e.g., amines substituted with Boc groups, Z groups, and the like) when the reaction with the compound of formula (XIV) is carried out, or, alternatively, the sidechains can all be unblocked as long as there is no sidechain that can react with a compound of formula (XIV) at a higher rate than does the precursor sidechain bearing the NHR 1 group.
  • blocked form e.g., amines substituted with Boc groups, Z groups, and the like
  • a sidechain blocking group as are well known in the art for use with the assorted sidechain functionalities as are found in natural aminoacids (carboxylates, phenols, thiols, carboxamides, and the like)
  • the sidechain should not be protected in such as way as to activate it for nucleophilic attack on a compound of formula (XIV).
  • protecting groups are well known in the art, and a suitable blocking group can be selected without undue experimentation by the skilled artisan.
  • carboxylates and phenols can respectively be blocked as esters and ethers, such as benzyl ethers.
  • a Boc or Cbz group can be used.
  • the selection of blocking groups when needed to protect sidechain functionalities can readily be made by a person of ordinary skill without undue experimentation based on well-known blocking groups for the kinds of sidechain functionalities that may be encountered.
  • the compound of formula (XIV) is an S-substituted thiourea or a thiouronium salt thereof.
  • the compound of formula (XIV) is a thiouronium salt, for example a hydriodide (HI) salt.
  • the sulfur atom of the reagent bears a substituent R 6 which can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl.
  • R 6 can be a methyl group. It is within the knowledge of a person of ordinary skill to modify R 6 to confer a greater or a lesser degree of reactivity upon the thiouronium compound of formula (XIV).
  • a trifluoromethyl group could replace the methyl group as R 6 .
  • R 6 can be an substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, for example a phenyl group.
  • the compound of formula (XIV) can also be substituted on its nitrogen atoms with substituents R 4 and R 5 which are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted. It is understood that when one R 5 group is a hydrogen atom, the tautomeric nature of guanido groups makes R 4 and R 5 interchangeable through a proton shift process.
  • X can be OH, O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), O(C 6 -C 10 aryl), NR 2 , an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; and Z can be H, NR 2 , alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; provided that when Z is NHR, X is an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or is an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer.
  • Z can be H or al
  • the compound of formula (XIV) offers a major advantage over art reagents in that a greater number and variety of substituents can be disposed on the final arginine analog of formula (XIII) than was previously possible in a single step.
  • an arginine analog bearing a substituted guanido group can be synthesized with as many as four substituents included, one substituent each on two of the three guanido nitrogen atoms and two substituents on the third guanido nitrogen atom.
  • the reaction can have molar ratios of reagents between about 1:1 compound of formula (XV) and thiouronium compound of formula (IV) ranging up to about a 1:10 ratio. Use of some excess of the thiouronium compound can be used to drive the reaction to completion and to increase the rate of the reaction, as well as in reducing unwanted side reactions.
  • reaction between a compound of formula (XV) and a compound of formula (XIV) can be carried out in any of a variety of solvents, including water or organic solvents.
  • solvents including water or organic solvents.
  • the reaction can be carried out in water, acetonitrile, methanol, ethanol, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, or a mixture thereof.
  • Other suitable solvents will be known to a person of ordinary skill.
  • the reaction can be carried out at any suitable temperature; for example, the reaction can be carried out within a time period of hours to days at a reaction temperature of about 20-80° C.
  • the time period of the reaction can be as short as a few hours, for example about four hours, or can be in the order of days, for example up to about seven days.
  • reaction temperatures can be as high as about 100° C. or 120° C. using a solvent with a reflux temperature that exceeds the given temperature.
  • the two reactions described herein can be combined to provide a single process for carrying out the transformation of an aminoacid residue with a sidechain —(CH 2 ) n+1 —Y to an aminoacid residue bearing a substituted guanido group, with the provision that the intermediate aminoacid residue bearing an amine sidechain must bear at least a single hydrogen atom on the sidechain amino group to allow for condensation with the thiouronium reagent.
  • peptide neurotensin is a highly cationic peptide of medicinal interest, as is described in PCT Application Publication No. WO2006/009902, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • PCT Published Application also discusses the C-terminal region of neurotensin, aminoacids number 8-13 as a structural lead for the preparation of peptide derivatives with analgesic activity.
  • the molecule wherein the N-terminal arginine of the NT(8-13) fragment is converted to a desamino alkyl derivative, i.e., wherein the N-terminal amino group is replaced by a methyl group possesses desirable bioactivity and the preparation and biological testing of a series of analogs, such as can be prepared by a method of the current invention, is of interest in the field.
  • N-terminal alpha methyl, alpha desamino homolysyl and orinthyl analogues of NT(8-13) prepared according to the invention were synthesized and screened for activity in numerous behavioral assays predictive of antipsychotic potential. These peptides induced hypothermia in a dose-dependent fashion after oral administration. In addition, oral administration of the peptides significantly reduced d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion, a measure of the therapeutic efficacy of current or potential APDs. The low dose of peptide (10 mg/kg) that elicits a significant response after oral administration in these assays is significant.
  • the peptides also demonstrate an ability to maintain efficacy after repeated administration. In fact they demonstrate an ability to increase maximal hypothermic response over time, implying that repeated administration may actually improve their CNS activity.
  • the NT peptides of the invention are shown to have biological activity like that of the known naturally occurring peptide NT and are more selective. Details of these effects are as follows.
  • NT induces hypothermia when directly administered into the CNS.
  • induced hypothermia can be used to determine the ability of NT(8-13) peptides of the invention to cross the BBB after peripheral administration and indirectly to determine their in vivo CNS activity.
  • the hypothermic effect of NT can be attributed to its actions at NTR 1 , the NTR most often implicated in the pathophysiology of schizophrenia.
  • An NT(8-13) peptide that induced hypothermia after IP injection is thus shown to be an antipsychotic agent.
  • a significant hypothermic effect would demonstrate that the peptide showed marked improvements in blood stability and membrane crossing.
  • IP injection is the standard route of administration to determine the extent of BBB crossing of neurotensin analogues. The methods and protocols are provided in the Examples section. IV administration results in a dose that is completely available to the systemic circulation. By contrast, an IP injection is a more rigorous test of stability because the peptide is exposed to first pass metabolism in the liver.
  • hypothermic effects of peptides 28-30, after a 5 mg/kg IP injection are given in Table 4.
  • Each peptide exhibited a significant effect over a 5 hr time course.
  • the hypothermic results for these three peptides demonstrate that the substitution of an alpha alkyl group in place of the N-terminal amine group (i.e., the ⁇ -methyl group) does not abolish the in vivo activity of the NT(8-13) peptide.
  • the ability of these peptides to elicit CNS activity after oral administration was evaluated.
  • NT(8-13) peptides as antischizophrenic pharmaceuticals is to determine their ability to exhibit CNS activity after oral administration.
  • ABS201 an example of a peptide of the invention, demonstrated maximal hypothermic responses greater than 2° C. (Table 6) and its maximal hypothermic effect was equal to its hypothermic effect after IP dosing ( FIG. 9 ), resulting in an approximate oral bioavailability of 25%. While peptides 29 and 30 also were orally active, their ratio of oral activity to IP activity was not as balanced as that of ABS201. The oral activity of ABS201 was an important factor to support it as a lead NT(8-13) analogue for further evaluation of antipsychotic potential.
  • Catalepsy commonly defined as a state of tonic immobility in rodents, is regarded as analogous to (extrapyramidal side effects) EPSEs in humans. Consequently, catalepsy is a side effect to be avoided in a successful drug candidate. Concurrently, the degree to which a drug candidate causes catalepsy in rats may also be used as a predictor for the probable occurrence of EPSEs associated with that particular candidate.
  • hypothermic Analysis To examine the antipsychotic properties of ABS201, a dose-response curve for hypothermic induction after IP administration was generated. In addition, the hypothermic effects elicited by oral administration of ABS201 (10 mg/kg-30 mg/kg) were determined. The ability of ABS201 to reduce d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion after both IP and oral administration also was measured. To assess the effects on CNS activity caused by prolonged treatment of ABS201, hypothermia and attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion were measured after repeated daily dosing. Finally, the bar test was utilized to measure catalepsy as a predictor of EPSEs in humans.
  • ABS201 also induced hypothermia in a dose-dependent fashion after oral administration ( FIG. 12 ). A significant hypothermic effect was demonstrated at 10 mg/kg, the lowest dose tested ( ⁇ 1.02 ⁇ 0.10° C. at 150 min PI). The generation of an ED 50 value for the oral administration of ABS201 was impractical due to the inordinate amount of peptide necessary to produce a complete dose-response curve.
  • Previous NT(8-13) analogues that have been under development as antipsychotic compounds have contained a Trp 11 substitution. Evidence from the studies presented herein supports the theory that this modification abolishes the oral activity of a NT analogue. Further studies are necessary to determine what specific role Tyr 11 plays in the oral bioavailability of NT(8-13) analogues.
  • d-amphetamine a “DA agonist”
  • NT(8-13) analogues currently under investigation as candidates have demonstrated the ability to decrease d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity in a dose-dependent fashion.
  • Sound- and light-attenuated locomotor cages are used to measure the ability of potential candidates to decrease d-amphetamine-induced hyperactivity.
  • ABS201 significantly reduced hyperlocomotion for all doses tested (doses of 3 mg/kg and 10 mg/kg not shown).
  • Another hallmark of current APDs is the ability to reduce spontaneous locomotor activity. All ABS201 dose groups responded significantly lower than saline during the drug phase, indicating the ability of ABS201 to reduce spontaneous activity.
  • ABS201 maintained a significant CNS effect after repeated daily dosing (Table 6) and over the 5-day period the absolute hypothermic response increased.
  • Table 6 A comparison of the induced hypothermia of ABS201 on days 1 and 5 was made. On day 5, the maximal hypothermic response was achieved faster (90 min) compared to day 1 (120 min). In contrast to day 1, on day 5 the maximal hypothermic effect was not maintained for an extended period, implying that while repeated dosing does not decrease the maximal effect, it may reduce the duration of the hypothermic effect.
  • Repeated daily dosing had no effect on the ability of ABS201 to attenuate d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion. Both the acute and chronic dosing groups produced a reduction in hyperactivity that was significant for almost two hours after amphetamine administration. Of note, chronic administration of ABS201 did abolish its inhibitory effect on spontaneous locomotor activity.
  • catalepsy In laboratory tests, catalepsy is characterized by the inability of an animal to correct its position after placement in an unnatural posture. Catalepsy tests can be greatly influenced by a number of variables. These include stress-induced inhibition of catalepsy caused by a new environment and the contribution of learned “pseudo-catalepsy” that can result upon repeated measures with the same animal. To circumvent these potential confounding factors, tests are performed on an animal only once in a quiet, controlled environment.
  • ABS201 did not induce catalepsy after peripheral administration, a hallmark of current clinically effective candidates.
  • Caco-2 cells derived from a human colorectal carcinoma, spontaneously differentiate into polarized cells that exhibit well-developed microvilli and brush-border enzymes. These features make the cells an excellent model of the human small intestine. A strong correlation between uptake of a compound in the Caco-2 cell model and oral bioavailability of the compound has been identified.
  • ABS201 is stable in rat serum for greater than 24 hours, however, its stability in cells has not been determined. Consequently, determination of the ability of intact peptide to enter the Caco-2 cells in the uptake experiments will show oral bioavailability and cellular stability.
  • Reverse phase HPLC is an ideal method to analyze the solubilized cell components for ABS201 and ABS201 degradation products. This analysis will show oral availability and cellular stability. Fractions can be collected at determined intervals and counted for radioactivity via LSC. By establishing the ABS201 elution time via a standard gradient, direct comparisons can be made to the contents of Caco-2 cells after uptake experiments.
  • Solvents are from Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.) and reagents from Aldrich (Milwaukee, Wis.) unless otherwise noted.
  • Trisyl-N 3 2,4,6-triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl azide; Et 3 N, triethylamine; t-BuCOCl, trimethylacetylchloride; n-BuLi, n-butyl lithium; H 2 , hydrogen gas; Pd—C, palladium on activated carbon; Xps, (S)-( ⁇ )-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidinone; KHMDS, potassium bis(trimethylsilyl) amide; CH 3 I, methyl iodide; H 2 O 2 , hydrogen peroxide; LiOH, lithium hydroxide; THF, tetrahydrofuran; CH 2 Cl 2 , dichloromethane; MgSO 4 , magnesium sulfate; Hex, hexane; EtOAc, ethyl acetate; NaHCO 3 , sodium bicarbonate; HCl, hydrochloric acid; N 2
  • Alpha methyl, alpha desamino omega N-substituted homo lysyl and orinthyl (8) neurotensin (8-13) were synthesized ( FIG. 7 ).
  • the solid state coupling was conducted as follows.
  • Resin bound N alpha Fmoc leucine was swelled in DMF prior to Fmoc cleavage with piperidine (20% in DMF). The piperidine solution was removed with vacuum filtration and the resin-bound amino acid washed with DMS and methylene chloride (5 ⁇ each). Amino acids (4 eq) were activated in DMF with HOBt (4 eq) PyBOP ((4 eq) and DIPEA (10 eq) and added directly to the peptide reaction vessel. Amino acids were coupled for 6 hours, the resins was washed with DMF and methylene chloride and monitored with a Kaiser test for the presence of free amines. Residues were recoupled when necessary. This procedure was repeated with subsequent amino acids to give the penultimate peptide sequence (pentamer).
  • Peptides were characterized and assessed for purity via MALDI-TOFMS on a Voyager DE-STR System 4117 mass spectrometer (Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.). Peptides were used at greater than 95% purity in vivo.
  • the peptide analogs evaluated contain one non-natural amino acid (Scheme 1) or desaminoacid (Scheme 2).
  • Benchmarking Compounds From an initial screen of about 50 compounds, those listed in Table 8 were selected for further testing and development as antipsychotic compounds. These compounds are based on the neurotensin fragment NT(8-13). These compounds possessed useful characteristics as each: bound as competitive agonists in vitro to NTR-1, the brain neurotensin receptor involved in schizophrenia, demonstrated central activity when injected IP in rat using hypothermia as a surrogate for central activity, which also occurs through NTR-1 binding and elicited the appropriate activities in rat behavioral models of schizophrenia.
  • hypothermia induction (NTR-1 receptor binding) activity was evaluated with both oral and IP dosing of each compound. As seen in Table 9, all of the compounds except for ABS201 exhibited ⁇ 10% oral activity. Interestingly, ABS201 had a 300% increase in oral activity over the previous most active compound. In addition, ABS201 achieved a faster response when administered orally versus IP. This is unique among the NT(8-13) derivatives.
  • b Oral dose was 20 mg/kg for all peptides.
  • c t max (min) Time to maximal temperature decrease.
  • d ⁇ in BT (° C.) Decrease in body temperature measured at t max .
  • e Denotes a significant response (p ⁇ 0.05).
  • f Approximate oral bioavailability was calculated from the relative areas under the hypothermia curve for each dosing regimen, corrected for amount of compound administered.
  • g NA none apparent (as the oral dosing was not significant over baseline).
  • mice Male Sprague Dawley Rats (250-350 g) or Brattleboro rats (270-310 g) were obtained from Harlan (Indianapolis, Ind.) and housed in an AAALAC-approved colony room maintained at a constant temperature and humidity. Lighting was controlled on a 12 hr light:dark cycle with lights on at 0700 hr. Animals were housed two per cage and fed laboratory chow and water ad libitum. All experiments were performed during the light cycle.
  • Rats were restrained in Plas-Labs® plastic cages fitted with wooden dowels to restrict movement. Rectal temperature probes (Physitemp®, RET-2, Clifton, N.J.), lubricated with mineral oil, were inserted into the rectum of each animal. Probes were connected to a microprobe thermometer (Physitemp®, BAT-12) in conjunction with a thermocouple selector (Physitemp®, SWT-5). Rats were allowed to acclimate to the cages for 1 hr prior to IP injection.
  • Hypothermia Hypothermia induction is an easy and direct measure of neurotensin derivatives entering the brain and binding to NTR-1, the receptor involved in psychosis.
  • animals were housed in individual Plexiglas cages without bedding at 25° C.
  • a thermistor probe was placed 4.5 cm into the rectum; baseline temperatures were recorded for 1 hr to allow habituation to the cages prior to injection of compound.
  • Dose-response curves for hypothermic induction All animal restraint and hypothermia protocols were as described above. Variable slope dose-response curve and ED 50 value was generated using GraphPad Prism®.
  • Each animal's activity was measured by how many times per minute the animal “trips” a photobeam in a computer-controlled photocell activity chamber (San Diego Instruments, San Diego, Calif.).
  • the chambers were arranged in a four-level rack in a quiet room with ambient light and temperature approximately the same as in the separate housing room. The experiment was done over 6 days, with 1 run each day in mid-afternoon. On each day, 6 na ⁇ ve rats were assigned to each treatment condition. Doses were assigned so that each was assessed in 12 chambers that were distributed over the apparatus, which controls for variations in lighting, etc. of the different chambers.
  • ABS201 Hypothermic induction by ABS201 through IP and PO dosing.
  • ABS201 has an ED 50 of about 1 mg/kg when administered IP, and 10 mg/kg administered orally (hypothermia data not shown, see amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion results below).
  • ED 50 of about 1 mg/kg when administered IP, and 10 mg/kg administered orally (hypothermia data not shown, see amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion results below).
  • FIG. 9 ABS201 actually induces a quicker hypothermic effect when dosed orally versus IP at 2 ⁇ the approximate ED 50 for each compound.
  • Dose-response curves The dose-response curve for ABS201 after IP injection over a concentration range of 0.1-10.0 mg/kg is shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the calculated ED 50 , value is 0.943 mg/kg.
  • the hypothermic response to the oral administration of ABS201 over a concentration range of 10.0-30.0 mg/kg is shown in FIG. 12 .
  • FIG. 13 illustrates that ABS201 delivered IP inhibits amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion with an ED 50 of about 1 mg/kg.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates that ABS201 delivered by oral dosing induced hyperlocomotion with an approximate ED 50 of about 10 mg/kg. Larger doses were not attempted in the PO administration experiments due to lack of sufficient material; however, the IP data clearly illustrate that the hyperlocomotion effect can be fully reversed.
  • Phases for the IP dosing and oral dosing experiments consisted of habituation (time points 10-60), drug (time points 70-120), and amphetamine (time points 130-240).
  • the main effect of TIME resulted from a decrease in activity for all doses relative to the first time point (70 min).
  • ABS201 maintained a significant CNS effect after repeated daily dosing (Table 6) and over the 5-day period the absolute hypothermic response increased.
  • TIME TIME
  • F(5,90) 13.512 (p ⁇ 0.001)
  • GROUP GROUP
  • the main effect of TIME resulted from a decrease in activity for all doses relative to the first time point (70 min).
  • Tukey's post-hoc tests revealed that both the acute and chronic groups demonstrated reduced locomotor activity for time points 140-220 as compared to saline (p ⁇ 0.05).
  • Prepulse inhibition (PPI) of acoustic startle is decreased in unmedicated schizophrenia patients and similar deficits can be induced in rats through pharmacological, environmental, or neuroanatomical manipulations.
  • PPI Prepulse inhibition
  • BB Brattleboro
  • LE Long Evans
  • ABS201 reverses PPI in Brattleboro rats.
  • ABS201 Summary of the Behavioral Effects of ABS201.
  • the “gold standard” animal model for evaluating a molecule with antipsychotic potential is inhibition of amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion.
  • ABS201 is active in a dose-dependent fashion whether IP or orally injected ( FIGS. 13 and 14 ).
  • the action of ABS201 is apparent following both IV and PO administration; dose-dependent; and long acting (observable 1 hr post administration and apparent for at least one additional hour).
  • ABS201 does not induce a cataleptic state in rats ( FIG. 16 ), is not antinociceptive, and tolerance to multiple dosings does not occur either with monitoring hypothermia or inhibition of amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion ( FIGS. 17 and 18 ).
  • ABS201 reliably induces hypothermia in rodents following both IV and PO administration.
  • the action of ABS201 is:dose-dependent; and long acting, being observable for a period of 3-4 hours following administration. The doses producing hypothermia are similar, if not identical, to those which reverse d-amphetamine responses.
  • ABS201 The following was observed during the period immediately during and following intravenous administration of ABS201: during the dosing period (slow push; >1 min ⁇ 2 min via the tail vein) the animals receiving ABS201 HCl became noticeably sedate in the body restraining cages; upon removal from the restraining cages, animals were obviously sedated, lacked spontaneous benchtop locomotor activity, assumed a curl position upon handling, and exhibited a greatly impaired, or loss of, the righting reflex; notwithstanding, ptosis was absent; there was no evidence of flaccid paralysis although muscle tone was substantially reduced; pupil reflex was present; the hind limb pinch response was impaired or absent; there was no evidence of parasympathetic responses, e.g., spontaneous urination, defecation, salivation and lacrimation were absent; there was no evidence of acute sympathetic responses, e.g., piloerection; there was no evidence of seizures, either tonic or clonic.
  • Caco-2 cells derived from a human colorectal carcinoma, spontaneously differentiate into polarized cells that exhibit well-developed microvilli and brush-border enzymes (78). These features make the cells an excellent model of the human small intestine. A strong correlation between uptake in the Caco-2 cell model and oral bioavailability has been identified (79). Studies that focused on the transport of peptides across Caco-2 cells have identified solute-solvent hydrogen bonds as a major determining factor in the permeability of the peptide.
  • the non-natural amino acid technology is designed to reduce solute-solvent interactions, in particular, water solvation that occurs through hydrogen bonding, hence the current modifications should confer enhanced intestinal absorption in Caco-2 cells.
  • the studies described below are designed to evaluate the potential oral bioavailability of the NT(8-13) analogues and the mechanisms of transport responsible for their uptake.
  • ABS201 is a lead compound for the development of NT(8-13) analogues as novel APDs. ABS201 can therefore function as a prototype for evaluating the cellular uptake of the NT(8-13) analogues.
  • Liquid scintillation counting (LSC) is the preferred method of analysis for these assays, as extraction of the peptide from the cell monolayer is not required and dissolved cell components can be directly analyzed without an extraction protocol that can be inexact, resulting in inconsistent analysis.
  • L-[U— 14 C] ⁇ egrada was used as the radiolabel for these studies. Proline is easily protected at the ⁇ -amine for peptide synthesis with the base-labile Fmoc moiety.
  • Pro 10 has not been identified as a major site of cleavage of NT(8-13). NT(8-13) analogues that show antipsychotic potential have not included Pro 10 modifications.
  • NT(8-13) analogues elicit CNS activity after oral administration. They are the first analogues of NT(8-13) to exhibit oral activity, and these preliminary studies should provide information that aids in the development of future peptide analogues with enhanced oral activity.
  • the concentration of ABS201 used for these uptake studies can be chosen for two distinct reasons.
  • the concentration of a 20 mg/kg dose of peptide, delivered in saline (1 mL/kg), is 24 mM.
  • a concentration only slightly below 24 mM should be seen by the small intestine. Therefore, the concentration added to the Caco-2 cells is well below that theoretically seen in vivo.
  • the standard circulating blood volume in the rat is 64 mL/kg (82).
  • the concentration of a 20 mg/kg dose of peptide circulating throughout the entire rat is 377 ⁇ M.
  • 200 ⁇ M is determined to be a physiologically relevant concentration to study ABS201 uptake in vitro.
  • ABS201 Three separate concentrations of ABS201 (10 ⁇ 9 , 10 ⁇ 7 10 ⁇ 5 M) were screened individually against the following 16 receptors: adrenergic (alpha1, alpha 2, beta), dopamine, histamine (H1, H2, H3), muscarinic (central, peripheral), nicotinic, opioid (nonselective), orphanin, serotonin (transporter, nonselective), monoamine oxidase (A, B). No displacement of the receptors' endogenous substrate were observed. Hence ABS201 does not appear to bind with any of these receptors. In contrast, the ABS201 has nM affinity for the target receptor (NTR 1 ).
  • ABS201 Blood Distribution and Metabolite Identification. ABS201 was added to freshly isolated whole rat blood to a concentration of 100 ⁇ g/mL, allowed to partition, and the cellular fraction was removed by centrifugation. ABS201 at this concentration distributes almost evenly between the cellular and serum fractions. No metabolites of ABS201 were been detected, consistent with previous experiments in which a very long serum/plasma half-live was demonstrated.
  • ABS201 was administered to rats at IV doses up to 100 mg/kg and oral doses up to 500 mg/kg. No adverse effects of the compound (body weight loss, mortality, abnormal clinical evaluations panel) were seen out to 48 hr post administration. These experiments thus define lower limits for the MTD of ABS201 at 100 times the ED 50 for the compound in antipsychosis and other tests reflective of brain activity.
  • mice used in the study consisted of 10/sex/group in Groups 1-4 (control, low-, mid-, and high-dose) and 5/sex in the positive control group.
  • Test peptide as administered orally, the positive control, Cyclophosphamide at 80 mg/kg, as administered orally.
  • mice were killed and bone marrow obtained from both femurs. A slide of a bone marrow suspension was prepared, stained with Wright-Giemsa stain, dried, and scored blind.
  • the number of polychromatic erythrocytes (PCE) among the total erythrocytes (PCE+normochromatic erythrocytes (NCE)) were determined for each animal by counting at least 200 erythrocytes.
  • the number of micronucleated polychromatic erythrocytes (MPCE) then were scored for 2000 PCE per animal. A positive result was obtained if there is a positive dose-response trend or statistically significant increase in the number of MPCE at one or more dose levels compared to controls.
  • the standard rat liver S-9 was prepared by inducing male Sprague-Dawley rats with Aroclor-1254 or Phenobarbital and/or ⁇ -naphthoflavone.
  • Positive controls included hycanthone methanesulfonate (HYC), which induces mutations at the TK locus without metabolic activation, and 7,12-Dimethylbenz[ ⁇ ]anthracene (DMBA), which induces mutations at the TK locus with metabolic activation.
  • a range finding test was performed to identify the ABS201 concentrations that produce 0-100% toxicity.
  • the positive controls (HYC and DMBA) and five concentrations of ABS201 were used in the assay with and with metabolic activation.
  • the synthetic NT peptide analogue was evaluated for its potential to cause mutations in the histidine operon of Salmonella typhimurium strains TA98, TA100, TA1535, TA1537 and the tryptophan operon of Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA .
  • the standard rat liver S-9 was prepared by inducing male Sprague-Dawley rats with Aroclor-1254 or Phenobarbital and/or ⁇ -naphthoflavone.
  • Bacterial strains used were Salmonella typhimurium strains TA98, TA100, TA1535, TA1537 and Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA.
  • the positive controls included 2-AA, 2-NF, 9-AA, NaAz, and MMS.
  • a solubility/miscibility assay was conducted to determine the maximum achievable concentration of peptide analogue in the selected solvent (water, DMSO, acetone, or ethanol).
  • a range finding test was performed with and without S-9 activation using tester strains TA100 and WP2 uvrA only to identify ABS201 concentrations that produce 0-100% toxicity.
  • the mutation assay was performed using the four Salmonella typhimurium strains (TA98, TA100, TA1535, TA1537) and the Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA strain using the plate incorporation method of treatment.
  • a response was considered positive if either strain TA98 or TA 100 has a dose that produces a mean reversion frequency greater than or equal to two times the mean reversion frequency of the corresponding solvent control plates or if either strain TA 1535, TA 1537 or WP2 uvrA has a dose producing a three-fold or greater increase in the mean reversion frequency compared to the solvent control frequency.
  • hERG Assay The objective of the hERG study is to assess the effects of the test article on the rapidly activating inward rectifying potassium current (I Kr ) conducted by hERG (human ether-a-go-go related gene) channels stably expressed in a HEK293 cell line.
  • the method used is as follows. HEK293 cells, stably transfected with hERG cDNA, were used in the study. All experiments were performed at near-physiological temperature (35 ⁇ 2° C.). A positive control (60 nM terfenadine) was applied to two cells (n ⁇ 2). Cells were be transferred to the recording chamber and superfused with HB-PS solution. The recording chamber and bathing solution were maintained at a temperature of 35 ⁇ 2° C. using a combination of in-line solution pre-heater, chamber floor heater, and feedback temperature controller. Bath temperature were measured using a thermistor probe.
  • Patch pipettes were made from glass capillary tubing using a P-97 micropipette puller (Sutter Instruments, Calif.). A commercial patch clamp amplifier was used for whole cell recordings. Before digitization, current records were low-pass filtered at one-fifth of the sampling frequency.
  • ABS201 Pharmacokinetics and Brain Distribution of ABS201.
  • ABS201 was administered in one IV dose (5 mg/kg) or oral dose (50 mg/kg) to rats.
  • blood was removed or brain harvested and the concentration of the peptide analog determined using LC/MS/MS. It was demonstrated that ABS201 could be detected in the blood and brain up to 120 minutes after both IV and oral administration. The amount in the brain was sufficient to saturate NTR-1 to produce the observed behavioral effects.
  • ABS201 was cleared from whole blood in two phases with an initial phase and a second phase where compound was measurable at low levels up to 120 minutes following IV administration of 5 mg/kg; the levels of ABS201 in whole blood were below the LLOD at all times following oral administration of the compound (50 mg/kg); the levels of ABS201 in brain were below the LLOD at all times following IV administration; and measurable quantities of ABS201 were detected in brains of 2 of 3 animals 15 minutes post oral administration of 50 mg/kg.
  • the plasma concentration versus time curve for IV and oral administration of ABS201 are shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 .
  • the mean value of systemic clearance was 2.45 L/hr/kg, which corresponded to 74.02% of rat hepatic blood flow.
  • the mean values of half-life and V z were 0.29 hr and 0.87 L/kg.
  • ABS201 distributes well into the tissues.
  • the volume of distribution at terminal phase was 0.87 ⁇ 0.27 L/kg, which was similar to the total body water (0.67 L/kg) in the rats.
  • the bioavailability of ABS201 following oral administration was 0.07% when in 0.9% saline solution.
  • the mean value of half-life was 0.99 hr.
  • ABS201.2HCl distributes well into the tissues.
  • the volume of distribution at terminal phase was 16.10 L/kg, which was greater than the total body water (0.67 L/kg) in the rat.
  • ABS201 The plasma and brain pharmacokinetics of ABS201 was also studied following IV administration of 1 mg/kg and, oral administration of 30 mg/kg of ABS201 to non fasted rats. The results of this study indicated that: ABS201 was rapidly cleared from plasma following IV administration with a t 1/2 of about 5 minutes; the levels of the compound decreased below the LLOD by 45 min; the levels of ABS201 were below the LLOD at all times following oral administration; and the levels of ABS201 in brain were below the LLOD at all times following both IV and PO administration.
  • ABS201 In vitro metabolism and compartmentalization of ABS201. To evaluate the distribution of ABS201 in blood, the extent of protein binding in plasma, and to gain a preliminary assessment of the metabolism of ABS201 in blood and plasma. The results of this study demonstrated: little or no binding of ABS201 to plasma proteins following a 5 or 30 min incubation at 37° C.; no evidence of metabolism of ABS201 in whole blood or plasma following a 5 or 30 min incubation at 37° C.; and a rapid distribution of about 33 percent of ABS201 into blood cellular elements when whole blood was incubated with ABS201 for 5 or 30 min at 37° C.
  • ABS201 is highly selective for NTR-1 and exhibits effective antipsychotic activity in key rat models of psychosis when administered either IP or orally. ABS201 exhibited a 300% increase in central activity when administered orally, and achieved a more rapid response with oral versus IV injection (these unique attributes are attributable to the desamino modification). ABS201 does not cause catalepsy or induce drug resistance. Initial rat toxicity and mutagenesis experiments have been negative.
  • ABS201 The pharmacokinetics, compartmentalization, and possible metabolism of ABS201 were evaluated in vitro and in vivo. The results suggest little or no metabolism, and complex pharmacokinetics which indicate that the compound initially undergoes a rapid clearance from blood, followed by a longer lasting, deep compartment phenomenon.
  • the pharmacodynamic response of ABS201 is long acting (2-4 hr) following both IV and PO administration; the acute effects of IV ABS201 are mediated via central nervous system; the compound does not appear to be metabolized upon co-incubation with plasma or whole blood; ABS201 partitions between the aqueous and cellular phases of blood in vitro; the PK profile of ABS201 in whole blood is consistent with a two phase clearance process; and the pharmacodynamic response which has been observed is likewise consistent with a two phase clearance process.
  • ABS201 is preferentially taken up into the brain, presumably through an active transport process, as it is lost from the brain at about 10% the rate that it is lost from the blood.
  • the compounds of the invention such as the semisynthetic peptide ABS201, could be administered on a once or twice daily basis.
  • ABS202 and ABS203 are shown in Table 8.
  • Compounds ABS226 and ABS227 differ from ABS202 and ABS203, respectively, in that the N-terminal —CH 3 groups of ABS202 and ABS203 are replaced by —H groups in ABS226 and ABS227.
  • the structure of ABS204 is 30-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-tertLeu-COOH, in which 30 refers to the non-natural residues shown in Scheme 2.
  • ABS206 is N-Me-Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-tertLeu-COOH.
  • Compounds ABS228 and ABS230 differ from compounds ABS204 and ABS206, respectively, in that the N-terminal —CH 3 groups of ABS204 and ABS206 are replaced by —H groups in ABS228 and ABS230.
  • Each of compound ABS226, ABS227, ABS228 and ABS230 was evaluated against its parent compound ABS202, ABS203, ABS204, ABS206, respectively, for antipsychotic and analgesic activity in appropriate rat models.
  • the former activity is most easily monitored by measuring the extent of induced hypothermia (core body temperature loss), which is a measure of NTR-1 binding and agonism and thus antipsychotic activity.
  • Hypothermia is followed routinely over time through insertion of a thermometer probe hooked up to a digital readout box into the anus of the rats.
  • Analgesia is monitored by the hotplate assay, in which hotplate measurements are taken on a walled-in metal surface that is maintained at 52° C.
  • ABS226 has about the same antipsychotic potential as ABS202, but its much smaller analgesic activity is resulting from poorer NTR-2 binding. Thus the compound is more selective for NTR-1 and a better antipsychotic candidate. A similar effect is seen with ABS203 and ABS227. ABS228 has a better analgesic activity than ABS224, hence it is more selective for NTR-2. ABS226 is more active in both potential indications.
  • non-natural Arg and Lys amino acids with —H when substituted for —CH 3 or —NH 2 in a peptide of biological activity, can produce better pharmaceutical candidates as a result of increased in overall activity of the compounds, or increased selectivity for the receptor subtype of interest.
  • mice Animals. Experimentally na ⁇ ve male Sprague-Dawley rats from Charles River Laboratories, Raleigh, N.C. (230-260 g) or Harlan, Prattville Ala. (240-280 g), were maintained 4 per cage in animal quarters on a regular light/dark cycle (lights on 0600-1800) with ad libitum food and water for approximately 1 week before the experiment. The range of body weights on the 2 days of testing was 230-260 grams. The experiment was done on one day, with animals allowed to recover for three days before experiments are repeated.
  • Morphine (5 mg/kg) is used as a control for certain protocols. Specifically, test peptide was suspended in 0.9% NaCl and injected I.P. in a volume of 1 mL/kg (rat weights, 230-260 g) to give a dose of 10 mg/kg.
  • Apomorphine HCl Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.
  • dosing range of the peptide will be 10, 3., 1, 0.3, 0.1 of the estimated ED 50 , covering two log orders of range.
  • the Hotplate Assay a standard rat model for chronic pain (see Le Bars et al., Pharmacol. Rev. 53: 597-652 (2001) and Chapman et al., Pain 22:1-31 (2002)), was performed as follows. A hotplate maintained at 52° C. to 53° C. was enclosed on four sides in a plexiglass chamber that extended 6 in. above the plate. Animals were placed on the plate, and the latency between the time a rat was placed on the surface and when it lifts or licks a back paw (indicative of pain sensation) was determined. Animals are removed immediately at the cutoff latency of 30 seconds.
  • % MPE percent of maximal possible effect
  • ABS201 as a Potential Analgesic
  • NT and derivatives are mediated through NTR-1 agonism while analgesic effects are mediated through NTR-2 agonism.
  • NTR-1 agonism analgesic
  • NTR-2 agonism analgesic
  • a NT derivative should in vitro bind with high affinity to NTR-2 and in vivo be orally available and stable.
  • ABS201 fulfills all of these requirements—having sub-micromolar NTR-2 affinity prolonged plasma stability and orally bioavailability as shown in Table 11.
  • ABS201 also exhibits analgesic activity as indicated by % MPE in the hotplate assay comparable in extent and duration to morphine ( FIG. 24 ). Of interest, however, are differences in the animals' affect after administration of these peptides. Rats given morphine looked “drugged”, becoming more rigid and completely unresponsive to environmental stimuli, while animals give ABS201 appeared simply to be relaxed. The rats do not become tolerant to the analgesic activity of ABS201 as rats dosed for five days straight show statistically identical % MPEs as when initially dosed ( FIG. 25 ). This is especially noteworthy as the rats are not experimentally na ⁇ ve by the end of the dose time course, which can result in them learning to avoid the hotplate and mask the potential for analgesia.
  • ABS201 analgesic activity of ABS201 is not linked to its hypothermic effect since the two do not show parallel kinetics—specifically the analgesic effect wears off while the hypothermic effect is still strong. This clearly indicates that the effects are mediated by different receptors. Overall, these data indicate the usefulness of ABS201 as a potential analgesic and antipsychotic.
  • ABS201 binds both NTR-1 and -2 with high affinity, there is a chance that effects associated with NTR-1 binding may make the peptide less desirable as an analgesic. These effects include induction of systemic hypothermia in rats, which is actually a very small effect in humans (D. Feifel, personal communication), and antipsychotic potency, which may not be undesirable.
  • a peptide highly selective for NTR-2 that maintains all of the favorable attributes of ABS201 would be a “cleaner” analgesic candidate.
  • NT[8-13] has a 20-fold preference for NTR-1 binding over NTR-2 (Table 12), it is less useful as an NTR-2 selective ligand.
  • the data for peptides ABS1, ABS13, and ABS201 indicate that there is a structure-binding effect in varying the ⁇ -amino group. Changing the polar —NH 2 (which is protonated at physiological pH significantly adding to its hydrophilicity) of ABS1 to nonpolar, uncharged —N 3 (ABS13) resulted in about a 10-fold improvement of NTR-2 to NTR-1 selectivity. In addition, as the arginine side chains get larger and more nonpolar, significantly better binding to NTR-2 resulted.
  • ABS19 has a 5-fold selectivity for NTR-2, and an overall selectivity improvement of about 100-fold over NT[8-13].
  • significant loss of receptor binding affinity is tolerated in this system as ABS201, which binds 50-fold less effectively than it's parent, still exhibited saturable effects in the rat schizophrenic models when given orally.
  • ABS201 is about three times as physiologically active as ABS13 in the rat behavioral models of schizophrenia when administered orally, clearly defining this as the best substitution for the ⁇ -amino group.
  • Desirable analgesic peptides are those which (1)exhibit analgesic activity comparable to or better than ABS201 in the hotplate, tail flick and formalin assays when IP injected, (2) exhibit activity when orally administered, (3) have desirable NTR-1 and NTR-2 binding activities, and (4) exhibit plasma stability.
  • ABS201 enabled definition of the key structural parameters necessary for biological stability and blood brain barrier crossing. Accordingly, a group of neurotensin (NT)[8-13] derivatives that incorporate structural elements that may enhance IP or oral bioavailability were created. Within these parameters, other proprietary structural changes were incorporated that can affect various pharmacological and behavioral parameters relevant to the potential development as therapeutic agents.
  • peptides with potential for (1) enhanced binding affinities for their receptors, e.g. enhanced binding and selectivity e.g. NT-derivatives with selectivity for brain NTR-2 have analgesic activity, while those with selectivity for NTR-1 have antipsychotic activity
  • (2) enhanced biological barrier crossings; (3) enhanced stability; and (4) feasible synthetic costs were identified.
  • the IP dose chosen was designed to produce a maximal response from active compounds as measured by the % MPE (Maximal Positive Effect).
  • An MPE of 100% indicates that the rat did not feel pain for the extent of time on the hotplate, using a cutoff of 30 seconds.
  • Tmax indicates the time after dosing in which a maximum response was observed. The tmax for all compounds were recorded as this gave an indication of the duration of each compound's analgesic effect.
  • Compounds that exhibited a % MPE of 100% were evaluated with oral dosing.
  • Table 13 provides the sequences of the peptides tested, selectivity for the NTR-1 or NTR-2 as indicated by ability to induce hypothermia, and the results of the Hotplate assay. Compounds with an asterisk exhibited significant activity in the hotplate asay.
  • Initial screens of all peptides included (1) evaluating their analgesic ability when dosed IP or orally (indicative of NTR-2 agonism) and (2) evaluating their ability to induce hypothermia when IP, a secondary effect of NTR-1 agonist activity.
  • Peptides that exhibited significant analgesic activity that is, greater than a set threshold level, when IP dosed were evaluated with oral dosing.
  • peptides with high hypothermia activity may show significantly greater oral bioavailability and were also preferred as they were better analgesic candidates, particularly if side effects of NTR-1 binding were minor.
  • a third parameter was that IP analgesics may have different utilities, and potencies, than orally administered peptides. Defined dose-response curves were also considered in selecting an analgesic candidate. Accordingly, the different parameters were weighed, and peptides that were not as “good” at others under the above analysis while showing overall similar profiles were not selected. A secondary screening that involved evaluating analgesia when dosed orally was performed, and the best peptides were subjected to a full dose-response analysis.
  • peptides ABS201, ABS202, ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS230,ABS232, ABS234 and ABS239 were identified as preferred analgesic peptides.
  • the structures for these peptides are summarized in the following table.
  • ABS201, ABS205, ABS210, ABS212, and ABS220 administered by gavage at a dose of 20 mg/kg are shown in FIG. 28 . These results indicate that ABS201, ABS205, ABS210 and ABS220 were as much or more active than ABS212 when given orally.
  • the analgesic effects of ABS232 and ABS239 as determined using the hotplate assay are illustrated in FIGS. 29 A and B.
  • ABS212 When administed by I.P. injection, however, the most active peptide was ABS212.
  • the analgesic property of ABS212 was compared with that of morphine using the hotplate, tail flick and formalin assays. Results obtained from the hotplate assay and the formalin assays are shown in FIGS. 30 A and B, respectively, while results obtained from the tail flick assay is summarized in Table 15 below.
  • ABS212 at an approximately equal molar ratio exhibits analgesic activity (% MPE) in the hotplate assay comparable or better in extent and duration to morphine ( FIG. 30A ).
  • % MPE analgesic activity
  • Rats given morphine looked “drugged,” becoming more rigid and completely unresponsive to environmental stimuli, while animals give ABS212 appeared simply to be relaxed.
  • the rats do not become tolerant to the analgesic activity of ABS212 as rats dosed for five days straight show statistically identical % MPEs as when initially dosed (data not shown).
  • FIGS. 30B and C show the dose response data for ABS212 when administered IP or orally, respectively.
  • Approximate ED 50 s for IP and oral doses are 2.5-5 mg/kg and 30-40 mg/kg respectively.
  • FIG. 31A shows the formalin assay.
  • morphine at approximately equimolar concentrations loses activity after 30 minutes.
  • ABS212 has a more pronounced analgesic effect when administered by I.P. injection.
  • FIGS. 31 B and C show the dose responses determined using the formalin assay for I.P. and oral administration, respectively. Approximate IP and oral ED 50 s are in the same range as the assays performed above.
  • ABS212 appears to be highly selective for NTR-2 as very little hypothermia (a secondary effect of NTR-1 binding) is elicited from this peptide at therapeutic analgesic doses. (In vitro receptor binding superbers are in progress).
  • ABS212 exhibits statistically significant analgesia at 30 minutes, with an apparent greater effect at 60 minutes, when compared to saline (see Table 15). ABS212 statistically compares to morphine.
  • FIGS. 32A and B show the dose response data for ABS212 when administered I.P. and orall, respectively, in the tail flick assay. Approximate IP and oral ED 50 s are in the same range as seen in the above assay.
  • FIG. 33 demonstrate that ABS212 is highly active in the Chung model for neuropathic pain when administered by I.P. injection. In sum, ABS212 is a highly effective analgesic in the four key rat models for the spectrum of pain states: acute (hotplate, tail flick), chronic (formalin) and neuropathic (Chung).
  • the volume of distribution at terminal phase following IV administration at nominal doses of 5, 2.5 and 1 mg/kg were 0.16 ⁇ 0.06, 0.15 ⁇ 0.01 and 0.43 ⁇ 0.15 L/kg, respectively, which were less than the total body water (0.67 L/kg) in the rats.
  • the dose-normalized AUC (0- ⁇ ) was 2.68:2.92:1 at respective doses of 5, 2.5, and 1 mg/kg, while the dose-normalized C max was 2.68:2.46:1 at doses of 5, 2.5, and 1 mg/kg, respectively, suggesting there was a saturable elimination when given high dosage.
  • the mean ⁇ SD values of C max and T max for ABS-212.2HCL were 27.08 ⁇ 11.55 ⁇ g/L and 0.14 ⁇ 0.05 hr, respectively; the mean ⁇ SD values of AUC (0- ⁇ ) and half-life (T 1/2 ) were 53.06 ⁇ 39.65 hr* ⁇ g/L and 1.42 ⁇ 0.87 hr, respectively.
  • the mean ⁇ SD value of bioavailability for ABS-212.2HCL was 0.11 ⁇ 0.08% with choice of 1 mg/kg group as IV dose data.
  • Binder E. B., Kinkead, B., Owens, M. J., Kilts, C. D., and Nemeroff, C. B. “Enhanced neurotensin neurotransmission is involved in the clinically relevant behavioral effects of antipsychotic drugs: evidence from animal models of sensorimotor gating.” J Neurosci. 21: 601-8, 2001.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)

Abstract

This invention relates to methods of synthesis of amino acid analogs contained within peptide sequences that is adapted for preparation of peptides containing analogs of basic amino acids lysine and arginine.

Description

  • This patent application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Ser. No. 11/629,806, filed Dec. 15, 2006, and presently pending, which is a U.S. national stage entry under 35 U.S.C. §371 from PCT/US2005/021580, filed Jan. 17, 2005, and published as WO2006/009902 A2 on Jan. 26, 2006, which claims the benefit of priority of U.S. provisional application Ser. No. 60/581,333, filed Jun. 17, 2004; all of which are herein incorporated by reference.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The influence that some non-natural amino acids have on the structural and biological activity of peptides has been briefly studied. For example, Moore et al. (Can. J. Biochem. 1978, 56, 315) disclosed the effect of the basic amino acid side chain length and the penultimate residue on the hydrolysis of benzoyldipeptides by carboxylicpeptidase B1 (CPB). Non-natural amino acids including homolysine and homoarginine were incorporated into small peptide chains, and the kinetic parameters were determined for the CPB catalyzed hydrolysis of the peptide. Also, Lindeberg et al. (Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 1977, 10, 240) disclosed the synthesis of 1-deamino-4-L-valine-8-DL-homolysine-vasopressin and protected 1-deamino-4-L-valine-8-D-lysine-vassopressin in which non-natural amino acids were incorporated. The non-natural amino acids were formed by addition of a methylene group to lysine and arginine to generate the non-natural amino acids homolysine and homoarginine, respectively. The study revealed that peptides with homolysine and homoarginine reduced the antidiuretic activity of the peptides.
  • Naturally occurring endogenous peptides are ideal drug candidate leads by virtue of their myriad activities in promoting and regulating biological processes. Inherent in the chemistry and biology of peptides, however, are several factors that also make them poor drug candidates. Peptides most often exert localized effects and are rapidly degraded within the body. In addition, most peptides are unable to cross biological membranes, including the small intestine and blood brain barrier (BBB). Finally, peptides often bind to more than one receptor or receptor subtype, thus rarely showing the selectivity required of a viable drug candidate. Therefore, for a peptide to become a viable drug candidate, improvements in blood stability, receptor selectivity, and barrier crossing should be made without eliminating inherent binding affinity.
  • Numerous strategies have been developed as methods for improving peptide stability, including N- and C-terminal modifications to prevent exopeptidase activity, amide backbone modifications, and the introduction of conformational constraints to disguise peptides from peptidase degradation. Other therapeutic compounds employ a prodrug moiety intended to modify its overall hydrophobicity, which can result in the compound crossing biological membranes. In this case, the compound is cleaved into its active component by endogenous enzymes. While each of these strategies has been used to improve peptides as drug candidates, a universal solution for creating stable, receptor-selective peptides that cross biological barriers has not been discovered.
  • Consequently, there is a need in the art for non-natural amino acids and for peptides incorporating such acids to achieve superior effects, such as, for example, improved diagnostic or disease fighting activity. Thus, the non-natural amino acid concept could be applied to development of new peptide pharmaceuticals. One example of such a development is the application to neuropeptides such as neurotensin. Neurotensin (NT) is a 13-amino acid residue peptide found primarily in the brain. It has multifunctional activities manifested through binding and activation of two neurotensin receptors (NTRs), NTR-1 and NTR-2 (see Carraway & Leeman, J. of Biol. Chem. 248: 6854 (1973)). Although full activity of NT resides in its C-terminal six amino acid sequence (NH2-Arg(8)-Arg(9)-Pro(10)-Tyr(11)-Ile(12)-Leu(3)-COOH, designated NT[8-13], see Carraway & Leeman, J. Biol. Chem. 250:1907 (1975)), the C-terminal six amino acid sequence does not have activity when administered IP or orally due to its instability in blood and inability to cross the blood brain and/or gut barrier.
    • SUMMARY OF CERTAIN EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention concerns alpha-desamino amino acid compounds (desamino amino acid compounds) that are capable of carrying positively charged side chains, their synthesis, their application as substitutes for natural amino acid moieties of biologically active peptides and the resulting peptides as well. In particular, alpha-desamino arginine, lysine and ornithine as well as their substituted and derivatized side chain analogs constitute preferred embodiments of the invention. These desamino amino acid compounds can be substituted for arginine and/or lysine moieties in any known, biologically active peptide such that the substituted peptide will be truncated at the substitution position. Alternatively, these desamino amino acid compounds can be coupled to the amino group of the N-terminus of any known biologically active peptide to produce an extended peptide. The truncated and extended peptides have significant biological selectivity and biological half lives owing to their resistance toward amino peptidase degradation.
  • In a first aspect, the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound having Formula I:
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00001
  • wherein
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 5;
  • m is zero or an integer of 1;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R1, R2, and R3 are, independently, hydrogen or branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C1-C6 or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination and with the proviso that a maximum of two of R1, R2, and R3 may be selected to be the aromatic, substituted aromatic, heteroaromatic or substituted heteroaromatic group, and provided that when m is 0 or 1 and n is 0 to 5, R1, R2, and R3 are not all H;
  • Cα is a carbon atom having either R or S stereochemistry if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • or an ester, amide, alkyl amide or metal cation or ammonium salt of the carboxylic acid group thereof, or an organic or inorganic acid salt of the amine group thereof, or any combination thereof.
  • In a second aspect, the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula II:
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00002
  • wherein
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 6, preferably, 2 to 5;
  • when dashed line a is not present, X and Y are independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C1-C6;
  • when dashed line a is present, X-Y is (CH2)z, wherein z is an integer of from 1-8, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R4 is hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, and;
  • Cα is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at Cα is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • or an ester, amide, alkyl amide or metal cation or ammonium salt of the carboxylic acid group thereof, or an organic or inorganic acid salt of the amine group thereof, or any combination thereof.
  • A third aspect of the present invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula III:
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00003
  • wherein
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 5;
  • X-Y is (CH2)2, wherein z is an integer of from 0 to 6, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R6, and R7 are, independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination; and
  • Cα is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at Cα, is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • or an ester, amide, alkyl amide or metal cation or ammonium salt of the carboxylic acid group thereof, or an organic or inorganic acid salt of the amine group thereof, or any combination thereof.
  • A fourth aspect of the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula IV:
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00004
  • wherein
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R9, R10, and R11 are, independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination and with the proviso that a maximum of two of R9, R10, and R11 may be selected to be the aromatic, substituted aromatic, heteroaromatic or substituted heteroaromatic group; and
  • Cα is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at Cα is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • or an ester, amide, alkyl amide or metal cation or ammonium salt of the carboxylic acid group thereof, or an organic or inorganic acid salt of the amine group thereof, or any combination thereof.
  • A fifth aspect of the invention relates to a non-natural desamino amino acid compound of the formula V:
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00005
  • wherein
  • n is an integer of from 0 to 5, preferably, 2 to 4;
  • R is H or an organic substituent such as a straight or branched chain alkyl group of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination;
  • R12, R13, and R14 are, independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl of C1-C6, or an aromatic group of C6-C18 or a corresponding substituted aromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination, or a heteroaromatic group of C4-C18 and one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination or a corresponding substituted heteraromatic group with one or two substituents selected from halogen, alkyloxy, carboxy, amide or alkyl in any combination and with the proviso that a maximum of two of R12, R13, and R14 may be selected to be the aromatic, substituted aromatic, heteroaromatic or substituted heteroaromatic group; and
  • Cα is a carbon atom and the stereochemistry at Cα is either R or S if the substituent at R is an organic substituent;
  • or an ester, amide, alkyl amide or metal cation or ammonium salt of the carboxylic acid group thereof, or an organic or inorganic acid salt of the amine group thereof, or any combination thereof.
  • A further aspect of the invention relates to the addition of the non-natural desamino amino acid compounds of the invention to the N-terminus amino group of biologically active peptides or their substitution for naturally occurring congener amino acid moieties of biologically active peptides. Preferred congener moieties include arginine and/or lysine.
  • The addition to the N-terminus amino group of a known, biologically active peptide provides an extended peptide that has selective, long lasting biological activity of the same kind as the known, biologically active peptide. The addition can be accomplished by known methods for coupling acid and amine groups together to form amide bonds, including use of acyl azide coupling, carbodiimide coupling, acid ion exchange resin, triaminoboranes and enzyme coupling. A preferred method involves the use of an amino exopeptidase under conditions that promote the peptide bond formation. In some embodiments of the invention, the semisynthetic peptides are produced by substituting a non-natural amino acid compound for the N-terminal arginine residue of NT (8-13), e.g., ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS226, ABS227, ABS228, ABS230, ABS232, ABS234, or ABS239.
  • Preferred embodiments of the peptides on which the extended peptides are based include biologically active peptides useful for treatment or prevention of malconditions. A list of preferred categories and examples is included in the sections below. Some preferred categories include but are not limited to transcription factors, ligands for cellular receptors, hormones and extracellular binding peptides. Some preferred examples include but are not limited to enkephlin, LHRH and analogs, neuropeptides, glycoincretins, integrin and analogs, glucagons and glucagon-like peptides, antithrombotic peptides, cytokines and interleukins, transferrins, interferons, endothelins, natriuretic hormones, extracellular kinase ligands, angiotensin enzyme inhibitors, peptide antiviral compounds, thrombin, substance P, substance G, somatotropin, somatostatin, GnRH and analogues, secretin, bradykinin, vasopressin and analogues, insulin and analogs thereof, growth factors, as well as others. The extended peptide is formed by coupling the N-terminus amino group of a basis peptide to the carboxyl group of a desamino amino acid compound of the invention.
  • The substitution of desamino amino acid moiety for an arginine or lysine moiety of a biologically active peptide provides a truncated peptide having selective, long-lasting biological activity. Any known biologically active peptide having an arginine and/or lysine moiety within its amino acid sequence can serve as the basis for the corresponding truncated peptide. Beginning at that ARG or LYS moiety, the truncated peptide will have the same downstream sequence as the known, biologically active peptide but the upstream sequence will be absent. In addition, that ARG or LYS moiety will be exchanged for a desamino amino acid moiety, thus providing the truncated peptide. Several known biologically active peptides are penultimately formed as pro-peptides with an arginine or lysine moiety at the pro-peptide or precursor cleavage position, or are formed as final peptides containing an arginine or lysine moiety at a position that can be cleaved to provide an active truncated peptide. Trypsin is an enzyme specific for such cleavage points. Examples include glucagon-like peptide, neurotensin, proinsulin, and thrombin. The truncated versions of these examples with a desamino amino acid compound substituted for the arginine or lysine moiety provide selective, long-lasting biological activity.
  • A further aspect of the invention includes pharmaceutical and cosmetic compositions of the desamino amino acid compound, of the extended or truncated peptide, and combinations thereof. Unit dosage forms and biologically effective formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions are included. The cosmetic formulations include appropriate oil, creme, wax or aqueous base cosmetic carriers.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention includes methods of screening, diagnosis and treatment using the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention and/or the addition or truncated peptides.
  • One embodiment of the invention is a truncated neurotensin peptide having a desamino amino acid as its N-terminus amino acid moiety.
  • An embodiment of the invention also is directed to processes and intermediates disclosed and claimed herein that are useful for preparing compounds of the inventions, such as compounds of Formula I, II, III, IV and/or V and peptides that contain such compounds. One class of such intermediates includes the N-protected or carboxyl protected or N- and carboxyl protected compounds of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V. These protected intermediates are described in detail in the following sections of the application. Another class of such intermediates includes the carboxylate salts of the compounds of Formulas I, II, III, IV and V, the organic or inorganic acid amine salts of those compounds and the double salts (carboxylate, amine salts).
  • An embodiment of the present invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of Formula (XI):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00006
  • or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
  • wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue; or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n is 1 to about 10,
  • R1, R2 and R3 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R1, R2 or R3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • the method comprising contacting a compound of Formula (XII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00007
  • wherein Y is a leaving group;
  • with an amine of the formula R1R2R3N, in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XI).
  • Another embodiment of the present invention concerns a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (XIII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00008
  • or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
  • wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n is 1 to about 10;
  • R4 and R5 are independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R4 or R5 is not a Boc group;
  • the method comprising contacting a compound of Formula (XV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00009
  • wherein R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • with a compound of Formula (XIV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00010
  • wherein R6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof;
  • in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XIII).
  • Yet another embodiment of the present invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of formula (XIII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00011
  • or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
  • wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R at each occurrence is independently H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n is 1 to about 10;
  • R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • R4 and R5 are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R4 or R5 is not a Boc group;
  • from a compound of formula (XII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00012
  • wherein Y is a leaving group;
  • the method comprising contacting the compound of formula (XII) with an amine of the formula R1NH2, in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00013
  • then, contacting the compound of formula (XV) with a compound of Formula (XIV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00014
  • wherein R6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof;
  • in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XIII).
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1. Structure comparisons of NT(8-13), an intermediate NT analogue, and ABS201.
  • FIG. 2. Representative Examples of Compounds of Formulas I-V.
  • FIG. 3A-3C. Scheme for Synthesis of Compounds of Formulas I-V.
  • FIG. 4. Asymmetric synthesis of ω-bromo acids.
  • FIG. 5. Synthesis of ethylene-bridged (Nδ to Nω) arginine analogues.
  • FIG. 6. Synthesis of cyclic and acyclic arginine analogues.
  • FIG. 7. Peptide synthesis of representative peptides of the invention.
  • FIG. 8A-8C. Comparisons of induced hypothermia by α-methyl NT(8-13) analogues.
  • FIG. 9. Hypothermic effects of ABS201 after IP (solid symbols) and oral administration (open symbols) at 2 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg, respectively.
  • FIG. 10A-10B. Comparison of hypothermic effects after IP and oral administration for KH29 (10A) and KH30 (10B).
  • FIG. 11A-11B. Dose-response curves for ABS201 after IP administration.
  • FIG. 12. Dose-dependent hypothermic response to ABS201 after oral administration.
  • FIG. 13. Attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity after IP administration of ABS201.
  • FIG. 14. Attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity after oral administration of ABS201.
  • FIG. 15. Reversal of PPI induced in Brattleboro rats by ABS201 administered orally.
  • FIG. 16. Effect of ABS201 and haloperidol on catalepsy.
  • FIG. 17. Hypothermic effects of chronic administration of ABS201 after daily dose of 5 mg/kg ABS201.
  • FIG. 18. Effect of repeated daily administration of ABS201 on d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion after daily doses of 5 mg/kg ABS201.
  • FIG. 19. Synthesis of Fmoc-Proline-OH*.
  • FIG. 20. Blood concentration-time curve in male SD rats following intravenous administration of ABS201.TFA at a dose of 5 mg/kg Free Base (n=3).
  • FIG. 21. Blood concentration-time curve in male SD rats following oral administration of ABS201.TFA at a dose of 50 mg/kg Free Base (n=3).
  • FIG. 22. Plasma and brain concentration-time curve in male SD rats following intravenous administration of ABS201.TFA at a dose of 100 mg/kg free base (n=3).
  • FIG. 23. Comparison of the sites of absorbtion of ABS 201 in the GI tract.
  • FIG. 24. Antinociceptive Activity of ABS201 (5 mg/kg) and Morphine (5 mg/kg).
  • FIG. 25. Evaluation of ABS tolerance in rats dosed daily with 5 mg/kg ABS201 for 5 days as determined by of MPEs.
  • FIG. 26. The structures of NT[8-13] and peptides ABS1, ABS13, ABS201, ABS15, ABS16, ABS 17 and ABS19, which exhibit enhanced NTR-2 to NTR-1 binding affinities.
  • FIG. 27. Structures of peptides designed to be better NTR-2 selective ligands.
  • FIG. 28. Analgesic effects of (A) ABS201, (B) ABS205, (C) ABS210, (D) ABS212, and (E) ABS220 administered by gavage at a dose of 20 mg/kg.
  • FIG. 29. Analgesic effect of (A) ABS232 and (B)ABS239 administered by gavage at a dose of 20 mg/kg.
  • FIG. 30. Analgesic effects of ABS212 determined using the hotplate assay. Comparison of the analgesic effects of ABS212 (10 mg/kg) and morphine (5 mg/kg) (A); dose response data for ABS212 administered by I.P. injection (B) or orally (C).
  • FIG. 31. Analgesic effects of ABS212 determined using the formalin assay. Comparison of the analgesic effects of ABS212 (10 mg/kg) and morphine (5 mg/kg) (A); dose response data for ABS212 administered by I.P. injection (B) or orally (C).
  • FIG. 32. Dose response data for ABS212 administered I.P.(A) and orally (B) as determined in the tail flick assay.
  • FIG. 33. Effects of ABS212 administered by I.P. injection determined using the Chung model of neuropathic pain.
  • FIG. 34. Concentration-Time curve in male SD rats following intravenous administration of ABS212.2HCl at a dose of 5 mg/kg free base (A) and oral administration of ABS212.2HCl at a dose of 50 mg/kg free base (B), (n=3).
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions
  • As used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • Variables, such as R1-R3, n, z, X, Y, Cα and Cβ, throughout the application are the same variables as defined herein unless stated to the contrary.
  • The term “alkyl” as used herein refers to a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, decyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl and the like. Preferred alkyl groups herein contain from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • The term “alkenyl” as used herein refers to a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms, with preferred groups within this class containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and structural formula containing a carbon-carbon double bond.
  • The term “alkynyl” as used herein refers to a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms, with preferred groups within this class containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and a structural formula containing a carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • As used herein, especially in reference to alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl, unless defined otherwise, the term “lower” refers to a moiety having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • The term “alkylating agent” as provided herein is a compound with the structural formula RX, where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group as previously described, and X, which is preferably a halide such as chloride, bromide or iodide.
  • As used herein, the term “non-natural amino acid” refers to an organic compound that is a congener of a natural amino acid in that it has a structure similar to a natural amino acid so that it mimics the structure and reactivity of a natural amino acid. The non-natural amino acid as defined herein generally increases or enhances the properties of a peptide (e.g., selectivity, stability) when the non-natural amino acid is either substituted for a natural amino acid unit of a peptide or otherwise incorporated into a peptide.
  • As used herein, the term “peptide” refers to a class of compounds composed of amino acids chemically bound together. In general, the amino acids are chemically bound together via amide linkages (—CONH—); however, the amino acids may be bound together by other chemical bonds known in the art. For example, the amino acids may be bound by amine linkages. Peptide as used herein includes oligomers of amino acids and small and large peptides, including polypeptides.
  • As used herein, the term “activity” refers to a biological activity.
  • As used herein, the term “pharmacological activity” refers to the inherent physical properties of a peptide or polypeptide. These properties include but are not limited to half-life, solubility, and stability and other pharmacokinetic properties.
  • The term “organic acid salt” as used herein refers to the salt form of an amine group with an alkyl or aryl C1-C9 carboxylic, sulfonic, or phosphoric acid.
  • The term “inorganic acid salt” as used herein refers to the salt form of an amine group with a mineral acid such as hydrochloric, sulfuric, sulfonic, phosphoric, nitric, nitrous, or hydrobromic acid.
  • The term “aromatic of C6 to C18” as used herein refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon such as phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, or an arylalkyl hydrocarbon such as benzyl, phenethyl or naphthylmethylenyl.
  • The term “heteraromatic of C4 to C18 and of one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen in any combination” as used herein refers to a heteroaromatic hydrocarbon containing one or two heteroatoms or an alkyl heteroaromatic hydrocarbon such as thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, azathienyl, azafuryl, pyridinyl, thiapyridinyl, pyrazinyl, methylenylpyridinyl, ethylenylpyridinyl, methylenylpyrrolyl and the like.
  • The term “R or S” in connection with stereochemistry has the ordinary meaning designating the optical isomerism of the selected carbon. R in this context should not be confused with R as a substituents. The chemical, pharmaceutical and biological terms used herein follow the ordinary and customary meanings one of skill, such as a Ph.D. researcher in the field would attribute to them. Such meanings may be found in appropriate technical dictionaries and treatises such as but not limited to “Hawley's Condensed Chemical Dictionary”, 11th Ed., Sax and Lewis Editors, Van Nostrand Reinhold Publishing, New York, N.Y. 1987; “Concise Chemical and Technical Dictionary”, 4th enlarged Ed. Bennett Editor, Chemical Publishing Inc., New York, N.Y., 1986, “The Merck Index” 11th and succeeding Editions, Merck & Co. Rahway, N.J. 1989 and more recent; “Advanced Organic Chemistry” 4th Ed., J. March, Wiley Interscience, New York, N.Y. 1992; “Concise Dictionary of Biomedicine and Molecular Biology”, Pei-Show Juo Ed., CRC Press, New York, N.Y. 1996; “Molecular Cell Biology”, Darnell, Lodish, Baltimore, Scientific American Books, New York, N.Y. 1986; the disclosures of all of these dictionaries and treatises are incorporated herein by reference.
    • Detailed Description
  • The present invention is directed to certain desamino amino acid compounds, their incorporation as extenders or as congeners in known biologically active peptides, and the use of the compounds and peptides in medical diagnosis, treatment and screening. Several aspects of the invention concern the mimicry of the desamino amino acid compounds for the natural amino acids arginine and/or lysine. By their use as congeners for these natural amino acid moieties in known biologically active peptides, truncated versions of the peptides can be prepared in which the biological activity is more selective and longer lasting than that of the known peptide. By their use as extenders, their position as the N-terminal moiety adduct of a known biologically active peptide will also provide longer lasting biological activity than that of the known peptide.
  • An example of the use of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention in a truncated peptide is provided by neurotensin. Neurotensin (NT) is a 13 amino acid peptide having neurological properties. Its cleavage at AA7 to produce truncated neurotensin (8-13) provides a peptide having selective biological activity. According to the invention, conversion of the AA8 arginine to a desamino amino acid moiety results in a peptide also having significant and selective biological activity. The examples of NT and the converted versions are shown in FIG. 1.
  • The biologically active peptides of the present invention have the desamino amino acid moiety as their N-terminal moiety. These peptides have known amino acid sequences of biologically active amino acids wherein the desamino amino acid is either covalently coupled through an amide bond with the N-terminus amine group of the known peptide (extended peptide) or is substituted for its corresponding congener moiety (analogous natural amino acid moiety) within the peptide (truncated version). In another alternative, the peptide becomes truncated at the position of substitution so that the desamino amino acid moiety becomes the new N-terminus and the amino acid residues upstream of this position are no longer part of the sequence (truncated peptide). The extended and truncated peptides can have longer lifetimes in vivo and can have biological activities like those of the natural peptides except that the activities will be more selective.
  • One aspect of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention is provided by Formula I given above. Preferred embodiments of Formula I include those wherein
  • R1, R2, and R3 are independently, hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl of C1-C5, more preferably hydrogen or methyl, provided that when m is 0 or 1 and n is 0 to 5, R1, R2, and R3 are not all H. In another embodiment, n is 4. In yet a further embodiment, R is an H, methyl, ethyl or propyl. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • a) n is 4, m is 0, R1 is hydrogen, R2 is methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • b) n is 4, m is 1, R1 and R2 are methyl, R3 is hydrogen or methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • c) n is 4, m is 1, R1 is methyl, R2, and R3 are hydrogen, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • d) n is 4, m is 1, R1, R2, and R3 are hydrogen, the compound of formula I is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • e) n is 3, m is 0, R1 and R2 are methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • f) n is 3, m is 0, R1 and R2 are ethyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • g) n is 3, m is 0, R1 and R2 are propyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • h) n is 3, m is 0, R1 and R2 are butyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • i) n is 2, m is 0, R1 and R2 are methyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • j) n is 2, m is 0, R1 and R2 are ethyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • k) n is 2, m is 0, R1 and R2 are propyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • l) n is 2, m is 0, R1 and R2 are butyl, the compound of formula I is an acid, the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • Also preferred are the esters or salts of any of the foregoing preferred embodiments a-l.
  • Another aspect of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention is illustrated by Formula II given above. Preferred embodiments of Formula II include those wherein when n is 3, dashed line a is not present. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein X is hydrogen, and wherein Y and R4 are the same lower branched or straight chain alkyl. In yet another preferred embodiment, R4 and R5 are, independently, hydrogen or methyl. In another preferred embodiment, dashed line a is not present, X is hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl of C1-C5, preferably methyl or ethyl, and Y is hydrogen or lower branched or straight chain alkyl of C1-C5, preferably methyl, or dashed line a is present and z is 2, and preferably, n is 3. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • a) n is 3, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is hydrogen, X is hydrogen, Y is methyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • b) n is 3, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is methyl, X is hydrogen, Y is methyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • c) n is 3, dashed line a is present, the compound of formula II is an acid, z is 2, R4 is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • d) n is 3, dashed line a is present, the compound of formula II is an acid, z is 2, R4 is methyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • e) n is 3, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is hydrogen, X is methyl, Y is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • f) n is 3, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is hydrogen, X is ethyl, Y is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • g) n is 2, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is hydrogen, X is hydrogen, Y is methyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • h) n is 2, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is methyl, X is hydrogen, Y is propyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • i) n is 4, dashed line a is present, the compound of formula II is an acid, z is 2, R4 is hydrogen, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • j) n is 3, dashed line a is present, the compound of formula II is an acid, z is 2, R4 is methyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • k) n is 2, dashed line a is present, the compound of formula II is an acid, z is 3, R4 is methyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • l) n is 3, dashed line a is not present, the compound of formula II is an acid, R4 is methyl, X is hydrogen, Y is ethyl, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • Also preferred are the esters or salts of any of the forgoing preferred embodiments a-l.
  • A third aspect of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention is illustrated by Formula III. Preferred embodiments of Formula III include those wherein R6 and R7 are independently, hydrogen or lower alkyl or straight chain alkyl of C1-C5, preferably hydrogen or methyl, even more preferably all are hydrogen. In another embodiment, z is 2 or 3, preferably 3. In a preferred embodiment, n is 3. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • a) n is 3, z is 2, R6 and R7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • b) n is 3, z is 3, R and R7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • c) n is 2, z is 2, R6 and R7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • d) n is 4, z is 2, R6 and R7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • e) n is 2, z is 3, R6 and R7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • f) n is 4, z is 3, R6 and R7 are hydrogen, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • g) n is 2, z is 2, R6 and R7 are methyl, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • h) n is 4, z is 2, R6 and R7 are methyl, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • i) n is 2, z is 3, R6 and R7 are methyl, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • j) n is 4, z is 3, R6 and R7 are methyl, the compound of formula III is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • Also preferred are the esters or salts of the preferred foregoing embodiments a-j.
  • A fourth aspect of the invention is provided by the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula IV. Preferred embodiments of the compounds of Formula IV include those wherein R9, R10, and R11 are, independently, hydrogen or lower straight or branched chain alkyl of C1-C5, preferably hydrogen, methyl or ethyl. In another embodiment, R10 is methyl. In yet another preferred embodiment, R9 is hydrogen, R10 is methyl, R11 is hydrogen, and n is 3. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • a) n is 3, R9 and R11 are hydrogen, R10 is methyl, the compound of formula IV is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • b) n is 3, R9 is hydrogen, R10 and R11 are methyl, the compound of formula IV is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • c) n is 3, R9 is hydrogen, R10 is methyl, R11 is ethyl, the compound of formula IV is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • d) n is 2, R9 and R11 are hydrogen, R10 is methyl, the compound of formula IV is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • e) n is 2, R9 is hydrogen, R10 and R11 are methyl, the compound of formula IV is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • f) n is 4, R9 is are hydrogen, R10 is methyl, R11 is ethyl, the compound of formula IV is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • Also preferred are the esters or salts of the foregoing preferred embodiments a-f.
  • A fifth aspect of the invention is provided by the desamino amino acid compounds of formula V. Preferred embodiments of the compounds of formula V include those wherein R12, R13, and R14 are, independently, hydrogen or lower straight or branched chain alkyl of C1-C5, preferably hydrogen, methyl or ethyl. In another embodiment, R12 is methyl. In yet another preferred embodiment, R13 can be hydrogen, R14 can methyl, ethyl or propyl, R13 and R14 can be any combination of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl or propyl, and n is 2 or 3. Additional preferred embodiments include those wherein R is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl and:
  • a) n is 3, R12 and R13 are hydrogen, R14 is methyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • b) n is 3, R12 is methyl, R13 and R14 are methyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • c) n is 3, R12 is methyl, R13 is methyl, R14 is ethyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • d) n is 2, R12 is methyl, R13 is hydrogen and R14 is methyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • e) n is 2, R12 is methyl, R13 and R14 are methyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;
  • f) n is 4, R12 is methyl, R13 is methyl, and R14 is ethyl, the compound of formula V is an acid, and the stereochemistry at Cα is R or S if the substituent at R is methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • Also preferred are the esters or salts of the foregoing preferred embodiments a-f.
  • Especially preferred non-natural desamino amino acid compounds of the invention include the formulas provided in FIG. 2 wherein R is H, methyl or ethyl.
  • Certain embodiments of the invention provide protected intermediates and protected non-natural amino acids of the invention. Certain embodiments provide protected intermediates and protected non-natural amino acids of the invention, wherein the side chain amine group is protected by a protecting group that prevents undesired reaction of the amino group and is removable by a chemical method that does not also cause amide group cleavage. Certain embodiments provide protected intermediates and protected non-natural amino acids of the invention, wherein the side chain carboxyl group is protected by a protecting group that prevents undesired reaction of the carboxyl group and is removable by a chemical method that does not also cause carboxyl group cleavage. In certain embodiments, the protecting group is t-butoxy carbonyl (BOC) or fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC). In certain embodiments, the protecting group is BOC, FMOC, Alloc (allyloxycarbonyl), CBZ (benzyloxycarbonyl), Pbf (2,2,4,6,7-pentamethyldihydrobenzofuran-5-sulfonyl), NO2 (nitro), Pmc (2,2,5,7,8-pentamethylchroman-6-sulfonyl), Mtr (4-methoxy-2,3,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonyl), or Tos (tosyl).
  • In one embodiment, the structures of the non-natural desamino amino acids of formulas I-V are similar to those of the naturally occurring amino acids lysine, arginine as well as the naturally occurring glutamate biosynthesis intermediate, ornithine. In preferred embodiments, the compounds of the invention differ from the corresponding natural amino acids due, inter alia, a longer or shorter methylene bridge between the (i) carboxyl terminus, which forms the N-terminus bond with the adjacent amino acid unit in a peptide, (ii) the presence of a —H or an alkyl group in place of the alpha amino group, and (iii) the organo group substitution of the amine side chain. Preferably, the extended bridge of the invention compared to the natural amino acid bridge is one carbon length longer or shorter (i.e., the homo- or des-forms). In other preferred embodiments, the compounds of the invention have, inter alia, longer, shorter, or equivalent methylene bridge lengths and have substitutions at various moieties, form different moieties, or link moieties to form ring structures, compared to the comparable natural amino acid.
  • Each of the compounds of the invention can be prepared as the acid, amide, salt or ester. In water, the non-natural amino acids of the present invention will be charged; however; in cell membranes and other non-polar regions of the cell, the non-natural amino acids may not be charged. In one embodiment, the ester group of the non-natural amino acids of the present invention is methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, benzyl or allyl. In another embodiment, the counter-ion for the salts of the non-natural amino acids is sodium, potassium, ammonium and tetra-alkyl ammonium.
  • Some embodiments of the invention provide semisynthetic peptides comprising a non-natural amino acid compound of the invention. In some embodiments, the semisynthetic peptide comprises a non-natural amino acid compound as its N-terminus moiety. In some embodiments, the semisynthetic peptide comprises a non-natural amino acid compound as the N-terminal moiety of a semisynthetic peptide of neurotensin (8-13). In one embodiment, the semisynthetic peptide is ABS201, ABS202, ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS226, ABS227, ABS228, ABS230, ABS232, ABS234 or ABS239. In some embodiments, the semisynthetic peptide has an extended half-life in vivo as compared to a peptide having the same sequence as the semisynthetic peptide that does not comprise the non-natural amino acid compound substituted as its N-terminus moiety. In some embodiments, the semisynthetic peptide has analgesic and/or antipsychotic activity. Examples of semisynthetic peptides having antipsychotic and/or analgesic activity are shown in the tables below.
  • TABLE 1
    Semisynthetic Peptides with Antipsychotic Property
    Peptides N-terminus Sequence* Structure*
    ABS201 CH3 L-hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu FIG. 7
    (KH28) (KH28)
    KH29 CH3 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu FIG. 7
    KH30 CH3 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu FIG. 7
    ABS13 N3 L-hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 1
    ABS41 N3 13-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 1
    ABS44 N3 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 1
    ABS46 N3 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 1
    ABS201 CH3 L-hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 1
    ABS202 CH3 28-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 2
    ABS203 CH3 29-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 2
    *The “tLeu” or “t-Leu” means tert-Leu. The number or term “L-hLys” in the sequence indicates a non-natural amino acid moiety, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 7 or structural Scheme 1 or 2.
  • TABLE 2
    Semisynthetic Peptides with Analgesic Property
    Peptide N-terminus Sequence* Structure*
    ABS1 NH2 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-isoleu-Leu FIG. 26
    ABS13 N3 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tleu-Leu FIG. 26
    ABS201 CH3 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tleu-Leu FIG. 26
    ABS15 N3 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-isoleu-Leu FIG. 26
    ABS16 N3 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-isoleu-Leu FIG. 26
    ABS17 N3 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-isoleu-Leu FIG. 26
    ABS19 NH2 X-Arg-Pro-Tyr-isoleu-Leu FIG. 26
    *The letter “X” in the sequence indicates a non-natural amino acid moiety, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 26.
  • TABLE 3
    Semisynthetic Peptides with Analgesic and Antipsychotic
    Property
    Peptides N-terminus Sequence* Structure*
    ABS201 CH3 hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS202 CH3 1-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS203 CH3 2-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS204 CH3 3-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS205 CH3 Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS206 CH3 4-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS207 CH3 5-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS208 CH3 6-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS209 CH3 Orn-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS210 CH3 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS211 CH3 8-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS212 CH3 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS213 CH3 Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS214 CH3 10-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS215 CH3 11-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS216 CH3 12-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS217 CH3 13-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS218 CH3 18-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS220 CH3 15-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS221 CH3 16-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS224 CH3 alkene-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS700 Boc-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS225 H hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS226 H 1-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS227 H 2-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS228 H 3-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS229 H Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS230 H 4-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS231 H 5-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS232 H 6-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS233 H Orn-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS234 H 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS235 H 8-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS236 H 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS237 H Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS238 H 10-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS239 H 11-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS240 H 12-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS241 H 13-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS242 H 18-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS243 H 19-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS244 H 15-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS245 H 16-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    ABS246 H 17-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu Scheme 3
    *The “tLeu” or “t-Leu” means tert-Leu. The number or term “L-hLys” in the sequence indicates a non-natural amino acid moiety, the structure of which is shown in Scheme 3.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide pharmaceutical compositions comprising a peptide of the invention and a pharmaceutical carrier. In certain embodiments, the peptide is present in unit dosage form.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide cosmetic formulations comprising a non-natural amino acid compound of the invention and a cosmetic base formulation. Certain embodiments of the present invention provide cosmetic formulations comprising a semisynthetic peptide of the invention and a cosmetic base formulation. In certain embodiments, the cosmetic base formulation is an aqueous or oil base.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the non-natural amino acid compounds of the invention for use in medical therapy.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of the non-natural amino acid compounds of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating psychosis in a mammal. Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of the semisynthetic peptides of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating psychosis in a mammal. In certain embodiments, the psychosis is schizophrenia.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of a compound of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating cancer, obesity, Parkingson's disease or psychostimulatn abuse in a mammal.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the use of a compound of the invention for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating pain in a mammal.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide the semisynthetic peptides of the invention for use in medical therapy.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to lower the body temperature of a patient, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a semisynthetic peptide of the invention so as to lower the body temperature of the patient.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to lower the body temperature of a patient, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to lower the body temperature of the patient.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat a patient with psychosis, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a peptide of the invention so as to treat the psychosis.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat a patient with psychosis, comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to treat the psychosis.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat cancer, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a peptide of any of the invention so as to treat the cancer.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat cancer, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to treat the cancer.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat pain, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a peptide of the invention so as to treat the pain.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method to treat pain, comprising administering to a patient an effective amount of a composition of the invention so as to treat the pain.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method for screening a peptide containing a non-natural amino acid compound for an activity, comprising the steps of: a) measuring a biological activity of a first peptide having a known amino acid sequence; and b) measuring the same biological activity of a semisynthetic peptide of any of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound. In certain embodiments of the invention, the biological activity is poptosis, apoptosis, cell signaling, ligand binding, transcription, translation, metabolism, cell growth, cell differentiation, homeostasis, half-life, solubility, or stability. In certain embodiments of the invention, the biological activity includes a direct or indirect assessment of the ability of the semisynthetic peptide to pass through a biological barrier. In certain embodiments of the invention, the biological activity is selectivity.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of treating a patient with a disease that is affected by administration to the patient of a known first peptide, comprising administering to the patient a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of increasing the ability of a known first peptide to cross a biological barrier of a subject, comprising substituting a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound. In certain embodiments, the barrier comprises the blood brain barrier, a cell membrane, intestinal epithelium, skin, or blood-ocular.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of increasing the selectivity of a known peptide, comprising substituting for the known peptide a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of increasing the resistance of a known peptide to digestion by a peptidase, comprising substituting for the known peptide a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of treating a patient with a disease that is affected by administration to the patient of a known first peptide that crosses a body barrier, comprising administering to the patient a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method of treating a patient with a disease of the brain that is affected by administration to the patient of a known first peptide, comprising administering to the patient a semisynthetic peptide of any of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • Certain embodiments of the present invention provide a method for preparing a semisynthetic peptide with an extended half-life in vivo comprising substituting for a known peptide a semisynthetic peptide of the invention wherein the semisynthetic peptide has the same sequence as the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound, or is a truncated version of the first peptide except for the non-natural amino acid compound.
  • The compound designators ABS201, ABS48, KH48, and peptide 28, as used herein, unless otherwise indicated, represent the same compound.
    • Preparation of the Desamino Amino Acid Compounds
  • The preparation of the desamino amino acid compounds of the invention follows the overall synthetic scheme depicted in FIG. 3. The first step in this process is the production of omega halogen carboxylic acids having a methylene unit chain length corresponding to n of formulas I through V. In the following discussion, and in FIG. 3, this intermediate is designated as compound 27. Following the production of compound 27, its ω-halo group can be easily displaced with excess nucleophilic agent to produce the desamino amino acid compounds of Formulas I-V.
  • When R═H, the omega halogen compound can be used directly in succeeding steps. When R is an organic substituent, the R group is added through the following synthesis. When R is an organic substituent, the reaction conditions for production of compound 27 involve protection of the carboxyl group of an omega carboxylic acid by formation of an acyl oxazolone. The acyl oxazolone is converted to an enolate and the enolate is combined with an alkylating agent such as alkyl iodide or alkyl mesylate to form compound 27. Use of a large excess of the alkylating agent and long reaction times promote significant yields of compound 27.
  • As shown in the synthetic scheme of FIG. 3, the omega halo carboxylic acid compounds 25 can be converted to any of the side chain modifications by coupling the appropriate side chain moiety and the omega halo group of compound 25. Appropriate protection of the carboxyl group is also advantageously employed. The conditions for these reactions, and the appropriate alkylating and substituting agents follow the teaching set forth in “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 4th Edition, J. March, Wiley InterScience, New York, N.Y. 1992, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In particular, to prepare the compounds of Formula I, (see synthetic schemes of FIGS. 3 and 4), the omega halo carboxylic acid compound 27 can be combined with the appropriate amine nucleophile such as ammonia, a primary amine or a secondary amine. The formulas of the amine nucleophiles correspond to the side chain moiety of Formula I. The reaction conditions will follow those appropriate for amine nucleophilic substitution as are disclosed in “Advanced Organic Chemistry” cited above and incorporated herein as if fully repeated. These compounds can be used directly in the following peptide synthesis provided that the side chain amine group is appropriately protected or otherwise inhibited from carboxyl condensation.
  • Similarly, to prepare the compounds of Formula II (see the synthetic schemes of FIGS. 3 and 5) the omega halo compound 27 may first be protected at the carboxyl position and then can be reacted sequentially with a diamine and cyanogen bromide. Deprotection and purification will afford the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula II. These compounds can be used directly in peptide synthesis with appropriate side chain protection.
  • The compounds of Formulas III and IV (see the synthetic schemes of FIGS. 3 and 6) can also be prepared by addition of the side chain moiety to the omega halo carboxylic acid compounds 27. In this instance, protection of the carboxyl group is unnecessary. Preparation of the appropriate thiourea compound can be accomplished by addition of an alkylating agent such as an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl halide to thiourea, N-substituted thiourea or N,N-disubstituted thiourea (commercially available). The nucleophilic substitution of the resulting appropriate thiourea compound at the omega halo position of compound 27 under basic conditions provides the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula IV. Similarly, addition of the appropriate cyclic thiourea compounds to the omega halo compound 27 under basic conditions provides the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula III. The appropriate cyclic thiourea compounds can be prepared by combining an alkylating agent such as an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl halide with the corresponding unsubstituted, N-substituted or N,N-disubstituted cyclic diazathione (commercially available). The crude reaction products can be purified by known methods such as ion-exchange chromatography to yield the desamino amino acid compounds of Formulas III and IV which can be used directly in peptide synthesis with appropriate side chain protection.
  • The compounds of formula V can be prepared by first protection of the carboxyl group as an acyl oxazolone. Subsequent to formation of the protected carboxylic acid, an organic substituent at the alpha carbon (R) can be added if desired following the procedure given above. In the next step, the omega halo group can be reacted with cyanide to form an omega cyano protected carboxylic acid. This intermediate can be reacted with an alkali metal organo amine (XNR13R14) to form the amidine anion. The amidine anion may be quenched with acid, water or an alkyl halide to form either the unsubstituted imine moiety of the amidine or the alkyl substituted imine moiety of the amidine, respectively. This amidine protected carboxylic acid may then be employed in the synthetic scheme described above for production of the desired peptide.
  • Before their use in peptide synthesis, the side chains of the compounds of Formulas I-V may either be appropriately protected or determined to be sufficiently hindered that they will not enter into a peptide condensation reaction. For example, if the side chain of the compounds of Formula I is a primary amine group, it may be appropriately protected according to the teaching of the art associated with peptide synthesis. See for example, the review of amine protecting groups provided in “Compendium of Organic Synthetic Methods,” I&S Harrison, Wiley Interscience, New York, N.Y., 1971, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. In these instances, an appropriate protecting group can be t-butoxy carbonyl having the acronym BOC or fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl having the acronym FMOC. The BOC and FMOC protecting groups can be removed by mild treatment with acid, such as aqueous trifluoroacetic acid, and base, such as piperidine, respectively.
  • Alternatively, the omega halo carboxylic acid compound 27 can be coupled with the penultimate peptide to form an omega halo acyl moiety at the N-terminus of the penultimate peptide. Because the omega halo carboxylic acid compound 27 does not contain an amino moiety on its side chain, protection and spurious peptide formation are of less concern. In this alternative, the amino moiety can undergo nucleophilic reaction with the omega halo group of the acylated penultimate peptide as described above for formation of the compounds of Formulas I-V. The desired peptide having a residue of a compound of Formula I-V at its N-terminus is produced. In this alternative, appropriate protection of carboxyl and amino side chains and appropriate protection of the C-terminus may be employed to prevent undesirable reactions of these groups.
    • Peptide Synthesis and Purification
  • The invention includes the truncated and extended peptides which contain as their N-terminus moiety the residue of the compound of Formula I, II, III, IV or V. These peptides can be synthesized by the Merrifield solid phase method, which is an established method for preparing peptides to those skilled in the art. See R. B. Merrifield, Science, 232, 341-347 (1986), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference for an explanation of, and conditions for the Merrifield solid phase peptide synthesis. Alternatively, the peptide minus the N-terminal amino acid unit, or penultimate peptide, can be expressed recombinantly by known biological methods and the desamino amino acid compounds of Formula I-V can be added as the N-terminus by enzymatic condensation using an aminopeptidase. See “Enzyme Structure and Mechanism,” Alan Fersht, W. H. Freeman, New York, N.Y. (1985), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, for an explanation of, and conditions for, recombinant expression of peptides. The Formulas I-V compounds can be appropriately protected at the side chain amino group with standard protecting groups. In a preferred embodiment, the protecting groups are BOC and/or FMOC.
  • Briefly, for a solid phase synthesis, the penultimate peptide can be produced in bulk and then coupled to any of the Formula I-V compounds using the protection and coupling techniques of the Merrifield solid phase synthesis. Starting with an appropriate anchor resin designed for amino group exposure, the carboxy terminus amino acid unit of the peptide having an amino protecting group such as an FMOC group is anchored to the resin through a selectively cleavable carboxyl coupling link. The amino group of the anchored carboxy terminus unit is then deprotected and the additional amino protected amino acid units are then sequentially coupled in proper sequence. Each coupling step will involve deprotection of the protected amino group of the anchored peptide chain followed by peptide condensation between that unprotected amino group and the carboxyl group of the next amino acid unit. The condensation can be facilely obtained by carbodiimide coupling, by Schotten Bauman reaction or by activated acyl group condensation. These condensation reactions are described in “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, cited above. Protection of amine and carboxyl side chains using appropriate protecting groups that differ from the protecting groups of the alpha amino group entering into the peptide condensation will enable selective peptide condensation of the sequential amino acid units. Selection of appropriate protection groups and conditions for solid phase peptide synthesis are described in the Merrifield reference, cited above.
  • The penultimate peptides may also be produced by recombinant expression. This biological method involves re-engineering a microbe to express the penultimate peptide. A DNA segment encoding the penultimate peptide sequence can be inserted in proper reading from into a plasmid or other vector capable of causing microbial expression of the DNA. The vector will also contain appropriate control, promoter and selection DNA segments. Upon insertion into a microbe such as E. coli or B. subtilus, the microbe mixture can be selected for appropriate transfection by treatment with the corresponding selection agent. Typically the agent will be an antibiotic and the vector will contain a sequence encoding the corresponding detoxifying enzyme for the antibiotic. Chloramphenacol and penicillin are two of such agents. Culturing the transfected microbe and harvesting the expressed peptide as either secreted material of the culture medium or by lysing the microbe cells will provide the crude penultimate peptide. The penultimate peptide may be purified by known techniques such as lyophilization, chromatography and the like. These recombinant techniques for peptide expression are fully set forth in “Cold Spring Harbor—Current Protocols in Molecular Biology,” Wiley Interscience, Cold Spring Harbor (2003), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • An example of the solid phase peptide production is provided by the development of a set of neurotensin (8-13) compounds (NT peptide). These compounds incorporate the desamino amino acid compounds of Formulas I-V as their N-termini. They are a novel class of antipsychotic drugs, the biological study and background of which are described in the sections below.
    • NT Peptide Synthesis—General
  • The penultimate sequence of the peptide, NT(9-13), can be synthesized in bulk using p-alkoxybenzyl alcohol solid phase methodology (65) and stored in the fully protected form.
  • Starting Materials. P-alkoxybenzyl alcohol resin-bound Nα-Fmoc-leucine, Nα-Fmoc-isoleucine, Nα-Fmoc-tert-leucine, Nα-Fmoc-(But)-tyrosine, Nα-Fmoc-(Boc)-tryptophan, Nα-Fmoc-proline, and Nα-Fmoc-(Pbf)-arginine were purchased from Advanced Chemtech (Louisville, Ky.). PyBOP® was purchased from Novabiochem (San Diego, Calif.). N-hydroxybenzoriazole (HOBt), anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA), triisopropylsilane (TIS), and trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) were purchased from Aldrich (Milwaukee, Wis.). Non-natural amino acid analogues were used as prepared. Abbreviations. Fmoc, fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl; NH3, ammonia; NH2CH3, methylamine; NH(CH3)2, dimethylamine; N(CH3)3, trimethylamine; EtOH, ethanol.
  • Briefly, resin-bound Nα-Fmoc-leucine can be swelled in DMF prior to Fmoc cleavage with piperidine (20% in DMF). The piperidine solution can be removed with vacuum filtration and the resin-bound amino acid washed with DMF and CH2Cl2. Amino acids (4 eq) can be activated in DMF with HOBt (4 eq), PyBOP (4 eq), and DIPEA (10 eq) and added directly to the peptide reaction vessel. The amino acid couplings can be conducted for approximately 6 hr, the resin washed with DMF and CH2Cl2 and monitored with the Kaiser test (66) for the presence of free amines. Residues can be recoupled when necessary.
  • This procedure was repeated with subsequent amino acids to give the penultimate peptide sequence. Aliquots of the resin-bound pentamer can then be coupled as described above with the Formula I-V compounds to give the desired peptides. Acid-catalyzed deprotection can be performed with a TFA solution containing appropriate scavengers and crude peptides can be precipitated in ice-cold ether.
    • Peptide Purification—General
  • Reverse phase high pressure liquid chromatography can be used to purify the foregoing crude peptides. For example, a Waters dual pump system in combination with a Waters C18 radial compression column can be used for this purpose. Effluent can be monitored by UV absorbance at 280 nm.
    • Screening of Non-Natural Amino Acid-containing Peptides
  • The invention provides a method for screening a peptide for an activity or pharmacological activity. The method includes the steps of: a) measuring an activity or pharmacological activity of a peptide having a selected natural amino acid sequence, and b) measuring the same activity or pharmacological activity of an extended or truncated peptide based upon the same amino acid sequence as the foregoing peptide wherein the N-terminus is a non-natural amino acid having the formula I-V, described above; and c) comparing the measured activity or pharmacological activity of the peptides from steps a) and b) to determine whether the peptide of step b) has the desired activity or pharmacological activity.
  • The activities for which the present invention screens can include any activity associated with a biologically active peptide or peptidomimetic. The following is a partial list of the many activities that can be determined in the present screening method:
  • 1. Receptor agonist/antagonist activity: A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: “The RBI Handbook of Receptor Classification and Signal Transduction” K. J. Watling, J. W. Kebebian, J. L. Neumeyer, eds. Research Biochemicals International, Natick, Mass., 1995, and references therein. Methods of analysis can be found in: T. Kenakin “Pharmacologic Analysis of Drug-Receptor Interactions” 2nd Ed. Raven Press, New York, 1993, and references therein.
  • 2. Enzyme inhibition: A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: H. Zollner “Handbook of Enzyme Inhibitors”, 2nd Ed. VCH Weinheim, FRG, 1989, and references therein.
  • 3. Central nervous system, autonomic nervous system (cardiovascular and gastrointestinal tract), antihistaminic, anti-inflammatory, anaesthetic, cytotoxic, and antifertility activities: A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: E. B. Thompson, “Drug Bioscreening: Drug Evaluation Techniques in Pharmacology”, VCH Publishers, New York, 1990, and references therein.
  • 4. Anticancer activities: A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: I. J. Fidler and R. J. White “Design of Models for Testing Cancer Therapeutic Agents”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1982, and references therein.
  • 5. Antibiotic and antiviral (especially anti-HIV) activities: A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: “antibiotics in Laboratory Medicine”, 3rd Ed., V. Lorian, ed. Williams and Wilkens, Baltimore, 1991, and references therein. A compendia of anti-HIV screens for measuring these activities can be found in: “HIV Volume 2: Biochemistry, Molecular Biology and Drug Discovery”, J. Karn, ed., IRL Press, Oxford, 1995, and references therein.
  • 6. Immunomodulatory activity: A compendia of examples of specific screens for measuring these activities can be found in: V. St. Georgiev (1990) “Immunomodulatory Activity of Small Peptides” Trends Pharm. Sci. 11, 373-378.
  • 7. Pharmacokinetic properties: The pharmacological activities assayed in the screening method include half-life, solubility, or stability, among others. For example, methods of analysis and measurement of pharmacokinetic properties can be found in: J.-P. Labaune “Handbook of Pharmacokinetics: Toxicity Assessment of Chemicals”, Ellis Horwood Ltd., Chichester, 1989, and references therein.
  • In the screening method, the peptide of step a) can consist of natural amino acids. Alternatively, the peptide of step a) can contain mostly natural amino acids, but also contain one or a small number of non-natural amino acids. Such a peptide is considered to consist essentially of natural amino acids.
  • In the screening method, the peptide of step b) will be the truncated or extended peptide of the invention as described above. In one embodiment, the structures of the non-natural amino acids of formulas I-V will be similar to those of the naturally occurring amino acids, lysine and arginine.
  • Thus, in the screening method contemplated herein, any extended or truncated peptide can be compared to any peptide having the same downstream sequence and having a known activity or pharmacological activity to determine whether or not the extended or truncated peptide has the same or similar activity or pharmacological activity at the same or different level. Depending on the specifics of how the measuring step is carried out, the present screening method can also be used to detect an activity or pharmacological activity exhibited by the extended or truncated peptide. Also, the screening method can be used to detect and measure qualitative and quantitative differences in the same or similar activity or pharmacological activity.
  • Thus, the methods of the present invention provide evaluation of the alteration of activity of the extended or truncated peptide. Typically, the hydrophobicity of the peptide is increased, which can result indirectly in increased binding activity when the desamino amino acid moiety is involved in binding (e.g., receptor-ligand binding, enzyme-cofactor binding, enzyme-substrate binding) and since binding strength is correlated with activity, a peptide higher potency (higher measured activity level) can result.
  • Furthermore, the desamino amino acids of the present invention also can enhance or increase the pharmacological activity of a peptide. For example, because the desamino amino acids are more hydrophobic (i.e., more lipophilic), a peptide containing a non-natural amino acid is more able to pass a body barrier (e.g., blood brain, blood ocular, skin, intestinal epithelium). Additionally, because the desamino amino acids impart increased selectivity and stability to a peptide, the pharmacological activity can also be screened when compared to other peptides.
    • Treatment
  • The invention further relates to a method of treating or preventing in a subject a malcondition comprising administering to the subject an extended or truncated peptide having as its N-terminus an amino acid having the formula I-V. The basis peptide from which the extended or truncated peptide is formed will have or will be believed to have a biochemical, physiological, pharmacological or biological relationship with the malcondition to be treated or prevented. The malcondition may be a disease, biological or organic disfunction or an undesirable biological condition that is not ordinarily regarded as a disease or disfunction, such as but not limited to cosmetic malconditions such as skin blotches, acne, and the like. The subject may be a medical or veterinary patient including mammals such as humans, and non-humans mammamls such as dogs, cats, cows, sheep, pigs as well as avian.
  • In the method of the present invention, the malconditions that can be treated or prevented and the peptides that can be used are numerous. For example, a neurotensin peptide analogue that incorporates a non-natural amino acid of the invention can be synthesized. Such a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be used to treat obesity, diabetes, sexual dysfunction, Parkingson's disease, atherosclerosis, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, hypercholesterolemia, or hypertrigylceridemia. A synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used to induce vasodilation, muscle relaxation, or to decrease appetite.
  • In addition, a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be used to treat hyperthermia; hypothermia; gastrointestinal ulcers; substance abuse; depression; Alzheimer's disease; tardive dyskinesia; panic attack; gastrointestinal reflux disorder; irritable bowel syndrome; diarrhea; cholic; dyspepsia; pancreatitis; esophagitis; gastroparesis; neurological diseases such as schizophrenia, psychoses, anxiety, manic depression, delirium dementia, severe mental retardation, and dyskinesias such as Huntington's disease and Tourett's syndrome; fungal and viral infections, including HIV-1 and HIV-2 infections; pain (i.e., an analgesic); cancer (including gastrointesitinal tumors); anorexia; bulimia; asthma; Parkinson's disease; acute heart failure; hypotension; hypertension; urinary retention; osteoporosis; angina pectoris; myocardial infarction; allergies; inflammation; or benign prostatic hypertrophy.
  • The methods of treatment of the present invention can also include combination therapy where other pharmaceutically active compounds useful for the treatment of obesity or other diseases are used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention.
  • It is known that obese patients have higher incidences of certain diseases such as atherosclerosis, hypercholesterolemia, hypertrigylceridemia, hypertension, sexual dysfunction (including erectile dysfunction), insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, diabetes, [particularly non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM or Type 2 diabetes)] and the diseases associated with diabetes such as nephropathy, neuropathy, retinopathy, cardiomyopathy, cataracts, and polycystic ovary syndrome. These diseases can be treated indirectly by treating obesity using a synthetic NT peptide of the invention or directly by treating the specific disease itself using a synthetic NT peptide of the invention. These diseases can be treated in the absence of obesity using a synthetic NT peptide of the invention.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, an obese patient or a patient at risk of becoming obese can be administered a combination of: 1) a synthetic NT peptide of the invention; and 2) an additional compound useful to treat obesity, diabetes [including (NIDDM) and the conditions and/or diseases associated with diabetes, such as nephropathy, neuropathy, retinopathy, cardiomyopathy, cataracts, and polycystic ovary syndrome], atherosclerosis, hypercholesterolemia, hypertrigylceridemia, sexual dysfunction (including erectile dysfunction), insulin resistance, or impaired glucose tolerance, or combinations of compounds useful to treat these diseases.
  • Examples of classes of compounds that can be used to treat obesity include the active compound(s) in appetite suppressants such as Adipex®, Bontril®, Desoxyn Gradumet®, Fastin®, Ionamin®, and Meridia®, and lipase inhibitors such as Xenical®. Additional anti-obesity agents that can be used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention include a β3-adrenergic receptor agonist, a cholecystokinin-A agonist, a monoamine reuptake inhibitor, a sympathomimetic agent, a serotoninergic agent, a dopamine agonist, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor agonist or mimetic, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor analog, a cannabinoid receptor antagonist, a melanin concentrating hormone antagonist, leptin, a leptin analog, a leptin receptor agonist, a galanin antagonist, a bombesin agonist, a neuropeptide-Y antagonist (including NPY-1 and NPY-5), a thyromimetic agent, dehydroepiandrosterone or an analog thereof, a glucocorticoid receptor agonist or antagonist, an orexin receptor antagonist, a urocortin binding protein antagonist, a glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonist, and a ciliary neurotrophic factor.
  • In another aspect of the invention, a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be administered in combination with a compound that is known to treat hypertension. Examples of classes of compounds that can be used to treat hypertension include calcium blockers, ACE inhibitors, diuretics, angiotensin II receptor blockers, .beta.-blockers, and alpha.-adrenergic blockers. In addition, combinations of compounds in the above-recited classes have been used to treat hypertension. Some examples of specific compounds that can be used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention include quinapril; amlodipine, including the besylate salt; nifedipine; doxazosin, including the mesylate salt; and prazosin, including the hydrochloride salt.
  • In another aspect, a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be used in combination with compounds useful for the treatment of diabetes, including impaired glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (Type 1) and non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM or Type 2). Also intended to be encompassed in the treatment of diabetes are the diabetic complications, such as neuropathy, nephropathy, retinopathy, cardiomyopathy or cataracts.
  • A synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used in combination with an aldose reductase inhibitor. Aldose reductase inhibitors constitute a class of compounds that have become widely known for their utility in treating conditions arising from complications of diabetes, such as diabetic neuropathy and nephropathy. Such compounds are well known to those skilled in the art and are readily identified by standard biological tests.
  • A synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used in combination with a sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitor. Sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitors lower fructose levels and have been used to treat or prevent diabetic complications such as neuropathy, retinopathy, nephropathy, cardiomyopathy, microangiopathy, and macroangiopathy.
  • A synthetic NT peptide of the invention can also be used in combination with a glucocorticoid receptor antagonist. The glucocorticoid receptor (GR) is present in glucocorticoid responsive cells where it resides in the cytosol in an inactive state until it is stimulated by an agonist. Upon stimulation the glucocorticoid receptor translocates to the cell nucleus where it specifically interacts with DNA and/or protein(s) and regulates transcription in a glucocorticoid responsive manner. GR antagonists can be used in the treatment of diseases associated with an excess or a deficiency of glucocorticoids in the body. As such, they may be used to treat the following: obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, hypertension, Syndrome X, depression, anxiety, glaucoma, human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) or acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS), neurodegeneration (for example, Alzheimer's and Parkinson's), cognition enhancement, Cushing's Syndrome, Addison's Disease, osteoporosis, frailty, inflammatory diseases (such as osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, asthma and rhinitis), adrenal dysfunction, viral infection, immunodeficiency, immunomodulation, autoimmune diseases, allergies, wound healing, compulsive behavior, multi-drug resistance, addiction, psychosis, anorexia, cachexia, post-traumatic stress syndrome, post-surgical bone fracture, medical catabolism and prevention of muscle frailty.
  • In addition, a synthetic NT peptide of the invention can be administered in combination with other pharmaceutical agents such as cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitors and cholesterol absorption inhibitors, especially HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and HMG-CoA synthase inhibitors, HMG-CoA reductase and synthase gene expression inhibitors, CETP inhibitors, bile acid sequesterants, fibrates, ACAT inhibitors, squalene synthetase inhibitors, anti-oxidants and niacin. A a synthetic NT peptide of the invention may also be administered in combination with naturally occurring compounds that act to lower plasma cholesterol levels. These naturally occurring compounds are commonly called nutraceuticals and include, for example, garlic extract, Benecol®, and niacin.
  • It is also contemplated that a synthetic NT peptide of the invention be administered with a lipase inhibitor and/or a glucosidase inhibitor, which are typically used in the treatment of conditions resulting from the presence of excess triglycerides, free fatty acids, cholesterol, cholesterol esters or glucose including, inter alia, obesity, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, Syndrome X, and the like.
  • Any lipase inhibitor or glucosidase inhibitor may be used in a combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention. Preferred lipase inhibitors comprise gastric or pancreatic lipase inhibitors such as orlistat. Preferred glucosidase inhibitors comprise amylase inhibitors. A lipase inhibitor is a compound that inhibits the metabolic cleavage of dietary triglycerides into free fatty acids and monoglycerides. Under normal physiological conditions, lipolysis occurs via a two-step process that involves acylation of an activated serine moiety of the lipase enzyme. This leads to the production of a fatty acid-lipase hemiacetal intermediate, which is then cleaved to release a diglyceride. Following further deacylation, the lipase-fatty acid intermediate is cleaved, resulting in free lipase, a monoglyceride and a fatty acid. The resultant free fatty acids and monoglycerides are incorporated into bile acid-phospholipid micelles, which are subsequently absorbed at the level of the brush border of the small intestine. The micelles eventually enter the peripheral circulation as chylomicrons. Accordingly, compounds, including lipase inhibitors that selectively limit or inhibit the absorption of ingested fat precursors are useful in the treatment of conditions including obesity, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, Syndrome X, and the like. A variety of lipase inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Any glucosidase inhibitor may be used in combination with a synthetic NT peptide of the invention, however, a generally preferred glucosidase inhibitor is an amylase inhibitor. An amylase inhibitor is a glucosidase inhibitor that inhibits the enzymatic degradation of starch or glycogen into maltose. The inhibition of such enzymatic degradation is beneficial in reducing amounts of bioavailable sugars, including glucose and maltose, and the concomitant deleterious conditions resulting therefrom. Glucosidase and amylase inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • In addition, the present invention includes the use of a synthetic NT peptide of the invention in combination with apo B secretion/MTP inhibitors. A variety of apo B secretion/MTP inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art. A synthetic NT peptide of the invention also can be used in combination with one or more additional compounds that are neurotensin receptor ligands.
  • Non-natural amino acids of the invention can also be incorporated into other peptides to treat malconditions as set out below.
  • Peptides for triggering B and T cell activity can be used to treat autoimmune disease, including uveitis, collagen-induced, adjuvant and rheumatoid arthritis, thyroiditis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis and diabetes. Examples of these peptides are interleukins (referenced in Aulitzky, WE; Schuler, M; Peschel, C.; Huber, C.; Interleukins. Clinical pharmacology and therapeutic use. Drugs. 48(5):667-77, November 1994) and cytokines (referenced in Peters, M.; Actions of cytokines on the immune response and viral interactions: an overview. Hepatology. 23(4):909-16, April 1996).
  • Enkephlin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat AIDS, ARC, and cancer, pain modulation, Huntington's, Parkinson's diseases.
  • LHRH and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat prostatic tumors and reproductive physiopathology, including breast cancer, and infertility.
  • Peptides and peptidomimetics that target crucial enzymes, oncogenes or oncogene products, tumor-suppressor genes and their products, growth factors and their corresponding receptors can be used to treat cancer. Examples of these peptides are described in Unger, C. Current concepts of treatment in medical oncology: new anticancer drugs. Journal of Cancer Research & Clinical Oncology. 122(4):189-98, 1996.
  • Neuropeptide Y and other pancreatic polypeptides, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat stress, anxiety, depression and associated vasoconstrictive activities.
  • Gluco-incretins, including gastric inhibitory polypeptide, glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide, PACAP/Glucagon and glucagon-like polypeptide-1 and 2 and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat Type II diabetic hyperglycaemia.
  • Atrial natriuretic factor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat congestive heart failure.
  • Integrin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat osteoporosis, scar formation, bone synthesis, inhibition of vascular occlusion, and inhibition of tumor invasion and metastasis.
  • Glucagon, glucagon-like peptide 1, PACAP/Glucagon, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diabetes cardiovascular emergencies.
  • Antithrombotic peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovascular and cerebrovascular diseases. Examples of these peptides RGD, D-Phe-Pro-Arg and others named are described in Ojima I.; Chakravarty S.; Dong Q. Antithrombotic agents: from RGD to peptide mimetics. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry. 3(4):337-60, 1995.
  • Cytokines/interleukins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat inflammatory disease, immune response dysfunction, hematopoiesis, mycosis fungoides, aplastic anemia, thrombocytopenia, and malignant melanoma. Examples of these peptides are Interleukins, referenced in Aulitzky et al. and Peters et al.
  • Endothelin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat arterial hypertension, myocardial infarction, congestive heart failure, atherosclerosis, shock conditions, renal failure, asthma and vasospasm Natriuretic hormones and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovasicular disease and acute renal failure. Examples of these peptides are named and described in Espiner, E. A;. Richards, A. M.; Yandle, T. G.; Nicholls, M. G.; Natriuretic hormones. Endocrinology & Metabolism Clinics of North America. 24(3):481-509, 1995.
  • Peptides that activate or inhibit tyrosine kinase, or bind to TK-activating or inhibiting peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat chronic myelogenous and acute lymphocytic leukemias, breast and ovarian cancers and other tyrosine kinase associated diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Smithgall, TE.; SH2 and SH3 domains: potential targets for anti-cancer drug design. Journal of Pharmacological & Toxicological Methods. 34(3):125-32, 1995.
  • Renin inhibitors analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovascular disease, including hypertension and congestive heart failure. Examples of these peptides are described in Rosenberg, S. H.; Renin inhibition. Cardiovascular Drugs & Therapy. 9(5):645-55, 1995.
  • Angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cardiovascular disease, including hypertension and congestive heart failure.
  • Peptides that activate or inhibit tyrosine phosphorylases can be used to treat cardiovascular diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Srivastava, A. K.; Protein tyrosine phosphorylation in cardiovascular system. Molecular & Cellular Biochemistry. 149-150:87-94, 1995.
  • Peptide based antivirals can be used to treat viral diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Toes, R. E.; Feltkamp, M. C.; Ressing, M. E.; Vierboom, M. P.; Blom, R. J.; Brandt, R. M; Hartman, M.; Offringa, R.; Melief, C. J.; Kast, W. M.; Cellular immunity against DNA tumour viruses: possibilities for peptide-based vaccines and immune escape. Biochemical Society Transactions. 23(3):692-6, 1995.
  • Corticotropin releasing factor and peptide analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat disease associated with high CRF, i.e Alzheimer's disease, anorexia nervosa, depressive disorders, arthritis, and multiple sclerosis.
  • Peptide agonists and antagonists of platelet-derived wound-healing formula (PDWHF) can be used as a therapy for donor tissue limitations and wound-healing constraints in surgery. Examples of these peptides are described in Rudkin, G. H.; Miller, T. A.; Growth factors in surgery. Plastic & Reconstructive Surgery. 97(2):469-76, 1996.
  • Fibronectin, fibrinopeptide inhibitors and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat metastasis (i.e. enzyme inhibition, tumor cell migration, invasion, and metastasis).
  • Chemokine (types of cytokine, including interleukin-8, RANTES, and monocyte chemotactic peptide) analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat arthritis, hypersensitivity, angiogenesis, renal disease, glomerulonephritis, inflammation, and hematopoiesis.
  • Neutral endopeptidase inhibitors and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat hypertension and inflammation. Examples of these peptides are described in Gregoire, J. R; Sheps, S. G; Newer antihypertensive drugs. Current Opinion in Cardiology. 10(5):445-9, 1995.
  • Substance P and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat immune system dysfunction, pain transmission/perception and in autonomic reflexes and behaviors.
  • Alpha-melanocyte-stimulating hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat AIDS, rheumatoid arthritis, and myocardial infarction.
  • Bradykinin (BK) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat inflammatory diseases (edema, etc), asthma, allergic reactions (rhinitis, etc), anesthetic uses, and septic shock.
  • Secretin can be used to treat cardiovascular emergencies.
  • GnRH and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat hormone-dependent breast and prostate tumors.
  • Somatostatin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat gut neuroendocrine tumors.
  • Gastrin, Gastrin Releasing Peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as an adjuvant to chemotherapy or surgery in small cell lung cancer and other malignancies, or to treat allergic respiratory diseases, asthma and allergic rhinitis.
  • Laminin, the Laminin derivative antimetastatic drug YIGSR peptide, Laminin-derived synthetic peptides analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat tumor cell growth, angiogenesis, regeneration studies, vascularization of the eye with diabetes, and ischemia. The peptides of this category can inhibit the tumor growth and metastasis of leukemic cells and may be useful as a potential therapeutic reagent for leukaemic infiltrations. Peptides containing this sequence also inhibit experimental metastasis. Exemplary references include McGowan K A. Marinkovich M P. Laminins and human disease. Microscopy Research & Technique. 51(3):262-79, Nov. 1, 2000; Yoshida N. Ishii E. Nomizu M. Yamada Y. Mohri S. Kinukawa N. Matsuzaki A. Oshima K. Hara T. Miyazaki S. The laminin-derived peptide YIGSR (Tyr-Ile-Gly-Ser-Arg) inhibits human pre-B leukaemic cell growth and dissemination to organs in SCID mice. British Journal of Cancer. 80(12): 1898-904, 1999. Examples of these peptides are also described in Kleinman, H. K.; Weeks, B. S.; Schnaper, H. W.; Kibbey, M. C.; Yamamura, K.; Grant, D. S; The laminins: a family of basement membrane glycoproteins important in cell differentiation and tumor metastases. Vitamins & Hormones. 47:161-86, 1993.
  • Defensins, corticostatins, dermaseptins, mangainins, and other antibiotic (antibacterial and antimicrobial) peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat infections, tissue inflammation and endocrine regulation.
  • Vasopressin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, stress and Diabetes insipidus.
  • Oxytocin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders and to induce labor.
  • ACTH-related peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as neurotrophic, neuroprotective, and peripheral demyelinating neuropathy agents.
  • Amyloid-beta peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat Alzheimer's disease.
  • Epidermal growth factor, receptor, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat necrotizing enterocolitis, Zollinger-Ellison syndrome, gastrointestinal ulceration, colitis, and congenital microvillus atrophycarcinomas.
  • Leukocyte adhesion molecules and their ligands, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat atherosclerosis, inflammation. Examples of these peptides are described in Barker, J. N.; Adhesion molecules in cutaneous inflammation. Ciba Foundation Symposium. 189:91-101.
  • Major histocompatibility complex (MHC) binding peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat autoimmune, immunodysfunctional, immuno modulatory diseases and as well as used for their corresponding therapies. Examples of these peptides are described in Appella, E.; Padlan, E. A.; Hunt, D. F; Analysis of the structure of naturally processed peptides bound by class I and class II major histocompatibility complex molecules. EXS. 73:105-19, 1995.
  • Corticotropin releasing factor can be used to treat neurological disorders.
  • Neurotrophins (including brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF), nerve growth factor, and neurotrophin 3) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders.
  • Cytotoxic T-cell activating peptides can be used to treat infectious diseases and cancer. Examples of these peptides are described in: Chesnut R. W.; Sette, A.; Celis, E.; Wentworth, P.; Kubo, R. T.; Alexander, J.; Ishioka, G.; Vitiello, A.; Grey, H. M; Design and testing of peptide-based cytotoxic T-cell-mediated immunotherapeutics to treat infectious diseases and cancer. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology. 6:847-74, 1995.
  • Peptide immunogens for prevention of HIV-1 and HTLV-I retroviral infections can be used to treat AIDS. Examples of these peptides are described in Hart, M. K.; Palker, T. J.; Haynes, B F; Design of experimental synthetic peptide immunogens for prevention of HIV-1 and HTLV-I retroviral infections. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology. 6:821-45, 1995.
  • Galanin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat Alzheimer's disease, depression, eating disorders, chronic pain, prevention of ischemic damage, and growth hormone modulation.
  • Tachykinins (neurokinin A and neurokinin B) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat pain transmission/perception and in autonomic reflexes and behaviors.
  • RGD containing peptides can be used to treat various diseases involved with cell adhesion, antithrombotics, and acute renal failure.
  • Osteogenic growth peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as treatment of systemic bone loss. Examples of these peptides are described in Bab IA. Regulatory role of osteogenic growth peptide in proliferation, osteogenesis, and hemopoiesis. Clinical Orthopaedics & Related Research. (313):64-8, 1995.
  • Parathyroid hormone, parathyroid hormone related-peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diseases affecting calcium homeostasis (hypercalcemia), bone metabolism, vascular disease, and atherosclerosis.
  • Kallidin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat tissue injury or inflammation and pain signaling pathological conditions of the CNS.
  • T cell receptor peptide vaccines and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used in immunotherapy. Examples of these peptides are described in Brostoff, S W; T cell receptor peptide vaccines as immunotherapy. Agents & Actions—Supplements. 47:53-8, 1995.
  • Platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat non-neoplastic hyperproliferative disorders, therapy for donor tissue limitations and wound-healing constraints in surgery.
  • Amylin, calcitonin gene related peptides (CGRP) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat insulin-dependent diabetes.
  • Vasoactive intestinal polypeptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat allergic respiratory diseases, asthma and allergic rhinitis, and nervous control of reproductive functions.
  • Growth hormone-releasing hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat growth hormone deficiency and immunomodulation.
  • HIV protease inhibiting peptides can be used to treat AIDS. Examples of these peptides are described in Bugelski, P. J.; Kirsh, R.; Hart, T. K; HIV protease inhibitors: effects on viral maturation and physiologic function in macrophages. Journal of Leukocyte Biology. 56(3):374-80, 1994.
  • Thymopoietin active fragment peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat rheumatoid arthritis and virus infections.
  • Cecropins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as antibacterials.
  • Thyroid releasing hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat spinal cord injury and shock.
  • Erythropoietin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat anemia.
  • Fibroblast growth factor (FGF), receptor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be as stimulation of bone formation, as well as used as a treatment for Kaposi's sarcoma, neuron regeneration, prostate growth, tumor growth inhibition, and angiogenesis.
  • Stem cell factor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat anemias.
  • GP120, GP160, CD4 fragment peptides and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat AIDS.
  • Insulin-like growth factor, receptor, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat breast and other cancers, noninsulin-dependen diabetest mellitus, cell proliferation, apoptosis, hematopoiesis, AIDS, growth disorders, osteoporosis,and insulin resistance.
  • Colony stimulating factors (granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor, and macrophage colony-stimulating factor and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat anemias.
  • Kentsin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for immunomodulation.
  • Lymphocyte activating peptide and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for immunomodulation. Examples of these peptides are described in Loleit, M.; Deres, K.; Wiesmuller, K. H.; Jung, G.; Eckert, M.; Bessler, W. G; Biological activity of the Escherichia coli lipoprotein: detection of novel lymphocyte activating peptide segments of the molecule and their conformational characterization. Biological Chemistry Hoppe-Seyler. 375(6):407-12, June 1994.
  • Tuftsin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for immunomodulation.
  • Prolactin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat rheumatic diseases, systemic lupus erythematosus, and hyperprolactemia.
  • Angiotensin II and receptor(s) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat hypertension, hemodynamic regulation, neurological disorders, diabetic nephropathies, aortoarterities induced RVH, hyperaldosteronism, heavy metal induced cardiovascular effects, diabetes mellitus and thyroid dysfunction.
  • Dynorphin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, pain management, algesia, spinal cord injury and epilepsy.
  • Calcitonin, and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, immune system dysfunction, calcium homeostasis, and osteoporosis.
  • Pituitary adenylate cyclase activating polypeptide can play a role in growth, signal transduction vasoactivity roles, exact role in diseases not determined yet.
  • Cholecystokinin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat feeding disorders, panic disorders, and anti-opioid properties.
  • Pepstatin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as pepsin and HIV protease inhibitors (AIDS).
  • Bestatin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat muscular dystrophy, anticancer, antileukemia, immune response modulator, and acute non-lymphocytic leukemia.
  • Leupeptin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as a protease inhibitor, exact role in diseases not determined yet.
  • Luteinizing hormone and releasing hormone and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as a infertility male contraceptive.
  • Neurotensin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used, e.g., as antipsychotic, analgesic, anti-cancer, and/or neuroprotective agents, e.g., for treating stroke victims, e.g., by inducing hypothermia so as to provide neuroprotection.
  • Motilin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for the control of gastric emptying.
  • Insulin and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diabetes.
  • Transforming growth factor (TGF) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used for cell proliferation and differentiation, cancer treatment, immunoregulation, therapy for donor tissue limitations, and wound-healing constraints in surgery.
  • Bone morphogenetic proteins (BMPs) and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used as therapy for donor tissue limitations, osteogenesis, and wound-healing constraints in surgery.
  • Bombesin and Enterostatin as well as their analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to prevent the proliferation of tumor cells, modulation of feeding, and neuroendocrine functions. These peptides fall within a supercategory of the neuromedins described above. These peptides are described in such exemplary references as Yamada K. Wada E. Wada K. Bombesin-like peptides: studies on food intake and social behaviour with receptor knock-out mice. Annals of Medicine. 32(8):519-29, November 2000; Ohki-Hamazaki H. Neuromedin B. Progress in Neurobiology. 62(3):297-312, October 2000; Still CD. Future trends in weight management. Journal of the American Osteopathic Association. 99(10 Su Pt 2):S18-9, 1999; Martinez V. Tache Y. Bombesin and the brain-gut axis. Peptides. 21(11):1617-25, 2000; Afferent signals regulating food intake. Proceedings of the Nutrition Society. 59(3):373-84, 2000; Takenaka Y. Nakamura F. Jinsmaa Y. Lipkowski A W. Yoshikawa M. Enterostatin (VPDPR) has anti-analgesic and anti-amnesic activities. Bioscience Biotechnology & Biochemistry. 65(1):236-8, 2001 J.
  • Glucagon, glucagon-like peptide 1 and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat diabetes cardiovascular emergencies.
  • Pancreastatin, chromogranins A, B and C and analogs, agonists and antagonists—conditions associated with inhibition of insulin secretion, exocrine pancreatic secretion and gastric acid secretion, and stimulation of □egradati secretion.
  • Endorphins and analogs, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, alleviating pain, treatment of opioid abuse, obesity, and diabetes. Examples of these peptides are named and described in Dalayeun, J. F.; Nores, J. M.; Bergal, S.; Physiology of beta-endorphins. A close-up view and a review of the literature. Biomedicine & Pharmacotherapy. 47(8):311-20, 1993.
  • Miscellaneous opioid peptides, including (but not limited to) adrenal peptide E, alpha casein fragment, beta casomorphin, dermorphin, kyotorphin, metophamide neuropeptide FF (NPFF), melanocyte inhibiting factor, and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurological disorders, alleviating pain, as well as for the treatment of opioid abuse.
  • Vasotocin and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for clinical uses to be determined.
  • Protein kinase C and inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat cancer, apoptosis, smooth muscle function, and Alzheimer's disease. Examples of these peptides are named and described in Philip, P. A.; Harris, A. L; Potential for protein kinase C inhibitors in cancer therapy. Cancer Treatment & Research. 78:3-27, 1995.
  • Amyloid, amyloid fibrin, fragments and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurodegenerative diseases and diabetes.
  • Calpain and other calmodulin-inhibitory proteins and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat neurodegenerative disorders, cerebral ischaemia, cataracts, myocardial ischaemia, muscular dystrophy and platelet aggregation.
  • Charybdotoxin, Apamin and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for treatment of neurodegenerative diseases and pain and cerebral ischemia.
  • Phospholipase A2 and receptor inhibiting/activating peptides and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat acute pancreatitis, pancreatic cancer, abdominal trauma, and inflammation, e.g., sepsis, infections, acute pancreatitis, various forms of arthritis, cancer, complications of pregnancy, and postoperative states.
  • Potassium channel activating and inhibiting proteins and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat various diseases. Examples of these peptides are described in Edwards, G.; Weston, A. H; Pharmacology of the potassium channel openers. Cardiovascular Drugs & Therapy. 9 Suppl 2:185-93, March 1995.
  • IgG activators, inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used to treat autoimmune diseases and immune dysfunctions. Examples of these peptides are described in Mouthon, L.; Kaveri, S. V.; Spalter, S. H.; Lacroix-Desmazes, S.; Lefranc, C.; Desai, R.; Kazatchkine, M. D; Mechanisms of action of intravenous immune globulin in immune-mediated diseases. Clinical & Experimental Immunology. 104 Suppl 1:3-9, 1996.
  • Endotoxin and inhibitors and analogues, agonists and antagonists can be used for decreasing cardiac output, systemic hypotension, decreased blood flow and O2 delivery to tissues, intense pulmonary vasoconstriction and hypertension, bronchoconstriction, increased permeability, pulmonary oedema, ventilation-to-perfusion inequalities, hypoxaemia, and haemoconcentration. Examples of these peptides are named and described in Burrell, R; Human responses to bacterial endotoxin. Circulatory Shock. 43(3):137-53, July 1994.
  • Orphan receptor ligands (including but not limited to ADNF, Adrenomedullin, Apelin, Ghrelin, Mastoparan (MCD peptides), Melanin concentrating hormone, Nociceptin/Nocistatin, Orexin, Receptor activity modulating protein, Urotensin). By definition, orphan receptors do not have a function associated with them, but are considered to be key players in future drug development. These orphan receptor ligands are described in such references as In DS. Orphan G protein-coupled receptor s and beyond. Japanese Journal of Pharmacology. 90(2): 101-6, 2002; Maguire J J. Discovering orphan receptor function using human in vitro pharmacology. Current Opinion in Pharmacology. 3(2):135-9, 2003; Szekeres P G. Functional assays for identifying ligands at orphan G protein-coupled receptor s. Receptor s & Channels. 8(5-6):297-308, 2002; Shiau A K. Coward P. Schwarz M. Lehmann J M. Orphan nuclear receptor s: from new ligand discovery technologies to novel signaling pathways. Current Opinion in Drug Discovery & Development. 4(5):575-90, 2001; Civelli O. Nothacker H P. Saito Y. Wang Z. Lin S H. Reinscheid R K. Novel neurotransmitters as natural ligands of orphan G-protein-coupled receptor s. Trends in Neurosciences. 24(4):230-7, 2001; Darland T. Heinricher M M. Grandy D K. Orphan in F Q/nociceptin: a role in pain and analgesia, but so much more. Trends in Neurosciences. 21(5):215-21, 1998, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Another category includes Glycoprotein IIb/IIIa inhibitors. The central role of platelet-rich thrombus in the pathogenesis of acute coronary syndromes (ACSs) is well-known. Glycoprotein IIb/IIIa (Gp IIb/IIIa) receptor antagonists are potent inhibitors of platelet function that may be expected to affect favorably the natural history of ACSs. Exemplary references for this category include Bhatt D L. Topol E J. Current role of platelet glycoprotein IIb/IIIa inhibitors in acute coronary syndromes. JAMA. 284(12):1549-58, 2000; Kereiakes D J. Oral blockade of the platelet glycoprotein IIb/IIIa receptor: fact or fancy?.American Heart Journal. 138(1 Pt 2):S39-46, 1999; Bassand J P. Low-molecular-weight heparin and other antithrombotic agents in the setting of a fast-track revascularization in unstable coronary artery disease. Haemostasis. 30 Suppl 2:114-21; discussion 106-7, 2000.
    • The Use of Peptides Containing Desamino Amino Acid(s) to Pass a Body Barrier
  • The invention relates to a method of increasing the ability of a peptide to cross a body barrier of a subject by use of the extended or truncated peptide having as its N-terminus a residue of the compound formula I-V.
  • The invention further relates to a method of treating or preventing in a subject a disease or condition treated or prevented by the administration of an extended or truncated peptide, whereby the extended or truncated peptide crosses the body barrier in higher amounts than the peptide having no non-natural amino acid.
  • The invention also relates to a method of treating or preventing in a subject a disease or condition of the brain treated or prevented by the administration of an extended or truncated peptide.
  • The use of peptides as therapeutic agents is limited by their inability to cross body barriers. The phrase “body barrier” is defined herein as a cellular membrane or other structure that functions to prevent free (e.g., diffusional) passage of certain molecules. The use of an extended or truncated peptide of the invention facilitates the passage of the resultant peptide through a variety of body barriers. Examples of body barriers include, but are not limited to, the blood brain barrier, a cell membrane, intestinal epithelium, skin cell, or the blood-ocular. In a preferred embodiment, the body barrier is the blood brain barrier.
    • Selectivity and Stability of Peptides Containing Non-Natural Amino Acid(s)
  • Certain embodiments of the invention relate to a method of increasing the selectivity of a chosen peptide through use of an extended or truncated peptide based upon the sequence of the chosen peptide as described above.
  • Enhancing the selectivity of a drug to a biological target is of great importance. In one embodiment, a peptide containing arginine and/or lysine can be converted according to the invention into an extended or truncated peptide in order to increase the selectivity of the peptide. In another embodiment, any of the non-natural amino acids disclosed herein can be used to increase the selectivity of a peptide.
    • Pharmaceutical Composition
  • The peptides of the invention can be used in any therapeutic procedure available to one of skill in the art to treat any disease or physiological problem with which the corresponding known peptide is associated.
  • The peptides of the invention can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a mammalian host, such as a human patient, in a variety of dosage forms adapted to the chosen route of administration, i.e., orally or parenterally, by intravenous, intramuscular, topical or subcutaneous routes.
  • Thus, the peptides may be systemically administered, for example, intravenously or intraperitoneally by infusion or injection. Solutions of the peptide or peptide conjugate can be prepared in water, optionally mixed with a nontoxic surfactant. Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, triacetin, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • The pharmaceutical dosage forms suitable for injection or infusion can include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions or sterile powders comprising the active ingredient(s) that are adapted for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable or infusible solutions or dispersions, optionally encapsulated in liposomes. In all cases, the ultimate dosage form must be sterile, fluid and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage. The liquid carrier or vehicle can be a solvent or liquid dispersion medium comprising, for example, water, ethanol, a polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and the like), vegetable oils, nontoxic glyceryl esters, and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the formation of liposomes, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions or by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, buffers or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the peptide or peptide conjugate in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filter sterilization. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods for preparation of such powders are vacuum drying and freeze drying techniques, which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient present in the previously sterile-filtered solutions.
  • In some instances, the peptides of the invention can also be administered orally, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle such as an inert diluent or an assimilable edible carrier. The peptides may be enclosed in hard or soft shell gelatin capsules, may be compressed into tablets, or may be incorporated directly with the food of the patient's diet. For oral therapeutic administration, the peptide or peptide conjugate may be combined with one or more excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like. Such compositions and preparations should contain at least 0.1% of active compound. The percentage of the compositions and preparations may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 2 to about 60% to about 90% of the weight of a given unit dosage form. The amount of peptide in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that an effective dosage level will be obtained.
  • The tablets, troches, pills, capsules, and the like may also contain the following: binders such as gum tragacanth, acacia, corn starch or gelatin; excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid and the like; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent such as sucrose, fructose, lactose or aspartame or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, oil of wintergreen, or cherry flavoring may be added. When the unit dosage form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier, such as a vegetable oil or a polyethylene glycol. Various other materials may be present as coatings or to otherwise modify the physical form of the solid unit dosage form. For instance, tablets, pills, or capsules may be coated with gelatin, wax, shellac or sugar and the like. A syrup or elixir may contain the active compound, sucrose or fructose as a sweetening agent, methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and flavoring such as cherry or orange flavor. Of course, any material used in preparing any unit dosage form should be pharmaceutically acceptable and substantially non-toxic in the amounts employed. In addition, the peptides of the invention may be incorporated into sustained-release preparations and devices.
  • Useful solid carriers include finely divided solids such as talc, clay, microcrystalline cellulose, silica, alumina and the like. Useful liquid carriers include water, alcohols or glycols or water-alcohol/glycol blends, in which the present compounds can be dissolved or dispersed at effective levels, optionally with the aid of non-toxic surfactants. Adjuvants such as fragrances and additional antimicrobial agents can be added to optimize the properties for a given use.
  • Thickeners such as synthetic polymers, fatty acids, fatty acid salts and esters, fatty alcohols, modified celluloses or modified mineral materials can also be employed with liquid carriers to form spreadable pastes, gels, ointments, soaps, and the like, for application directly to the skin of the user.
  • Useful dosages of the peptides of the invention can be determined by correlating their in vitro activity, and in vivo activity in animal models described herein.
  • The therapeutically effective amount of peptide of the invention necessarily varies with the subject and the disease or physiological problem to be treated and correlates with the effective amounts of the corresponding known peptide. For example, a therapeutic amount between 30 to 112,000 μg per kg of body weight can be effective for intravenous administration. As one skilled in the art would recognize, the amount can be varied depending on the method of administration. The amount of the peptide of the invention, required for use in treatment will also vary with the route of administration, but also the nature of the condition being treated and the age and condition of the patient and will be ultimately at the discretion of the attendant physician or clinician.
  • The compound can conveniently be administered in unit dosage form; for example, containing 1 to 1000 mg, conveniently 10 to 750 mg, most conveniently, 20 to 500 mg of peptide per unit dosage form.
  • Ideally, the peptide should be administered to achieve peak plasma concentrations of from about 0.1 to about 75 μM, preferably, about 1 to 50 μM, most preferably, about 2 to about 30 μM. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of a 0.05 to 5% solution of the peptide, optionally in saline, or orally administered as a bolus containing about 1-100 mg of the peptide. Desirable blood levels may be maintained by continuous infusion to provide about 0.01-5.0 mg/kg/hr or by intermittent infusions containing about 0.4-15 mg/kg of the active ingredient(s).
  • The desired dose may conveniently be presented in a single dose, as divided doses, or as a continuous infusion. The desired dose can also be administered at appropriate intervals, for example, as two, three, four or more sub-doses per day.
    • Cosmetic Formulation
  • An important role for makeup cosmetic is “beautification” or making the appearance more beautiful. Often which role involves correction of skin roughness, blemishes and color as well as vitality.
  • A cosmetic composition of the present invention contains the typical and common base carriers as well as a desamino amino acid compound of the invention. Usually the compound of the invention will be in the form of an ester, amide or salt for this purpose. Generally, the cosmetic base will depend upon the kind of make-up being formulated: face creme, face powder, pancake make-up, skin creme, lip stick, rouge and the like. These bases will contain appropriate, nontoxic colorants, emuliants, oils, waxes, solvents, emulsifiers, fatty acids, alcohols or esters, gums, inorganic inert builders and the like.
  • For example, the gums, may include various known polysaccharide compounds, for example, cellulose, hemicellulose, gum arabic, tragacanth gum, tamarind gum, pectin, starch, mannan, guar gum, locust bean gum, quince seed gum, alginic acid, carrageenan, agar, xanthane gum, dextran, pullulan, chitin, chitosan, hyaluronic acid, chondroitin sulfuric acid, etc., derivatives of polysaccharide compounds, for example, carboxymethylated derivatives, sulfate derivatives, phosphated derivatives, methylated derivatives, ethylated derivatives, addition derivatives of alkylene oxide such as ethylene oxide or propylene oxide, acylated derivatives, cationated derivatives, low molecular weight derivatives, and other polysaccharide derivatives may be mentioned.
  • Another component which may be included in the external composition of the present invention is a powder component. Powder components based on inorganic components such as talc, kaolin, mica, sericite, dolomite, phlogopite, synthetic mica, lepidolite, biotite, lithia mica, vermiculite, magnesium carbonate, calcium carbonate, aluminum silicate, barium silicate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, strontium silicate, metal salts of tungstenic acid, magnesium, silica, zeolite, barium sulfate, sintered calcium sulfate (sintered gypsum), calcium phosphate, fluorapatite, hydroxyapatite, ceramic powder, metal soap (zinc myristate, calcium palmitate, ammonium stearate), boronitride, etc.; and organic powder components such as polyamide resin powder (nylon powder), polyethylene powder, polymethyl methacrylate powder, polystyrene powder, copolymer resin powder of styrene and acrylic acid, benzoguanamine resin powder, silicone resin powder, silicone rubber powder, silicone resin covered rubber powder, polyethylene tetrafluoride powder, cellulose powder, etc. may be mentioned.
  • Further, powder components obtained by treating the surfaces of these powder components by a silicone compound, fluorine-modified silicone compound, fluorine compound, higher aliphatic acid, higher alcohol, aliphatic acid ester, metal soap, alkyl phosphate, etc. may be formulated into the external composition of the present invention depending upon the need.
  • The known dyes or pigments, may be used. For example, inorganic white pigments such as titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, inorganic red pigments such as iron oxide (bengala), iron titanate, inorganic brown pigments such as .gamma.-iron oxide; inorganic yellow pigments such as yellow iron oxide, yellow earth; inorganic black pigments such as black iron oxide, carbon black, lower titanium oxide, and; inorganic violet pigments such as mango violet, cobalt violet; inorganic green pigments such as chromium oxide, chromium hydroxide, cobalt titanate; blue pigments such as prussian blue, ultramarine; pearl pigments such as titanium oxide coated mica, titanium oxide coated bismuth oxichloride, titanium oxide coated talc, colored titanium oxide coated mica, bismuth oxichloride, fish scales; metal powder pigments such as aluminum powder, copper powder; organic pigments of zirconium, barium or aluminum lakes etc. such as Lithol rubine B (Red No. 201), Lithol rubine BCA (Red No. 202), Lake red CBA (Red No. 204), Lithol red (Red No. 205), Deep maroon (Red No. 220), Helidone pink CN (Red No. 226), Permatone Red (Red No. 228), Permanent red F5R (Red No. 405), Permanent orange (Orange No. 203), Benzidine Orange (Orange No. 204), Benzidine yellow G (Yellow No. 205), Hanza Yellow (Yellow No. 401), Blue No. 404, and other organic pigments; Erythrosine (Red No. 3), Phloxine B (Red No. 104), Acid red (Red No. 106), Fast acid magenta (Red No. 227), Eosine YS (Red No. 230), Violamine R (Red No. 401), Oil red XO (Red No. 505), Orange II (Orange No. 205), Tartrazine (Yellow No. 4), Sunset yellow FCF (Yellow No. 5), Uranine (Yellow No. 202), Quinoline yellow (Yellow No. 203), Fast green FCF (Green No. 3), Brilliant blue FCF (Blue No. 1) may be mentioned.
  • The cosmetic composition of the present invention may be formulated with a liquid. As the liquid, it is possible to select a volatile component ordinarily used in external compositions such as cosmetics. Specifically, it is possible to mention, for example, volatile silicone oil, water, or a lower alcohol (or mixtures of the same). These volatile components may be suitably selected depending upon the specific form of the external composition of the present invention (for example, the later mentioned “roughness correcting composition” or “makeup composition” etc.) or type of carrier (for example, oil base or emulsion base etc.). By formulating these volatile components, it is possible to adjust the viscosity of the product at the time of use of the external composition of the present invention and adjust the thickness of coating of the external composition on the skin.
  • As the volatile silicone oil, it is possible to use a volatile silicone oil which is used in the field of cosmetics and other external compositions. It is not particularly limited. Specifically, for example, a low boiling point linear silicone oil such as hexamethyl disiloxane, octamethyl trisiloxane, decamethyl cyclopentasiloxane, dodecamethyl cyclohexasiloxane, and tetradecamethyl cycloheptasiloxane; a low boiling point cyclic silicone oil such as octamethyl cyclotetrasiloxane, decamethyl cyclopentasiloxane, dodecamethyl cyclohexasiloxane, and tetradecamethyl cycloheptasiloxane; etc. may be mentioned.
  • The external composition of the present invention may contain, depending upon the need, the following other components as auxiliary components to an extent not detracting from the desired effect of the present invention.
  • For example, as the oil component, hydrocarbon oils such as liquid paraffin, isoliquid paraffin, squalane, oils and fats such as olive oil, palm oil, coconut oil, macadamia nut oil, jojoba oil; higher alcohols such as isostearyl alcohol; ester oils such as higher aliphatic oils and isopropyl myristate, etc. may be formulated in the external composition of the present invention. Among these oil components, in particular, formulating a polar oil in the external composition of the present invention enables improvement of the stability with the elapse of time.
  • Further, a benzophenon derivative, para-aminobenzoate derivative, para-methoxysuccinate derivative, salicylate derivative, and other UV absorbers; humectants, blood circulation promoters, refrigerants, antiperspirants, bactericides, skin activators, anti-inflammatory agents, vitamins, antioxidants, antioxidant adjuvants, preservatives, flavors and fragrances, etc. may be blended in the external composition of the present invention.
  • The cosmetic formulation of the present invention may be produced in an appropriate medium including but not limited to a paste, a powder, a cake, a creme, an oil, a lotion, a grease, a wax or similar cosmetic bases. The process to produce involves combining the cosmetic ingredients and desamino amino acid compound of any of formulas I-V preferably as the ester, amide or salt. The combination is mixed, kneaded, rolled, ground, heated or otherwise treated to form a substantially homogeneous mass or mixture for use. These steps can be accomplished by use of a kneader, grind wheel, rollers, mixer, heat exchanger, extruder and the like.
  • As explained above, the invention is exemplified by modification of the natural peptide neurotensin. In the following section, the gackground, modification and biological activity of neurotensin and the corresponding peptides of the invention are discussed.
    • Neurotensin Structure and Biology
  • Neurotensin (NT) was first isolated from bovine hypothalami as a hypotensive peptide by Carraway and Leeman in 1973. Since then, NT has been shown to have numerous distinct physiological effects in the central nervous system (CNS) and the periphery. Hypothermia, antinociception, attenuation of d-amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion, and potentiation of barbiturate-induced sedation are promoted by direct injection of NT into the brain. Peripherally, NT acts as a hormone to induce hypotension and decrease gastric acid secretion. Structurally, NT is a linear tridecapeptide with the following sequence: pGlu-Leu-Tyr-Glu-Asn-Lys-Pro-Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-Leu-OH. Early in the history of NT research, it was shown that the C-terminal hexapeptide fragment, Arg8-Arg9-Pro10-Tyr11-Ile12-Leu13 [NT(8-13)], was equipotent at producing the physiological effects of NT in vitro and in vivo.
  • Tanaka and colleagues first identified an NT receptor (NTR1) from rat brain in 1990. Since then, human NTR1 has been successfully cloned and expressed. Both are classic G-protein coupled receptors containing seven transmembrane (7TM) domains and share 84% homology. Second messenger systems, including cGMP production, calcium mobilization, and phosphatidylinositol turnover, are triggered upon NTR1 activation. The mRNA for NTR1 is expressed in both rat and human brain and intestine. A second NT receptor (NTR2) with a substantially lower affinity for NT than NTR1, (Kd=2.5 and 0.5 nM respectively), also has been identified in rat and human brain (23-25). NTR2 is also a 7TM/G-protein coupled receptor, yet has a shorter N-terminal extracellular tail and a longer third intracytoplasmic loop compared to NTR1. A third receptor (NTR3) was cloned from a human brain cDNA library and found to be identical to the previously cloned gp95/sortilin. NTR3 is a non-G-protein coupled sorting protein having only a single transmembrane region.
    • NT as an Endogenous Neuroleptic
  • Several distinct lines of evidence implicate NT in the pathophysiology of schizophrenia. Advances in the dopamine theory of schizophrenia support that a flaw in the convergence of various neural circuits on the mesolimbic dopamine system is responsible for the development of the disorder. The anatomical positioning of the NT system is such that it interacts with the glutaminergic, dopaminergic, GABAergic, and serotonergic systems within the brain. In particular the NT and dopamine systems are closely related within the nucleus accumbens, the area of the brain believed to be responsible for delusions and hallucinations. NTR1 receptors are dense in the ventral tegmental area, a brain region closely associated with the neuronal systems described above. Almost 90% of NT receptors are located on dopaminergic neurons and over 80% of dopamine neurons in the brain express NTR1. Co-localization of the NT system with brain regions implicated in schizophrenia also imply its involvement.
    • Neurotensin and Its Biological Activity
  • Since NT was hypothesized as an “endogenous neuroleptic” and NT(8-13) was identified as its active fragment, efforts have been made to develop NT(8-13) derivatives as potential antipsychotics. Two groups in particular, the Eisai pharmaceutical company (Tokyo, Japan) and the Richelson research group (Mayo Clinic, Jacksonville, Fla.) have prepared numerous derivatives of NT(8-13) analogues that showed promise as antipsychotic drugs. In particular, amino acid substitutions at Arg8, Arg9, Tyr11, and Ile12 have yielded several analogues that are centrally active after peripheral administration.
  • An Eisai compound (the Eisai hexapeptide) was the first NT(8-13) analogue that elicited behavioral effects after peripheral administration. However, the various modifications incorporated in this peptide resulted in a 700-fold loss of binding affinity at NTR1. In addition, this analogue was not able to elicit central activity after oral administration.
  • More recently, NT69L has been developed by the Richelson group as an NT(8-13) analogue that maintains nanomolar binding affinity at NTR1 (Kd=1.55 nM) (55) and exhibits a pronounced hypothermic effect after a 1 mg/kg injection (−5.3° C. at 90 min PI) (41). NT69L also attenuates hyperactivity induced by both cocaine and d-amphetamine. However, tolerance to its hypothermic effect and to its suppression of d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity was observed after chronic administration of the compound. As with the Eisai hexapeptide, NT69L produced only a slight hypothermic response after oral administration.
    • Methods of Preparation of Peptide Analogs
  • An embodiment of the present invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of Formula (XI):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00015
  • or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof, wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue; or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n is 1 to about 10,
  • R1, R2 and R3 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R1, R2 or R3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • the method comprising contacting a compound of Formula (XII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00016
  • wherein Y is a leaving group;
  • with an amine of the formula R1R2R3N, in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XI).
  • An embodiment of the invention also concerns a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (XIII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00017
  • or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
  • wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n is 1 to about 10;
  • R4 and R5 are independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R4 or R5 is not a Boc group;
  • the method comprising contacting a compound of Formula (XV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00018
  • wherein R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • with a compound of Formula (XIV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00019
  • wherein R6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof;
  • in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XIII).
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention concerns a method of preparation of a compound of formula (XIII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00020
  • or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
  • wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
  • R at each occurrence is independently H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
  • L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
  • n is 1 to about 10;
  • R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
  • R4 and R5 are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R4 or R5 is not a Boc group;
  • from a compound of formula (XII):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00021
  • wherein Y is a leaving group;
  • the method comprising contacting the compound of formula (XII) with an amine of the formula R1NH2, in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00022
  • then, contacting the compound of formula (XV) with a compound of Formula (XIV):
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00023
  • wherein R6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof;
  • in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XIII).
  • In the method of preparation of a compound of formula (XI) from a compound of formula (XII), of in the method of preparation of a compound of formula (XV) from a compound of formula (XII) as an intermediate in the method of preparation of a compound of formula (XIII), the compound of formula (XII) comprises Y being a leaving group, which can include Y=halo, for example, Y=chloro, bromo or iodo, as well as Y=a sulfonate ester, for example alkylsulfonyl (e.g., methylsulfonyl), haloalkylsulfonyl (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl) or arylsulfonyl (e.g., p-toluenesulfonyl). Y, as a leaving group, undergoes nucleophilic displacement by NR1R2R3 (in the preparation of formula (XI)), or by R1NH2 (in the preparation of formula (XV)), at the carbon center to which Y is attached.
  • As is known in the art, certain groups are better leaving groups or have better “leaving ability”, so it is within the knowledge of a skilled artisan to select without undue experimentation an appropriate leaving group based upon the degree of reactivity of the reagent amine. When an amine that is more sterically hindered, or electronically less nucleophilic (e.g., more electron-withdrawn) is used, a leaving group Y of greater leaving ability will be selected in order to achieve a reasonable reaction rate such that the product is obtained in good yield in a relatively short time period and with minimal side reactions. For example, an amine like trimethylamine is both highly nucleophilic and unhindered sterically. Therefore a poorer leaving group Y such as chloro may be adequate for the practice of the method of the invention. Conversely, a less reactive amine, for example an aniline derivative, may require the selection of a better leaving group Y, such as triflate or bromo, by the skilled artisan.
  • The compound of formula (XII) can be a dipeptide, a polypeptide, a free peptide or an immobilized polypeptide, a peptide analog (for example, having a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group other than a methyl group in place of the α-amino group), all containing a precursor sidechain —(CH2)n+1Y, wherein n is 1 to about 10. A compound of formula (XII), for example, a compound including the types of sidechains found on ribosomal aminoacids, can have those sidechains in blocked form (e.g., amines substituted with Boc groups, Cbz groups, and the like) when the reaction with the reagent amine (NR1R2R3or R1NH2) is carried out, or, alternatively, the sidechains can all be unblocked as long as there is no sidechain that can react with the reagent amine at a higher rate than does the precursor sidechain —(CH2)n+1Y. When selecting a sidechain blocking group as are well known in the art for use with the assorted sidechain functionalities as are found in natural aminoacids (carboxylates, phenols, thiols, carboxamides, and the like), the sidechain should not be protected in such as way as to activate it for nucleophilic displacement by the reagent amine. Such protecting groups are well known in the art, and a suitable blocking group can be selected without undue experimentation by the skilled artisan. However, none of the sidechains found in natural (ribosomal) aminoacids interfere with the reaction of the invention, therefore sidechain protected is unneeded for the purpose of carrying out the reaction of the invention.
  • In the case where unnatural aminoacid residues make up a peptide of formula (XII), any sidechain functionalities that are prone to nucleophilic displacement by the amine NR1R2R3 should be suitably protected unless it is the intention that those functionalities undergo the displacement reaction. For example, if there are two hydroxyl-containing sidechain functionalities in a peptide of formula (XII), and it is only desired that one of the hydroxyl-containing sidechains should be converted to a compound of formula (XI), an amine, for instance via conversion to a sulfonate ester followed by displacement with the reagent amine, the other hydroxyl-containing sidechain should be suitably protected prior to carrying out the method of the invention. The selection of blocking groups when needed to protect sidechain functionalities is readily made by a person of ordinary skill without undue experimentation based on well-known blocking groups for the kinds of sidechain functionalities that may be encountered.
  • The substituents of the sidechain amino group in the compound of formula (XI), R1, R2 and R3, are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R1, R2 or R3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, and wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted. For example, compounds of formula (I) that may be prepared by a method of the invention include N-methyllysine, N,N-dimethyllysine, and the quarternary ammonium metho salt of N,N-dimethyllysine. Other Nε-alkyllysine derivatives such as N-benzyllysine, N-picolyllysine, and the like, can also be prepared. By N-alkyl or N-aryl lysine derivatives is meant herein lysine derivatives bearing the substituent on the sidechain (ε) amino group.
  • X can be OH, O(C1-C6alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; and Z can be H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; provided that when Z is NHR, X is an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or is an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer. For example Z can be hydrogen or alkyl. Z and X cannot both be bonded to a polymer; furthermore, at least one of Z and X must comprise an aminoacid residue, a peptide residue, or an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively bonded to a polymer.
  • The ratio of the reagent amine to the substrate precursor peptide can vary; preferably an excess of reagent amine is used. Molar ratios can vary between about 1:1 up to about 100:1 of the reagent amine to the precursor peptide. Higher ratios of reagent amine are advantageously used to suppress possible unwanted side reactions, for example, if a precursor group —(CH2)n+1Y is present in the same molecule with another nucleophilic sidechain group, such as a thiol (cysteine), an amine (lysine), or a non-natural group of high nucleophilicity, use of a large excess of reagent amine is favored in reducing the amount of intra- or intermolecular coupling. Larger excesses of the reagent amine also serve to increase the reaction rate and to drive the reaction to completion due to the bimolecular kinetics of the nucleophilic displacement reaction.
  • The conversion of a compound of formula (XII) to a compound of formula (XI) or a compound of formula (XV) can be carried out in any suitable solvent. Examples are water, methanol, ethanol, or a mixture thereof. Other solvents, such as dipolar aprotic solvents that are capable of dissolving the substrates and which may enhance the rate of nucleophilic displacement of Y by the reagent amine can also be used. Examples are DMSO, DMF, DMAc, NMP, and the like. When the peptidyl reagents have sufficient solubility in nonpolar solvents, suitable nonpolar solvents such as chloroform and dichloromethane can also be used.
  • The reaction time and temperature can be varied depending upon the specific reaction in question to provide a reasonable yield of the desired product within a relatively short period of time. For example, the reaction can be carried out at about 20-80° C., for a time period of about 1 hr to about 7 days. If necessary, reaction temperatures can be as high as about 100° C. or 120° C. using a solvent with a reflux temperature that exceeds the given temperature.
  • In solution phase reactions, the progress of the reaction towards completion is readily monitored by a person of ordinary skill in the art using techniques such as high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), by which means the disappearance of precursor and the appearance of product are readily viewed. In solid phase reactions, for the monitoring of reaction progress it may be necessary to remove small aliquots of the polymeric material and cleave the product from them to ascertain the degree of reaction using HPLC. Other methods such as nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) may also be used to follow the reaction progress. It is within the knowledge of a person of ordinary skill in the art to determine suitable reaction conditions for a particular conversion using standard analytical techniques that are available.
  • The conversion of a compound of formula (XV) to a compound of formula (XIII) via contact of the compound of formula (XV) with a compound of formula (XIV) takes place by addition of the NHR1 group of the compound of formula (XV) to the compound of formula (XIV) with elimination of the SR6 group. The compound of formula (XV) can be a dipeptide, a polypeptide, a free peptide or an immobilized polypeptide, a peptide analog (for example, having a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group such as a methyl group in place of the α-amino group), all containing a sidechain amino group bearing at least a single hydrogen atom. This amino group bears an R1 group, wherein R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, and wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • A compound of formula (XV), for example, which can be a compound including the types of sidechains found on ribosomal aminoacids, can have those sidechains in blocked form (e.g., amines substituted with Boc groups, Z groups, and the like) when the reaction with the compound of formula (XIV) is carried out, or, alternatively, the sidechains can all be unblocked as long as there is no sidechain that can react with a compound of formula (XIV) at a higher rate than does the precursor sidechain bearing the NHR1 group. When selecting a sidechain blocking group as are well known in the art for use with the assorted sidechain functionalities as are found in natural aminoacids (carboxylates, phenols, thiols, carboxamides, and the like), the sidechain should not be protected in such as way as to activate it for nucleophilic attack on a compound of formula (XIV). Such protecting groups are well known in the art, and a suitable blocking group can be selected without undue experimentation by the skilled artisan. For example, carboxylates and phenols can respectively be blocked as esters and ethers, such as benzyl ethers. However, none of the sidechains found in natural (ribosomal) aminoacids, except for amino groups undergo reaction with the thiouronium compound, therefore sidechain protected is generally unneeded for the purpose of carrying out the reaction of the invention. In the case where unnatural aminoacid residues make up a compound of formula (XV), any sidechain functionalities that are prone to nucleophilic addition to the compound of formula (XIV) should be suitably protected unless it is the intention that those functionalities undergo the reaction. For example, if there are two amine-containing sidechain functionalities in a compound of formula (XV), and it is only desired that one of the amine-containing sidechains should be allowed to react with the S-substituted thiouronium compound (XIV) the other amine-containing sidechain should be suitably protected prior to carrying out the method of the invention. For example, a Boc or Cbz group can be used. The selection of blocking groups when needed to protect sidechain functionalities can readily be made by a person of ordinary skill without undue experimentation based on well-known blocking groups for the kinds of sidechain functionalities that may be encountered.
  • The compound of formula (XIV) is an S-substituted thiourea or a thiouronium salt thereof. Preferably the compound of formula (XIV) is a thiouronium salt, for example a hydriodide (HI) salt. The sulfur atom of the reagent bears a substituent R6 which can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl. For example, R6 can be a methyl group. It is within the knowledge of a person of ordinary skill to modify R6 to confer a greater or a lesser degree of reactivity upon the thiouronium compound of formula (XIV). For example, to increase the reactivity of the compound of formula (XIV), for example when the compound of formula (XV) bears a relatively unreactive NHR1 group, such as where R1 is electon-withdrawing, with the compound of formula (XIV), a trifluoromethyl group could replace the methyl group as R6. This kind of substitution is well-known in the art to increase the reactivity of a thiouronium by increasing the electrophilicity of the central carbon atom. Alternatively R6 can be an substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, for example a phenyl group. To increase the reactivity of the thiouronium reagent of formula (XIV), it would be within the knowledge of a person of ordinary skill to substitute the phenyl group with an electron-withdrawing group such as a nitro group in order to increase the reactivity of the thiouronium compound.
  • The compound of formula (XIV) can also be substituted on its nitrogen atoms with substituents R4 and R5 which are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted. It is understood that when one R5 group is a hydrogen atom, the tautomeric nature of guanido groups makes R4 and R5 interchangeable through a proton shift process.
  • X can be OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; and Z can be H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an aminoacid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer; provided that when Z is NHR, X is an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or is an aminoacid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer. For example, Z can be H or alkyl, more specifically methyl. When Z is a nitrogen, X comprises at least a single aminoacid residue, which may or may not be covalently bonded to a polymer.
  • The compound of formula (XIV) offers a major advantage over art reagents in that a greater number and variety of substituents can be disposed on the final arginine analog of formula (XIII) than was previously possible in a single step. Using a method of the invention, an arginine analog bearing a substituted guanido group can be synthesized with as many as four substituents included, one substituent each on two of the three guanido nitrogen atoms and two substituents on the third guanido nitrogen atom.
  • The reaction can have molar ratios of reagents between about 1:1 compound of formula (XV) and thiouronium compound of formula (IV) ranging up to about a 1:10 ratio. Use of some excess of the thiouronium compound can be used to drive the reaction to completion and to increase the rate of the reaction, as well as in reducing unwanted side reactions.
  • The reaction between a compound of formula (XV) and a compound of formula (XIV) can be carried out in any of a variety of solvents, including water or organic solvents. For example, the reaction can be carried out in water, acetonitrile, methanol, ethanol, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, or a mixture thereof. Other suitable solvents will be known to a person of ordinary skill.
  • The reaction can be carried out at any suitable temperature; for example, the reaction can be carried out within a time period of hours to days at a reaction temperature of about 20-80° C. The time period of the reaction can be as short as a few hours, for example about four hours, or can be in the order of days, for example up to about seven days. If necessary, reaction temperatures can be as high as about 100° C. or 120° C. using a solvent with a reflux temperature that exceeds the given temperature.
  • In a method of the invention for preparation of a compound of formula (XIII) from a compound of formula (XII), the two reactions described herein can be combined to provide a single process for carrying out the transformation of an aminoacid residue with a sidechain —(CH2)n+1—Y to an aminoacid residue bearing a substituted guanido group, with the provision that the intermediate aminoacid residue bearing an amine sidechain must bear at least a single hydrogen atom on the sidechain amino group to allow for condensation with the thiouronium reagent. It may be advantageous under certain circumstances to carry out the two synthetic conversions sequentially, for example, to obtain a product with a modified arginine analog residue in a molecule that also contains a lysine or lysine analog residue. If one were to synthesize the precursor peptide with the residues that were to be modified arginine residues present with the —(CH2)n+1—Y sidechain, and the lysine residues present as protected lysine, a high degree of selectively could be obtained wherein no inadvertent conversion of lysine residues to substituted arginine residues took place.
  • There are numerous peptides for which use of a method of the invention could provide a target compound, including an analog, of interest. For example, the peptide neurotensin is a highly cationic peptide of medicinal interest, as is described in PCT Application Publication No. WO2006/009902, which is incorporated herein by reference. This same PCT Published Application also discusses the C-terminal region of neurotensin, aminoacids number 8-13 as a structural lead for the preparation of peptide derivatives with analgesic activity. For example, the molecule wherein the N-terminal arginine of the NT(8-13) fragment is converted to a desamino alkyl derivative, i.e., wherein the N-terminal amino group is replaced by a methyl group, possesses desirable bioactivity and the preparation and biological testing of a series of analogs, such as can be prepared by a method of the current invention, is of interest in the field.
  • While the invention has been described and exemplified in sufficient detail for those skilled in this art to make and use it, various alternatives, modifications, and improvements will be apparent to those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims.
  • All documents referred to herein are incorporated by reference in their entireties.
    • EXAMPLES Example 1 Summary of Neurological Effects of the NT Peptides of the Invention
  • The N-terminal alpha methyl, alpha desamino homolysyl and orinthyl analogues of NT(8-13) prepared according to the invention (see the foregoing general discussion and the Examples) were synthesized and screened for activity in numerous behavioral assays predictive of antipsychotic potential. These peptides induced hypothermia in a dose-dependent fashion after oral administration. In addition, oral administration of the peptides significantly reduced d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion, a measure of the therapeutic efficacy of current or potential APDs. The low dose of peptide (10 mg/kg) that elicits a significant response after oral administration in these assays is significant. The peptides also demonstrate an ability to maintain efficacy after repeated administration. In fact they demonstrate an ability to increase maximal hypothermic response over time, implying that repeated administration may actually improve their CNS activity. Thus, the NT peptides of the invention are shown to have biological activity like that of the known naturally occurring peptide NT and are more selective. Details of these effects are as follows.
  • Hypothermia as a Preliminary Screen of CNS Activity. NT induces hypothermia when directly administered into the CNS. As a result, induced hypothermia can be used to determine the ability of NT(8-13) peptides of the invention to cross the BBB after peripheral administration and indirectly to determine their in vivo CNS activity. The hypothermic effect of NT can be attributed to its actions at NTR1, the NTR most often implicated in the pathophysiology of schizophrenia. An NT(8-13) peptide that induced hypothermia after IP injection is thus shown to be an antipsychotic agent. A significant hypothermic effect would demonstrate that the peptide showed marked improvements in blood stability and membrane crossing.
  • IP injection is the standard route of administration to determine the extent of BBB crossing of neurotensin analogues. The methods and protocols are provided in the Examples section. IV administration results in a dose that is completely available to the systemic circulation. By contrast, an IP injection is a more rigorous test of stability because the peptide is exposed to first pass metabolism in the liver.
  • The hypothermic effects of peptides 28-30, after a 5 mg/kg IP injection, are given in Table 4. Each peptide exhibited a significant effect over a 5 hr time course. The hypothermic results for these three peptides demonstrate that the substitution of an alpha alkyl group in place of the N-terminal amine group (i.e., the α-methyl group) does not abolish the in vivo activity of the NT(8-13) peptide. For use as an antischizophrenic pharmaceutical, the ability of these peptides to elicit CNS activity after oral administration was evaluated.
  • TABLE 4
    Amino acid sequence of NT(8-13) analogues.
    Amino Acid Sequence
    Peptide N-terminus 8a 9 10 11 12 13 C-terminus
    KH28
    (ABS201) CH3 L-Hlys L-Arg L-Pro L-Tyr L-tLeu L-Leu COOH
    KH29 CH3 7 L-Arg L-Pro L-Tyr L-tLeu L-Leu COOH
    KH30 CH3 9 L-Arg L-Pro L-Tyr L-tLeu L-Leu COOH
  • TABLE 5
    Hypothermic response to IP administration of NT(8-13) and NT(8-13)
    analogues.
    Peptidea tmax (min)b Δ in BT (° C.)c
    NT (8-13) 90 −0.45 ± 0.17d
    ABS201 150 −2.51 ± 0.17
    KH29 150 −3.75 ± 0.24
    KH30 300 −3.84 ± 0.20
    aIP dose was 5 mg/kg for all peptides.
    btmax (min) = Time to maximal temperature decrease.
    cΔ in BT (° C.) = Decrease in body temperature measured at tmax
    dN = 5 for all peptides.
  • Oral Administration. A goal in the development of NT(8-13) peptides as antischizophrenic pharmaceuticals is to determine their ability to exhibit CNS activity after oral administration. The known NT peptides, NT69L and the Eisai hexapeptide, fail in this respect to elicit central activity when given orally. Accordingly, the N-terminal methyl peptides 28-30 were tested for their ability to induce hypothermia after oral administration.
  • ABS201, an example of a peptide of the invention, demonstrated maximal hypothermic responses greater than 2° C. (Table 6) and its maximal hypothermic effect was equal to its hypothermic effect after IP dosing (FIG. 9), resulting in an approximate oral bioavailability of 25%. While peptides 29 and 30 also were orally active, their ratio of oral activity to IP activity was not as balanced as that of ABS201. The oral activity of ABS201 was an important factor to support it as a lead NT(8-13) analogue for further evaluation of antipsychotic potential.
  • TABLE 6
    Hypothermic response to chronic IP administration of ABS201.
    Peptidea tmax (min)b Δ in BT (° C.)c
    Saline d 180 0.70 ± 0.20
    Day 1 120 2.72 ± 0.24
    Day 2 90 2.85 ± 0.26
    Day 3 120 3.74 ± 0.13
    Day 4 120 3.71 ± 0.13
    Day 5 90 3.83 ± 0.24
    aIP dose was 5 mg/kg for all days.
    btmax (min) = Time to maximal temperature decrease.
    cΔ in BT (° C.) = Decrease in body temperature measured at tmax
    dN = 5 for all days.
  • TABLE 7
    Comparison of the maximal hypothermic effects of peptide
    ABS201 after IP administration.
    Peptide
    Dose ABS201a
    0.1 mg/kg −1.14 ± 0.21
    0.5 mg/kg −1.92 ± 0.12
    1.0 mg/kg −2.63 ± 0.21
    5.0 mg/kg −3.61 ± 0.22
    aChange in body temperature (° C.) is the maximal decrease recorded for each individual dose.
  • Schizophrenia Investigation. The blockade of locomotion caused by d-amphetamine, a “DA agonist”, has become the standard measure of therapeutic efficacy of current or potential drug candidates for treatment of schizophrenia. This model operates on the assumption that the direct stimulation of DA receptors within the mesolimbic DA system is responsible for the locomotor response.
  • Catalepsy, commonly defined as a state of tonic immobility in rodents, is regarded as analogous to (extrapyramidal side effects) EPSEs in humans. Consequently, catalepsy is a side effect to be avoided in a successful drug candidate. Concurrently, the degree to which a drug candidate causes catalepsy in rats may also be used as a predictor for the probable occurrence of EPSEs associated with that particular candidate.
  • Hypothermic Analysis. To examine the antipsychotic properties of ABS201, a dose-response curve for hypothermic induction after IP administration was generated. In addition, the hypothermic effects elicited by oral administration of ABS201 (10 mg/kg-30 mg/kg) were determined. The ability of ABS201 to reduce d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion after both IP and oral administration also was measured. To assess the effects on CNS activity caused by prolonged treatment of ABS201, hypothermia and attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion were measured after repeated daily dosing. Finally, the bar test was utilized to measure catalepsy as a predictor of EPSEs in humans.
  • The dose-response curve for ABS201 after IP injection over a concentration range of 0.1-10 mg/kg (FIG. 11) gave some conflicting results. First, the maximal effect elicited at 5 mg/kg (−3.61±0.22° C. at 150 min PI) was a full degree greater than the maximal effect seen after the preliminary screen (−2.51±0.17° C. at 150 min PI). This discrepancy is most likely due to environmental factors (air temperature, rectal probes, rat size, etc.) that can affect the rats' response. Most importantly, ABS201 continued to elicit a significant CNS effect irrespective of these differences. The ED50 value for ABS201, 0.943 mg/kg., compares favorably with other NT(8-13) analogues with CNS activity (41, 60).
  • ABS201 also induced hypothermia in a dose-dependent fashion after oral administration (FIG. 12). A significant hypothermic effect was demonstrated at 10 mg/kg, the lowest dose tested (−1.02±0.10° C. at 150 min PI). The generation of an ED50 value for the oral administration of ABS201 was impractical due to the inordinate amount of peptide necessary to produce a complete dose-response curve. Previous NT(8-13) analogues that have been under development as antipsychotic compounds have contained a Trp11 substitution. Evidence from the studies presented herein supports the theory that this modification abolishes the oral activity of a NT analogue. Further studies are necessary to determine what specific role Tyr11 plays in the oral bioavailability of NT(8-13) analogues.
  • The blockade of locomotion caused by d-amphetamine, a “DA agonist”, has become the standard measure of therapeutic efficacy of current or potential schizophrenia drug candidates, and NT(8-13) analogues currently under investigation as candidates have demonstrated the ability to decrease d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity in a dose-dependent fashion. Sound- and light-attenuated locomotor cages are used to measure the ability of potential candidates to decrease d-amphetamine-induced hyperactivity.
  • The effects of ABS201 on d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity at varying doses were also examined. ABS201 significantly reduced hyperlocomotion for all doses tested (doses of 3 mg/kg and 10 mg/kg not shown). Another hallmark of current APDs is the ability to reduce spontaneous locomotor activity. All ABS201 dose groups responded significantly lower than saline during the drug phase, indicating the ability of ABS201 to reduce spontaneous activity.
  • The ability to attenuate d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion after oral administration is also demonstrated by ABS201. During the drug phase, only the 10 and 30 mg/kg doses reduced spontaneous locomotor activity. The lack of significance seen with the 20 mg/kg dose is most likely an anomaly resulting from slight variation in response for this group of rats. However, no main effect of DOSE was detected during the baseline phase, indicating that there is not a significant difference in baseline activity across the different dosing groups.
  • ABS201 maintained a significant CNS effect after repeated daily dosing (Table 6) and over the 5-day period the absolute hypothermic response increased. A comparison of the induced hypothermia of ABS201 on days 1 and 5 was made. On day 5, the maximal hypothermic response was achieved faster (90 min) compared to day 1 (120 min). In contrast to day 1, on day 5 the maximal hypothermic effect was not maintained for an extended period, implying that while repeated dosing does not decrease the maximal effect, it may reduce the duration of the hypothermic effect. Repeated daily dosing had no effect on the ability of ABS201 to attenuate d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion. Both the acute and chronic dosing groups produced a reduction in hyperactivity that was significant for almost two hours after amphetamine administration. Of note, chronic administration of ABS201 did abolish its inhibitory effect on spontaneous locomotor activity.
  • Cataleptic Analysis. In laboratory tests, catalepsy is characterized by the inability of an animal to correct its position after placement in an unnatural posture. Catalepsy tests can be greatly influenced by a number of variables. These include stress-induced inhibition of catalepsy caused by a new environment and the contribution of learned “pseudo-catalepsy” that can result upon repeated measures with the same animal. To circumvent these potential confounding factors, tests are performed on an animal only once in a quiet, controlled environment.
  • Neither ABS201 (5 mg/kg) nor saline caused catalepsy after peripheral administration. Haloperidol, a typical antischizophrenic drug known to produce a fully cataleptic response in rats, induced catalepsy that lasted for greater than 30 sec. These results demonstrate that ABS201 does not induce catalepsy after peripheral administration, a hallmark of current clinically effective candidates.
  • Bioavailability Study with CACO-2 Cells. Caco-2 cells, derived from a human colorectal carcinoma, spontaneously differentiate into polarized cells that exhibit well-developed microvilli and brush-border enzymes. These features make the cells an excellent model of the human small intestine. A strong correlation between uptake of a compound in the Caco-2 cell model and oral bioavailability of the compound has been identified.
  • ABS201 is stable in rat serum for greater than 24 hours, however, its stability in cells has not been determined. Consequently, determination of the ability of intact peptide to enter the Caco-2 cells in the uptake experiments will show oral bioavailability and cellular stability. Reverse phase HPLC is an ideal method to analyze the solubilized cell components for ABS201 and ABS201 degradation products. This analysis will show oral availability and cellular stability. Fractions can be collected at determined intervals and counted for radioactivity via LSC. By establishing the ABS201 elution time via a standard gradient, direct comparisons can be made to the contents of Caco-2 cells after uptake experiments.
  • To verify that intact peptide is entering the Caco-2 cells and in a preliminary attempt to assess the stability of the peptides in cell culture, a RP-HPLC assay to analyze ABS201 after cellular uptake can be carried out. After a 2 min incubation, intact ABS201 likely can be identified within the cells using HPLC techniques. These studies will demonstrate that ABS201 can be extensively taken up by the Caco-2 cells thus showing its oral bioavailability.
    • Example 2 Compound Synthesis
  • The following examples and protocols are put forth so as to provide those of ordinary skill in the art with a complete disclosure and description of how the compounds claimed herein are made and evaluated, and are intended to be purely exemplary of the invention and are not intended to limit the scope of what the inventors regard as their invention. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers (e.g., amounts, temperature, etc.) but some errors and deviations should be accounted for. Unless indicated otherwise, parts are parts by weight, temperature is in ° C. and is at room temperature, and pressure is at or near atmospheric.
  • Starting Materials. Solvents are from Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.) and reagents from Aldrich (Milwaukee, Wis.) unless otherwise noted.
  • Abbreviations. Trisyl-N3, 2,4,6-triisopropylbenzenesulfonyl azide; Et3N, triethylamine; t-BuCOCl, trimethylacetylchloride; n-BuLi, n-butyl lithium; H2, hydrogen gas; Pd—C, palladium on activated carbon; Xps, (S)-(−)-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidinone; KHMDS, potassium bis(trimethylsilyl) amide; CH3I, methyl iodide; H2O2, hydrogen peroxide; LiOH, lithium hydroxide; THF, tetrahydrofuran; CH2Cl2, dichloromethane; MgSO4, magnesium sulfate; Hex, hexane; EtOAc, ethyl acetate; NaHCO3, sodium bicarbonate; HCl, hydrochloric acid; N2, nitrogen; H2O, distilled water.
  • (3(2S),4S)-3-(2-methyl-5-bromo-1-oxovaleryl)-4-(phenylmethyl)-2-oxazolidinone (24a) (FIG. 3). Intermediate 23a was prepared as described previously (57). A solution of 17.4 mL (5 eq) of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl) amide (KHMDS) was added to 100 mL anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (THF) and cooled to −78° C. under positive nitrogen (N2) pressure. A solution of 23a (5.18 g, 15.23 mmol) in 10 mL THF under N2 was cooled to −78° C. and cannulated into the KHMDS solution. This mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 30 min to effect enolate formation. Methyl iodide (CH3I) (1.90 mL, 2 eq) was added to the solution via cannula and stirred at −78° C. for 1 hr at which time the reaction was quenched with 4.09 mL (5 eq) of glacial acetic acid. The solution was warmed to room temperature while stirring over 2 hr and the THF removed in vacuo. The resulting yellow slurry was dissolved in 200 mL half-saturated brine and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×100 mL). The CH2Cl2 layers were combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate (MgSO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to yield a yellow oil. The crude oil was purified over silica gel eluting with 3:1 hexane:ethyl acetate (Hex:EtOAC) to give 2.81 g (52% yield) of pure 26a. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ7.38-7.15 (m, 5H), 4.71-4.63 (m, 1H), 4.18-4.15 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 2H), 3.71-3.65 (m, 1H), 3.41-3.33 (m, 2H), 3.27-3.20 (dd, J=4.0, 13.8 Hz, 1H), 2.89-2.81 (dd, J=10.0, 14.2 Hz, 1H), 1.90-1.55 (m, 4H), 1.24-1.20 (d, J=7.4, 3H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ176.8, 153.2, 135.2, 129.6, 129.1, 127.6, 66.4, 55.6, 38.3, 37.6, 33.8, 32.2, 31.8, 17.9.
  • (3(2S), 4S)-3-(2-methyl-6-bromo-1-oxohexanyl)-4-(phenylmethyl)-2-oxazolidinone (24b). A slightly modified procedure was used to give 24b. Directly following KHMDS addition to 23b, 5 eq of CH3I was added and the reaction stirred at −78° C. under N2 for 1 hr. Quenching with glacial acetic acid and subsequent extraction and purification protocol was as described above for 24a. Additional silica gel purification eluting with 100% CH2Cl2 gave pure 24b in 10% yield. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ7.36-7.19 (m, 5H), 4.72-4.65 (m, 1H), 4.25-4.16 (d J=4.2 Hz, 2H), 3.77-3.67 (m, 1H), 3.46-3.36 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.29-3.22 (dd, J=4.0, 14.0 Hz, 1H), 2.82-2.74 (dd, J=9.0, 14.0 Hz, 1H), 1.92-1.74 (m, 3H), 1.50-1.42 (m, 3H), 1.25-1.21 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ176.9, 153.2, 135.3, 129.6, 129.1, 66.4, 55.6, 38.1, 37.8, 34.1, 32.8, 32.5, 26.1, 18.7.
  • (3(2S),4S)-3-(2-methyl-7-bromo-1-oxoheptyl)-4-(phenylmethyl)-2-oxazolidinone (24c). Compound 24c was produced in 56% yield from 23c following the procedure outlined for compound 26a. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ7.41-7.22 (m, 5H), 4.74-4.66 (m, 1H), 4.25-4.19 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H), 3.77-3.70 (m, 1H), 3.45-3.39 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.31-3.23 (dd, J=3.7, 13.7 Hz, 1H), 2.84-2.77 (dd, J=10.0, 12.5 Hz, 1H), 1.91-1.77 (m, 3H), 1.50-1.32 (m, 5H), 1.25-1.20 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ177.2, 153.1, 135.4, 129.7, 129.1, 127.5, 66.4, 55.7, 38.2, 37.9, 34.3, 33.4, 32.8, 28.4, 27.7, 17.8.
  • 2(S)-Methyl-5-bromovaleric acid (25a). A solution of 24a (10.41 g, 29.4 mmol) in 100 mL THF and 40 mL H2O was cooled to 0° C. while stirring. To this solution was added 12.12 mL (3.5 eq) 30% hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) followed by 2.41 g (2 eq) lithium hydroxide (LiOH) and the solution was stirred at 0° C. for 50 min. After 50 min, 94 mL sodium sulfite (0.183 g/mL H2O) and 288 mL 0.5N sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) were added. The THF was removed in vacuo and the remaining aqueous solution extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×100 mL). The aqueous layer was acidified to pH 2 with 25% HCl and extracted with EtOAc (3×100 mL). The EtOAc fractions were combined and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.01 g (70% yield) of 27a as a pale oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ3.46-3.38 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 2.56-2.46 (m, 1H), 1.95-1.60 (m, 4H), 1.25-1.20 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ183.1, 38.9, 33.6, 32.1, 30.5, 17.3.
  • 2(S)-Methyl-6-bromohexanoic acid (25b). Compound 25b was produced in 77% yield from 24b following the procedure outlined for 25a. 1H NMR (400 MHz CDCl3) δ3.45-3.38 (t, J=6.2 Hz, 2H), 2.55-2.45 (m, 1H), 1.92-1.85 (m, 2H), 1.77-1.68 (m, 1H), 1.55-1.46 (m, 3H), 1.24-1.19 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ183.5, 39.5, 33.8, 32.9, 32.7, 26.0, 17.2.
  • 2(S)-Methyl-7-bromoheptanoic acid (25c). Compound 25c was produced in 74% yield from 24c following the procedure outlined for 25. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ3.43-3.36 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 2.51-2.42 (m, 1H), 1.90-1.64 (m, 3H), 1.49-1.32 (m, 5H) 1.20-1.14 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (100 MHz, CDCl3) δ183.6, 39.5, 34.1, 33.5, 32.7, 28.2, 26.6, 17.1.
    • Example 3 Alpha methyl, Alpha desamino, omega N-substituted homolysyl and orinthyl (8) neurotensin (8-13)
  • Alpha methyl, alpha desamino omega N-substituted homo lysyl and orinthyl (8) neurotensin (8-13) were synthesized (FIG. 7). The α-methyl bromo acids, 27a and c, were coupled to the resin-bound peptide as outlined in the general section. The solid state coupling was conducted as follows.
  • Resin bound N alpha Fmoc leucine was swelled in DMF prior to Fmoc cleavage with piperidine (20% in DMF). The piperidine solution was removed with vacuum filtration and the resin-bound amino acid washed with DMS and methylene chloride (5× each). Amino acids (4 eq) were activated in DMF with HOBt (4 eq) PyBOP ((4 eq) and DIPEA (10 eq) and added directly to the peptide reaction vessel. Amino acids were coupled for 6 hours, the resins was washed with DMF and methylene chloride and monitored with a Kaiser test for the presence of free amines. Residues were recoupled when necessary. This procedure was repeated with subsequent amino acids to give the penultimate peptide sequence (pentamer).
  • Aliquots of the resin-bound pentamer were then coupled with the appropriate omega bromo carboxylic acid as described above to give the N-omega bromo acyl pentamers. The N-omega acyl pentamers were then reacted with ammonia, dimethyl amine or trimethyl amine as described in these Examples to produce the desired peptides of the invention. Acid catalyzed deprotection of the side chain protecting groups was performed with a TFA solution containing appropriate scavengers.
  • RP-HPLC purification using a linear gradient of 15% to 75% B over 55 min at a constant flow rate of 4 mL/min afforded pure omega bromo peptides 53 and 54. These bromo peptides were reacted at 40° C. for 12 hr with 150 eq of ammonium hydroxide (29% in H2O), methylamine (40% in H2O), dimethylamine (40% in H2O), or trimethylamine (40% in H2O) in ethanol (EtOH). Solvents were removed in vacuo and crude peptides were taken up in mobile phase and purified with a linear gradient of 2% to 50% B over 65 min at a constant flow rate of 4 mL/min.
  • Peptides were characterized and assessed for purity via MALDI-TOFMS on a Voyager DE-STR System 4117 mass spectrometer (Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.). Peptides were used at greater than 95% purity in vivo.
    • Example 4 Identification of Antipsychotic NT Peptide Analogs
  • Structures of Compounds. The peptide analogs evaluated contain one non-natural amino acid (Scheme 1) or desaminoacid (Scheme 2).
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00024
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00025
  • Benchmarking Compounds. From an initial screen of about 50 compounds, those listed in Table 8 were selected for further testing and development as antipsychotic compounds. These compounds are based on the neurotensin fragment NT(8-13). These compounds possessed useful characteristics as each: bound as competitive agonists in vitro to NTR-1, the brain neurotensin receptor involved in schizophrenia, demonstrated central activity when injected IP in rat using hypothermia as a surrogate for central activity, which also occurs through NTR-1 binding and elicited the appropriate activities in rat behavioral models of schizophrenia.
  • TABLE 8
    Structures of NT[8-13]-based Peptides.
    Pep-
    tide
    # Structure1
    NT NH2-Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-Leu-COOH
    (8-13)
    ABS13 N3-L-homolysine-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS41 N3-13-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS44 N3-7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS46 N3-9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS201 43-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS202 28-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS203 29-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertLeu-Leu-COOH2
    1Bolded numbers within peptide structures refer to the non-natural Arg and Lys residues shown in Schemes 1 and 2.
  • To further characterize the compounds, hypothermia induction (NTR-1 receptor binding) activity was evaluated with both oral and IP dosing of each compound. As seen in Table 9, all of the compounds except for ABS201 exhibited<10% oral activity. Interestingly, ABS201 had a 300% increase in oral activity over the previous most active compound. In addition, ABS201 achieved a faster response when administered orally versus IP. This is unique among the NT(8-13) derivatives.
  • TABLE 9
    Hypothermic effects of NT(8-13) analogues after IP and oral
    administration.
    IP Dosea Oral Doseb
    Δ in Δ in App.
    Peptide tmax c (min) BTd (° C.) tmax c (min) BTd (° C.) Oral
    Saline
    240 −0.60± 180 −0.64± NA
    ABS13
    150 −4.26± 90 −1.66±
    ABS31 180 −6.87± 150 −1.05± NA
    ABS44
    150 −5.07± 150 −1.58±
    ABS46 180 −4.68± 180 −2.03±
    ABS201 150 −2.51± 90 −2.49±
    ABS202 150 −3.75± 120 −1.09± NA
    ABS203
    300 −3.84± 150 −1.30± NA
    aIP dose was 5 mg/kg for all peptides.
    bOral dose was 20 mg/kg for all peptides.
    ctmax (min) = Time to maximal temperature decrease.
    dΔ in BT (° C.) = Decrease in body temperature measured at tmax.
    eDenotes a significant response (p < 0.05).
    fApproximate oral bioavailability was calculated from the relative areas under the hypothermia curve for each dosing regimen, corrected for amount of compound administered.
    gNA = none apparent (as the oral dosing was not significant over baseline).
    • Example 5 Protocols for Neurotesting of ABS201
  • General Animal Protocols. Male Sprague Dawley Rats (250-350 g) or Brattleboro rats (270-310 g) were obtained from Harlan (Indianapolis, Ind.) and housed in an AAALAC-approved colony room maintained at a constant temperature and humidity. Lighting was controlled on a 12 hr light:dark cycle with lights on at 0700 hr. Animals were housed two per cage and fed laboratory chow and water ad libitum. All experiments were performed during the light cycle.
  • Animal Restraint. Rats were restrained in Plas-Labs® plastic cages fitted with wooden dowels to restrict movement. Rectal temperature probes (Physitemp®, RET-2, Clifton, N.J.), lubricated with mineral oil, were inserted into the rectum of each animal. Probes were connected to a microprobe thermometer (Physitemp®, BAT-12) in conjunction with a thermocouple selector (Physitemp®, SWT-5). Rats were allowed to acclimate to the cages for 1 hr prior to IP injection.
  • Peptide Preparation.. Each peptide tested was dissolved in 0.9% NaCl to the appropriate final concentration for I.P. injection (10, 30 or 100 mg NT[8-13] or equimolar equivalent of analog in 1 mL 0.9% NaCl). For oral administration, the test article was administered directly into the animals' stomach by gavaging. Controls involved the administration of 0.9% NaCl. Thus, peptides were dissolved in saline, and following the equilibration period, rats were given an IP injection of peptide (5 mg/kg) or saline (1 mL/kg). Initial temperature values were the average temperatures of the rats immediately before and after the injection. Subsequent measurements were taken every 30 min for 5 hr. Statistical analysis was performed using a one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA) followed by Tukey's post hoc test for multiple comparisons using GraphPad Prism® to measure significance. Results were considered significant for p<0.05.
  • Hypothermia. Hypothermia induction is an easy and direct measure of neurotensin derivatives entering the brain and binding to NTR-1, the receptor involved in psychosis. For these experiments, animals were housed in individual Plexiglas cages without bedding at 25° C. For each rat, a thermistor probe was placed 4.5 cm into the rectum; baseline temperatures were recorded for 1 hr to allow habituation to the cages prior to injection of compound.
  • Dose-response curves for hypothermic induction. All animal restraint and hypothermia protocols were as described above. Variable slope dose-response curve and ED50 value was generated using GraphPad Prism®.
  • d-Amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion. Experimentally I male Sprague-Dawley rats were housed as described above. Rats were handled for three days prior to testing to minimize experimenter induced hyperlocomotion on test day. For experiments, sound- and light-attenuated automated photocell beam activity chambers (AccuScan Instruments, Inc., Columbus, Ohio) were used to measure locomotion. Cages were connected to a VersaMax Analyzer (AccuScan) in conjunction with an IBM computer using VersaMax 1.80-0146 software (AccuScan) to record vertical and horizontal activity. Total activity values recorded were the sum of vertical and horizontal activity.
  • Each animal's activity was measured by how many times per minute the animal “trips” a photobeam in a computer-controlled photocell activity chamber (San Diego Instruments, San Diego, Calif.). The chambers were arranged in a four-level rack in a quiet room with ambient light and temperature approximately the same as in the separate housing room. The experiment was done over 6 days, with 1 run each day in mid-afternoon. On each day, 6 naïve rats were assigned to each treatment condition. Doses were assigned so that each was assessed in 12 chambers that were distributed over the apparatus, which controls for variations in lighting, etc. of the different chambers.
  • Rats were placed in the activity chambers for 30 minutes to habituate and establish baseline activity levels. Then, rats were removed and given an IP or oral dose of peptide (N=7) or saline (N=8) and returned to the chamber to establish the peptide's effect on spontaneous activity levels. About 30 minutes after administration, rats were removed and given an IP injection of d-amphetamine (1 mg/kg) or vehicle and returned to the chamber for a further 1 hr to assess the effect of the peptide on induced hyperlocomotion.
  • Chronic Testing Protocols. For chronic hypothermia testing, rats were given an IP injection of ABS201 (5 mg/kg) or saline once daily for five consecutive days. Induced hypothermia was monitored and tested for significance as described above. To assess the ability of ABS201 to decrease d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity after repeated administration, rats were divided into three dosing groups; chronic, acute, and control (N=7 for all groups). On days 1-4, the chronic group received an IP injection of ABS201 (5 mg/kg) while the acute and control groups received saline. On test day, day five, chronic and acute animals received ABS201 (5 mg/kg) while control animals received saline. The test protocol for day five was as described above.
  • Catalepsy Assessment. ABS201 (5 mg/kg) was dissolved in saline (1 ml/kg). Rats were given an IP injection of peptide (5 mg/Kg), saline, or haloperidol (1 mg/kg). After 3 hours, catalepsy was measured using the horizontal bar test. Briefly, the front paws were placed directly on a horizontal bar 5 mm in diameter placed 7.5 cm above the cage floor. The rat was held in this position for 3 sec and then released. The time from release until the paws return to the cage floor was measured and recorded. A cut-off time of 30 sec was observed; this indicated a fully cataleptic animal as cataleptic animals are frozen to the bar. Normal animals withdraw virtually immediately. Measures were repeated every 30 min for 4 hr. Data are means±SEM (p<0.01).
    • Example 6 Results of Neurotesting of ABS201
  • Hypothermic induction by ABS201 through IP and PO dosing. ABS201 has an ED50 of about 1 mg/kg when administered IP, and 10 mg/kg administered orally (hypothermia data not shown, see amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion results below). As seen in FIG. 9, ABS201 actually induces a quicker hypothermic effect when dosed orally versus IP at 2× the approximate ED50 for each compound.
  • Dose-response curves. The dose-response curve for ABS201 after IP injection over a concentration range of 0.1-10.0 mg/kg is shown in FIG. 11. The calculated ED50, value is 0.943 mg/kg. The hypothermic response to the oral administration of ABS201 over a concentration range of 10.0-30.0 mg/kg is shown in FIG. 12.
  • Attenuation of d-amphetamine induced hyperlocomotion after IP and oral dosing. FIG. 13 illustrates that ABS201 delivered IP inhibits amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion with an ED50 of about 1 mg/kg. FIG. 14 illustrates that ABS201 delivered by oral dosing induced hyperlocomotion with an approximate ED50 of about 10 mg/kg. Larger doses were not attempted in the PO administration experiments due to lack of sufficient material; however, the IP data clearly illustrate that the hyperlocomotion effect can be fully reversed.
  • Separate two-factor ANOVAs for DOSE×TIME were performed for each different time-phase of the assay. Phases for the IP dosing and oral dosing experiments consisted of habituation (time points 10-60), drug (time points 70-120), and amphetamine (time points 130-240).
  • For IP dosing experiments, during the habituation phase, there was a main effect of TIME [F(5,185)=264.335 (p<0.001), indicating a gradual decrease in activity levels over time regardless of dose. Tukey's post-hoc tests, collapsed over dose, indicated activity levels for time points 10-30 were significantly higher than time points 40-60 (p<0.001). These results are attributed to the initial spontaneous exploratory activity associated with the novel environment. During the drug phase, there was a main effect of TIME [F(5,185=12.336 (p<0.001)] and a main effect of DOSE [F(5,37)=11.775 (p<0.001)]. The main effect of TIME resulted from a decrease in activity for all doses relative to the first time point (70 min). Tukey's post-hoc tests, collapsed over time, indicated that all doses responded significantly different from saline (p<0.001). During the amphetamine phase, there was DOSE×TIME interaction [F(55,407)=4.474 (p<0.001)]. Tukey's post-hoc tests revealed that all ABS201 dose groups demonstrated reduced locomotor activity for time points 130-200 as compared to saline (p<0.05).
  • For oral dosing experiments, during the habituation phase, there was a main effect of TIME [F(5,120)=201.979 (p<0.001)], indicating a gradual decrease in activity levels over time, regardless of dose. Tukey's post-hoc tests, collapsed over dose, indicated activity levels significantly decreased at each time point. During the drug phase, there was DOSE×TIME interaction [F(15,120)=11.584 (p<0.037)]. Tukey's post-hoc tests, collapsed over time, indicated that only the 10 mg/kg and 30 mg/kg dose groups responded significantly different from saline (p<0.01). During the amphetamine phase, there was DOSE×TIME interaction [F(11,264)=35.616 (p<0.001)]. Tukey's post-hoc tests revealed that all dose groups demonstrated reduced locomotor activity for time points 140-180 as compared to saline (p<0.05). In addition, the 20 mg/kg and 30 mg/kg dose groups responded significantly lower than the saline group at time points 190-200.
  • Effects of chronic ABS201 administration of hypothermic induction. ABS201 maintained a significant CNS effect after repeated daily dosing (Table 6) and over the 5-day period the absolute hypothermic response increased.
  • Effects of repeated ABS201 dosing on d-amphetamine induced hyperactivity. Separate two-factor ANOVAs for GROUP×TIME were performed for each different time-phase of the experiment. Phases were consistent with those described above. During the habituation phase, there was a main effect of TIME [F(5,90)=146.164 (p<0.001)], indicating that there was a gradual decrease in activity levels over time, regardless of group. Tukey's post-hoc tests, collapsed over dose, indicated activity levels for time points 10-20 were significantly higher than time points 30-60 (p<0.001). These results are attributed to the habituation of the rats to a novel environment over time. During the drug phase, there was a main effect of TIME [F(5,90)=13.512 (p<0.001)] and a main effect of GROUP [F(2,18)=4.37 (p=0.028)]. The main effect of TIME resulted from a decrease in activity for all doses relative to the first time point (70 min). Tukey's post-hoc tests, collapsed over time, indicated that only the acute group responded significantly different from saline during the drug phase (p<0.05). During the amphetamine phase, there was GROUP×TIME interaction [F(22.198)=4.069 (p<0.001)]. Tukey's post-hoc tests revealed that both the acute and chronic groups demonstrated reduced locomotor activity for time points 140-220 as compared to saline (p<0.05).
  • Reversal of Prepulse Inhibition. Prepulse inhibition (PPI) of acoustic startle is decreased in unmedicated schizophrenia patients and similar deficits can be induced in rats through pharmacological, environmental, or neuroanatomical manipulations. Recently, it was reported that Brattleboro (BB) rats, a Long Evans (LE) strain with a single gene mutation, have inherent deficits in PPI homologous to those observed in schizophrenia patients (see Feifel et al. Neuropsychopharmacology 29:731 (2004)). Atypical-type antipsychotics are active in this model. As seen in FIG. 15, orally dosed ABS201 reverses PPI in Brattleboro rats.
  • Catalepsy assessment. Neither ABS201 (5 mg/kg) nor saline caused catalepsy after peripheral administration (N=5). Haloperidol, a typical APD known to produce a fully cataleptic response in rats, induced catalepsy that lasted for greater than 30 sec. See FIG. 16.
  • Dose Tolerance. The animals were I.P. dosed with ABS201 for 5 days straight at 5× the ED50, using both induction of hypothermia and inhibition of amphetamine-induced locomotion as the monitoring methods using protocols described above. Dose tolerance is not observed with either compound (see FIGS. 17 and 18).
  • Summary of the Behavioral Effects of ABS201. The “gold standard” animal model for evaluating a molecule with antipsychotic potential is inhibition of amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion. ABS201 is active in a dose-dependent fashion whether IP or orally injected (FIGS. 13 and 14). The action of ABS201 is apparent following both IV and PO administration; dose-dependent; and long acting (observable 1 hr post administration and apparent for at least one additional hour).
  • The effects of ABS201 and haloperidol on catalepsy was examined in rats. Rats (N=5) were given an IP injection of ABS201 (5 mg/kg) or haloperidol (1 mg/kg). After 2 h, catalepsy was measured using the horizontal bar test. Data are means±SEM (p<0.01). ABS201 does not induce a cataleptic state in rats (FIG. 16), is not antinociceptive, and tolerance to multiple dosings does not occur either with monitoring hypothermia or inhibition of amphetamine-induced hyperlocomotion (FIGS. 17 and 18). Thus, ABS201 reliably induces hypothermia in rodents following both IV and PO administration. The action of ABS201 is:dose-dependent; and long acting, being observable for a period of 3-4 hours following administration. The doses producing hypothermia are similar, if not identical, to those which reverse d-amphetamine responses.
  • The oral and intravenous dosing of 3 male and 3 female rats each receiving 50 mg/kg (IV) or 250 mg/kg (PO) of ABS201 HCl administered in neutral physiological saline was observed. During the 2 and 24 hour post-dosing clinical observation periods, measurements of core body temperatures were taken.
  • The following was observed during the period immediately during and following intravenous administration of ABS201: during the dosing period (slow push; >1 min<2 min via the tail vein) the animals receiving ABS201 HCl became noticeably sedate in the body restraining cages; upon removal from the restraining cages, animals were obviously sedated, lacked spontaneous benchtop locomotor activity, assumed a curl position upon handling, and exhibited a greatly impaired, or loss of, the righting reflex; notwithstanding, ptosis was absent; there was no evidence of flaccid paralysis although muscle tone was substantially reduced; pupil reflex was present; the hind limb pinch response was impaired or absent; there was no evidence of parasympathetic responses, e.g., spontaneous urination, defecation, salivation and lacrimation were absent; there was no evidence of acute sympathetic responses, e.g., piloerection; there was no evidence of seizures, either tonic or clonic. The acute effects were short lived with the righting reflex returning by the end of the complete dosing period (approximately 30 min). At the two hour post-dosing observation period, all animals appeared grossly normal although marked hypothermia was present. At the 24 hour post-dosing observation period, all animals appeared grossly normal; hypothermia was absent. Animals administered ABS201 HCl orally appeared grossly normal at all time points. Thus, the evidence indicates that the acute behavioral appearance and response(s) of animals following the intravenous administration of ABS201 HCl (50 mg/kg) is directly attributable to a rapid and marked central nervous system effect.
    • Example 7 Oral Bioavailability Studies of ABS201
  • Synthesis of Fmoc-Proline-OH* for Generation of Radioactive ABS201 (FIG. 19). L-Proline (20.7 mg, 0.18 mmol) (Advanced Chemtech) was dissolved in 450 μL of a 10% Na2CO3 solution to which 5 mL of EtOH:H2O (2:98) containing 250 μCi of L-[U—14C] □egrada (Moravek, Brea, Calif.) was added. Fmoc-N-hydroxysuccinimide (Fmoc-Osu) (100 mg, 1.5 eq) in 3 mL dimethoxyethane (DME) was added dropwise to the stirring amino acid solution. The reaction was allowed to stir for 12 hr at room temperature and the DME was removed in vacuo. The remaining aqueous solution was diluted with 10 mL H2O and extracted with saturated N-butanol (4×10 mL). The butanol extracts were combined and concentrated to give a pale oil. Residual Fmoc-Osu was removed on silica gel eluting with MeOH:CH2Cl2 (50:50). Crude Fmoc-Proline-OH* was used without further purification in peptide synthesis.
  • Study of ABS201 Oral Bioavailability Using Caco-2 Cell Model. Caco-2 cells, derived from a human colorectal carcinoma, spontaneously differentiate into polarized cells that exhibit well-developed microvilli and brush-border enzymes (78). These features make the cells an excellent model of the human small intestine. A strong correlation between uptake in the Caco-2 cell model and oral bioavailability has been identified (79). Studies that focused on the transport of peptides across Caco-2 cells have identified solute-solvent hydrogen bonds as a major determining factor in the permeability of the peptide. The non-natural amino acid technology is designed to reduce solute-solvent interactions, in particular, water solvation that occurs through hydrogen bonding, hence the current modifications should confer enhanced intestinal absorption in Caco-2 cells. The studies described below are designed to evaluate the potential oral bioavailability of the NT(8-13) analogues and the mechanisms of transport responsible for their uptake.
  • ABS201 is a lead compound for the development of NT(8-13) analogues as novel APDs. ABS201 can therefore function as a prototype for evaluating the cellular uptake of the NT(8-13) analogues. Liquid scintillation counting (LSC) is the preferred method of analysis for these assays, as extraction of the peptide from the cell monolayer is not required and dissolved cell components can be directly analyzed without an extraction protocol that can be inexact, resulting in inconsistent analysis. L-[U—14C] αegrada was used as the radiolabel for these studies. Proline is easily protected at the α-amine for peptide synthesis with the base-labile Fmoc moiety. In addition, Pro10 has not been identified as a major site of cleavage of NT(8-13). NT(8-13) analogues that show antipsychotic potential have not included Pro10 modifications.
  • To examine the occurrence and mechanism of cellular uptake of the NT(8-13) analogues, Caco-2 cells, a well-established model of the intestinal epithelium can be utilized. These studies were designed to provide insight into the potential for oral activity of the peptide analogues. As described above, the NT(8-13) analogues elicit CNS activity after oral administration. They are the first analogues of NT(8-13) to exhibit oral activity, and these preliminary studies should provide information that aids in the development of future peptide analogues with enhanced oral activity.
  • The concentration of ABS201 used for these uptake studies, 200 μM, can be chosen for two distinct reasons. The concentration of a 20 mg/kg dose of peptide, delivered in saline (1 mL/kg), is 24 mM. As gavage dosing insures direct administration into the stomach, a concentration only slightly below 24 mM should be seen by the small intestine. Therefore, the concentration added to the Caco-2 cells is well below that theoretically seen in vivo. In addition, the standard circulating blood volume in the rat is 64 mL/kg (82). After gavage dosing, the concentration of a 20 mg/kg dose of peptide circulating throughout the entire rat is 377 μM. For these reasons, 200 μM is determined to be a physiologically relevant concentration to study ABS201 uptake in vitro.
    • Example 8 Preclinical Studies of ABS201
  • Receptor screening. Three separate concentrations of ABS201 (10−9, 10−7 10−5 M) were screened individually against the following 16 receptors: adrenergic (alpha1, alpha 2, beta), dopamine, histamine (H1, H2, H3), muscarinic (central, peripheral), nicotinic, opioid (nonselective), orphanin, serotonin (transporter, nonselective), monoamine oxidase (A, B). No displacement of the receptors' endogenous substrate were observed. Hence ABS201 does not appear to bind with any of these receptors. In contrast, the ABS201 has nM affinity for the target receptor (NTR1).
  • Liver Receptor Screening (Stanford Research Institute Study B213-06). ABS201 (10−3, 10−2, 0.1 M) was screened against the following liver CYPs: CYP1A2, CYP2B6, CYP2C9, CYP2C19, CYP2D6, CYP3A4. No inhibition of substrate binding at any concentration off ABS201 to these enzymes was observed, indication a lack of potential for drug-drug interactions.
  • Blood Distribution and Metabolite Identification. ABS201 was added to freshly isolated whole rat blood to a concentration of 100 μg/mL, allowed to partition, and the cellular fraction was removed by centrifugation. ABS201 at this concentration distributes almost evenly between the cellular and serum fractions. No metabolites of ABS201 were been detected, consistent with previous experiments in which a very long serum/plasma half-live was demonstrated.
  • Maximum Tolerated Dose. ABS201 was administered to rats at IV doses up to 100 mg/kg and oral doses up to 500 mg/kg. No adverse effects of the compound (body weight loss, mortality, abnormal clinical evaluations panel) were seen out to 48 hr post administration. These experiments thus define lower limits for the MTD of ABS201 at 100 times the ED50 for the compound in antipsychosis and other tests reflective of brain activity.
  • Genetic Toxicology. The micronucleus study, mouse lymphoma study and Ames study were conducted. The micronucleus study evaluated the synthetic NT peptide for its potential to cause genetic damage as manifested by induced micronucleated polychromatic erythrocytes in mouse bone marrow cells. The mouse lymphoma study evaluated the synthetic NT peptide for its potential to cause mutations at the thymidine kinase locus of L5178Y TK±mouse lymphoma cells, both unactivated and under S9 metabolic activation conditions. The Ames study evaluated the the synthetic NT peptide for its potential to cause mutations in the histidine operon of Salmonella typhimurium strains TA98, TA100, TA1535 and TA1537 and the tryptophan operon of Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA, both unactivated and under S9 metabolic activation conditions. Experimental protocols are as follows.
  • In the micronucleus study, 90 CD-1 mice used in the study consisted of 10/sex/group in Groups 1-4 (control, low-, mid-, and high-dose) and 5/sex in the positive control group. Test peptide as administered orally, the positive control, Cyclophosphamide at 80 mg/kg, as administered orally. Approximately 24 and 48 hours after dosing, mice were killed and bone marrow obtained from both femurs. A slide of a bone marrow suspension was prepared, stained with Wright-Giemsa stain, dried, and scored blind. The number of polychromatic erythrocytes (PCE) among the total erythrocytes (PCE+normochromatic erythrocytes (NCE)) were determined for each animal by counting at least 200 erythrocytes. The number of micronucleated polychromatic erythrocytes (MPCE) then were scored for 2000 PCE per animal. A positive result was obtained if there is a positive dose-response trend or statistically significant increase in the number of MPCE at one or more dose levels compared to controls.
  • In the mouse lymphoma study, the standard rat liver S-9 was prepared by inducing male Sprague-Dawley rats with Aroclor-1254 or Phenobarbital and/or β-naphthoflavone. Positive controls included hycanthone methanesulfonate (HYC), which induces mutations at the TK locus without metabolic activation, and 7,12-Dimethylbenz[α]anthracene (DMBA), which induces mutations at the TK locus with metabolic activation. A range finding test was performed to identify the ABS201 concentrations that produce 0-100% toxicity. The positive controls (HYC and DMBA) and five concentrations of ABS201 were used in the assay with and with metabolic activation. Cells were exposed to each ABS dose, and the supernatant obtained, and incubated for 20 and 44 hours. After a 2-day expression period the cultures were cloned with the restrictive agent trifluorothymidine (allows the growth of TK−/−cells only) or vehicle control. The mutation frequency and induced mutation frequency were calculated. A positive response was obtained if at least one culture had a MF that was two times or greater than the average MF of the corresponding solvent control cultures and the response was dose dependent. A confirmatory assay was performed without S-9 activation to confirm Mutation Assay results.
  • In the Ames study, the synthetic NT peptide analogue was evaluated for its potential to cause mutations in the histidine operon of Salmonella typhimurium strains TA98, TA100, TA1535, TA1537 and the tryptophan operon of Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA . In brief, the standard rat liver S-9 was prepared by inducing male Sprague-Dawley rats with Aroclor-1254 or Phenobarbital and/or β-naphthoflavone. Bacterial strains used were Salmonella typhimurium strains TA98, TA100, TA1535, TA1537 and Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA. The positive controls included 2-AA, 2-NF, 9-AA, NaAz, and MMS. A solubility/miscibility assay was conducted to determine the maximum achievable concentration of peptide analogue in the selected solvent (water, DMSO, acetone, or ethanol). A range finding test was performed with and without S-9 activation using tester strains TA100 and WP2 uvrA only to identify ABS201 concentrations that produce 0-100% toxicity. The mutation assay was performed using the four Salmonella typhimurium strains (TA98, TA100, TA1535, TA1537) and the Escherichia coli strain WP2 uvrA strain using the plate incorporation method of treatment. A response was considered positive if either strain TA98 or TA 100 has a dose that produces a mean reversion frequency greater than or equal to two times the mean reversion frequency of the corresponding solvent control plates or if either strain TA 1535, TA 1537 or WP2 uvrA has a dose producing a three-fold or greater increase in the mean reversion frequency compared to the solvent control frequency.
  • Initial data indicate that ABS201 is inactive in the all three assays.
  • hERG Assay. The objective of the hERG study is to assess the effects of the test article on the rapidly activating inward rectifying potassium current (IKr) conducted by hERG (human ether-a-go-go related gene) channels stably expressed in a HEK293 cell line. The method used is as follows. HEK293 cells, stably transfected with hERG cDNA, were used in the study. All experiments were performed at near-physiological temperature (35±2° C.). A positive control (60 nM terfenadine) was applied to two cells (n≧2). Cells were be transferred to the recording chamber and superfused with HB-PS solution. The recording chamber and bathing solution were maintained at a temperature of 35±2° C. using a combination of in-line solution pre-heater, chamber floor heater, and feedback temperature controller. Bath temperature were measured using a thermistor probe.
  • Patch pipettes were made from glass capillary tubing using a P-97 micropipette puller (Sutter Instruments, Calif.). A commercial patch clamp amplifier was used for whole cell recordings. Before digitization, current records were low-pass filtered at one-fifth of the sampling frequency.
  • Cells stably expressing hERG were held at −80 mV. Onset and steady state block of hERG current due to ABS201 were measured using a pulse pattern with fixed amplitudes (conditioning prepulse: +20 mV for 1 sec; repolarizing test ramp to −80 mV (−0.5 V/s) repeated at 5 s intervals. Each recording ended with a final application of a supramaximal concentration of the reference substance (E-4031, 500 nM), to assess the contribution of endogenous currents. The remaining unblocked current was subtracted off-line digitally from the data to determine the potency of ABS201 for hERG inhibition.
  • Initial results indicate that ABS201 is inactive in the hERG study.
  • Pharmacokinetics and Brain Distribution of ABS201. ABS201 was administered in one IV dose (5 mg/kg) or oral dose (50 mg/kg) to rats. At selected time points, blood was removed or brain harvested and the concentration of the peptide analog determined using LC/MS/MS. It was demonstrated that ABS201 could be detected in the blood and brain up to 120 minutes after both IV and oral administration. The amount in the brain was sufficient to saturate NTR-1 to produce the observed behavioral effects.
  • ABS201 was cleared from whole blood in two phases with an initial phase and a second phase where compound was measurable at low levels up to 120 minutes following IV administration of 5 mg/kg; the levels of ABS201 in whole blood were below the LLOD at all times following oral administration of the compound (50 mg/kg); the levels of ABS201 in brain were below the LLOD at all times following IV administration; and measurable quantities of ABS201 were detected in brains of 2 of 3 animals 15 minutes post oral administration of 50 mg/kg.
  • The plasma concentration versus time curve for IV and oral administration of ABS201 are shown in FIGS. 20 and 21. Following IV injection, the mean value of systemic clearance was 2.45 L/hr/kg, which corresponded to 74.02% of rat hepatic blood flow. The mean values of half-life and Vz were 0.29 hr and 0.87 L/kg. ABS201 distributes well into the tissues. The volume of distribution at terminal phase was 0.87±0.27 L/kg, which was similar to the total body water (0.67 L/kg) in the rats. The bioavailability of ABS201 following oral administration was 0.07% when in 0.9% saline solution. The mean value of half-life was 0.99 hr.
  • For pharmacokinetics studies of ABS201 in the brain, plasma samples and brain samples were collected from SD rats at four time points following intravenous infusion of test article ABS201.2HCl. These samples were then used for the determination of plasma and brain drug levels by LC/MS/MS for estimating BBB penetration and pharmacokinetic parameters. Time-course results are shown in FIG. 22. Following a 15 min intravenous infusion of ABS201.2HCl at 100 mg/kg, the value of systemic clearance was 22.77 L/hr/kg, which corresponded to 6.88 fold of rat hepatic blood flow (3.31 L/hr/kg). The value of half-life (T½) for ABS201.2HCl was 0.49 hr. The mean value of Cmax (at 25 minute) following intravenous infusion at a dose of 100 mg/kg was 5459.78 μg/L. The value of AUC0-∞ was 4391.09 hr*μg/L.
  • ABS201.2HCl distributes well into the tissues. The volume of distribution at terminal phase was 16.10 L/kg, which was greater than the total body water (0.67 L/kg) in the rat.
  • Following a 15 min intravenous infusion of ABS201.2HCl at 100 mg/kg, the values of Cmax (at 45 minute) and AUC0-t in brain were 32.93 ng/g and 60.96 hr*ng/g, respectively. The value of half-life (T½) for ABS201.2HCl was 4.85 hr. The brain-to-plasma ratio from 25 min to 135 min following intravenous infusion ranged from 0.0015 to 0.1453. These results demonstrate that ABS201 is selectively taken up into the brain, as it has a significantly longer half-life than in the blood. The brain half-life is in order with the half-lives of the behavioral effect seen for ABS201.
  • The plasma and brain pharmacokinetics of ABS201 was also studied following IV administration of 1 mg/kg and, oral administration of 30 mg/kg of ABS201 to non fasted rats. The results of this study indicated that: ABS201 was rapidly cleared from plasma following IV administration with a t1/2 of about 5 minutes; the levels of the compound decreased below the LLOD by 45 min; the levels of ABS201 were below the LLOD at all times following oral administration; and the levels of ABS201 in brain were below the LLOD at all times following both IV and PO administration.
  • In vitro metabolism and compartmentalization of ABS201. To evaluate the distribution of ABS201 in blood, the extent of protein binding in plasma, and to gain a preliminary assessment of the metabolism of ABS201 in blood and plasma. The results of this study demonstrated: little or no binding of ABS201 to plasma proteins following a 5 or 30 min incubation at 37° C.; no evidence of metabolism of ABS201 in whole blood or plasma following a 5 or 30 min incubation at 37° C.; and a rapid distribution of about 33 percent of ABS201 into blood cellular elements when whole blood was incubated with ABS201 for 5 or 30 min at 37° C.
  • Evaluation of the Site of Uptake of ABS201 from PO Administration Brain. With the goal of ultimately increasing the overall oral bioavailability of ABS201 through formulation, the site of uptake in the gut was evaluated. The objective of this study was to collect plasma samples from SD rats at various time points following intra-stomach, intra-duodenum, intra-jejunum, and intra-colon administration of test article ABS201.2HCl in the in situ looped models. These samples were used for the determination of plasma drug by LC/MS/MS for estimating pharmacokinetic parameters and segmental absorption. The bioavailability of intra-stomach, intra-duodenum, intra-jejunum, intra-colon administration relative to intravenous administration and gavage was calculated. As can be seen in FIG. 23, ABS201 is absorbed almost entirely in the intestine, with intra-duodenum exhibiting the maximal amount of uptake. Virtually no ABS201 is taken up in the stomach.
  • Summary. Substitution of the N-terminal α-azido group of homolysine (Scheme 1) of ABS13 with the methyldesamino derivative 43 (Scheme 2) to produce ABS201 resulted in a molecule possessing important characteristics of a potential antipsychotic. In particular, ABS201 is highly selective for NTR-1 and exhibits effective antipsychotic activity in key rat models of psychosis when administered either IP or orally. ABS201 exhibited a 300% increase in central activity when administered orally, and achieved a more rapid response with oral versus IV injection (these unique attributes are attributable to the desamino modification). ABS201 does not cause catalepsy or induce drug resistance. Initial rat toxicity and mutagenesis experiments have been negative.
  • The pharmacokinetics, compartmentalization, and possible metabolism of ABS201 were evaluated in vitro and in vivo. The results suggest little or no metabolism, and complex pharmacokinetics which indicate that the compound initially undergoes a rapid clearance from blood, followed by a longer lasting, deep compartment phenomenon.
  • Also, the pharmacodynamic response of ABS201 is long acting (2-4 hr) following both IV and PO administration; the acute effects of IV ABS201 are mediated via central nervous system; the compound does not appear to be metabolized upon co-incubation with plasma or whole blood; ABS201 partitions between the aqueous and cellular phases of blood in vitro; the PK profile of ABS201 in whole blood is consistent with a two phase clearance process; and the pharmacodynamic response which has been observed is likewise consistent with a two phase clearance process.
  • ABS201 is preferentially taken up into the brain, presumably through an active transport process, as it is lost from the brain at about 10% the rate that it is lost from the blood. Given the long apparent half life of ABS201 in rat brain (detectable to 6 hours post dosing), and evidence that the drug forms a depot in blood elements (i.e., a slow release delivery system for the drug) the compounds of the invention, such as the semisynthetic peptide ABS201, could be administered on a once or twice daily basis.
    • Example 9 Biological Improvements Resulting from Substitution of —H for —CH3 in Bioactive Peptides
  • A series of amino acid analogues of Arg and Lys have been created. See U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,043,218; 6,358,922; 6,566,330; 6,783,946; 6,858,396. When substituted for Arg8 in NT(8-13) a series of compounds have been generated that possess both antipsychotic and analgesic activity. Examples of these compounds can be found in Table 10 below (ABS202, ABS203, ABS204, ABS206). In addition to the non-natural side chains, it was demonstrated that substitution of a —CH3 for the N-terminal —NH2 resulted in the most active compounds for both indications. See PCT/US2005/021580, filed on Jun. 17, 2005, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/581,333, filed on Jun. 17, 2004.
  • A further set of compounds have been generated in which a terminal —H was substituted for the —CH3 to evaluate the role of the —CH3 in the biological activity of these compounds (ABS226, ABS227, ABS228, ABS230, Table 10). The structures of compounds ABS202 and ABS203 are shown in Table 8. Compounds ABS226 and ABS227 differ from ABS202 and ABS203, respectively, in that the N-terminal —CH3 groups of ABS202 and ABS203 are replaced by —H groups in ABS226 and ABS227. The structure of ABS204 is 30-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-tertLeu-COOH, in which 30 refers to the non-natural residues shown in Scheme 2. The structure of ABS206 is N-Me-Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-tertLeu-COOH. Compounds ABS228 and ABS230 differ from compounds ABS204 and ABS206, respectively, in that the N-terminal —CH3 groups of ABS204 and ABS206 are replaced by —H groups in ABS228 and ABS230.
  • Each of compound ABS226, ABS227, ABS228 and ABS230 was evaluated against its parent compound ABS202, ABS203, ABS204, ABS206, respectively, for antipsychotic and analgesic activity in appropriate rat models. The former activity is most easily monitored by measuring the extent of induced hypothermia (core body temperature loss), which is a measure of NTR-1 binding and agonism and thus antipsychotic activity. Hypothermia is followed routinely over time through insertion of a thermometer probe hooked up to a digital readout box into the anus of the rats. Analgesia is monitored by the hotplate assay, in which hotplate measurements are taken on a walled-in metal surface that is maintained at 52° C. The latency between the time the rat was placed on the surface and when it licks its back paw is measured. If the animal doesn't lick its hind paw in 30 seconds, it is removed and a maximum positive effect (or MPE) of 100% is recorded. Intermediate responses achieve MPEs between 0-100%, with saline controls defined 0% latency.
  • TABLE 10
    Hypothermia Hypothermia % MPE
    Compound1 N-terminus Position 82 (Δ ° C.) (tmax, min) % MPE (tmax, min)
    ABS202 —CH3 hLys-Me −4.00 150 100 45
    ABS226 —H hLys-Me −4.25 150 40 45
    ABS203 —CH3 hLys-Me2 −1.0 150 61 60
    ABS227 —H hLys-Me2 −1.7 135 29 60
    ABS204 —CH3 hLys-Me3 −1.6 150 20 45
    ABS228 —H hLys-Me3 −2.0 120 60 75
    ABS206 —CH3 Lys-Me −1.8 180 56 60
    ABS230 —H Lys-Me −3.8 180 100 30
    1All compounds had had identical 9-13 residues of -Arg(9)-Pro(10)-Tyr(11)-tertLle(12)-Leu(13)-COOH
    2Indicates a particular patented non-natural analogue of Arg or Lys.
  • As seen in Table 10, substitution of —H for —CH3 has an effect in each case. ABS226 has about the same antipsychotic potential as ABS202, but its much smaller analgesic activity is resulting from poorer NTR-2 binding. Thus the compound is more selective for NTR-1 and a better antipsychotic candidate. A similar effect is seen with ABS203 and ABS227. ABS228 has a better analgesic activity than ABS224, hence it is more selective for NTR-2. ABS226 is more active in both potential indications.
  • To summarize, non-natural Arg and Lys amino acids with —H, when substituted for —CH3 or —NH2 in a peptide of biological activity, can produce better pharmaceutical candidates as a result of increased in overall activity of the compounds, or increased selectivity for the receptor subtype of interest.
    • Example 10 Assays for Analgesic Activity of NT Derivatives
  • Animals. Experimentally naïve male Sprague-Dawley rats from Charles River Laboratories, Raleigh, N.C. (230-260 g) or Harlan, Prattville Ala. (240-280 g), were maintained 4 per cage in animal quarters on a regular light/dark cycle (lights on 0600-1800) with ad libitum food and water for approximately 1 week before the experiment. The range of body weights on the 2 days of testing was 230-260 grams. The experiment was done on one day, with animals allowed to recover for three days before experiments are repeated.
  • Peptide Preparation. Test articles are prepared at the desired concentration in saline for either IP injection or gavage administration with N=6 for each dose and vehicle. Morphine (5 mg/kg) is used as a control for certain protocols. Specifically, test peptide was suspended in 0.9% NaCl and injected I.P. in a volume of 1 mL/kg (rat weights, 230-260 g) to give a dose of 10 mg/kg. Apomorphine HCl (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) was dissolved in distilled water at a concentration of 5 mg/mL within 40 minutes of administration for injection at 1 mL/kg S.C. to give a dose of 5 mg/kg. When complete ED50s are determined, dosing range of the peptide will be 10, 3., 1, 0.3, 0.1 of the estimated ED50, covering two log orders of range.
  • The Hotplate Assay. The hotplate assay, a standard rat model for chronic pain (see Le Bars et al., Pharmacol. Rev. 53: 597-652 (2001) and Chapman et al., Pain 22:1-31 (2002)), was performed as follows. A hotplate maintained at 52° C. to 53° C. was enclosed on four sides in a plexiglass chamber that extended 6 in. above the plate. Animals were placed on the plate, and the latency between the time a rat was placed on the surface and when it lifts or licks a back paw (indicative of pain sensation) was determined. Animals are removed immediately at the cutoff latency of 30 seconds. Assays are scored as the percent of maximal possible effect (% MPE) defined as 100%, which corresponds to the rats remaining on the hotplate for 30 seconds without responding. Thus, % MPE are calculated using the following equation: % MPE=[(post-drug latency-pre-drug latency)/(cut-off pre-drug latency)]×100%. N=6 or greater for all experiments.
  • Values for each set of experiments will be submitted to analysis of variance, with dose (vehicle and 5 levels) as the factor. Following significant effects in analysis of variance, each dose will be compared to vehicle by the Newman-Keuls test. An effect will be considered significant if p<0.05.
  • The Tail Flick Assay. Each of 6 rats per experiment were placed in a Plexiglas restraint box. A standard laboratory hot water bath was maintained at 49° C. The distal 3 cm of the rat's tail was submerged into the water, and the time from insertion to tail flick or removal of tail from the water was recorded. Animals are removed immediate4ly at the cutoff latency of 10 seconds. MPEs were calculated, with a MPE of 100% corresponding to the rat's tail remaining in the water bath for 10 seconds. This was repeated 3 times. The tail was dried and allowed to rest for 20 seconds between trials. The rat was then given the appropriate amount of peptide and the experiment repeated at 30 and 60 minutes. Treatment conditions were distributed over the study in a counterbalanced design to control for such factors as calendar period and order of dosing. N=6 or greater for all experiments.
  • Formalin Assay. Six naïve rats were assigned to a single treatment condition, given either a test peptide as detailed above, or saline (control) and placed into Plexiglas observation cages (43 cm×24 cm×20 cm) without bedding material and their behavior monitored for 15 min. Animals were scored every minute on the following scale: 0=forepaw flat on floor, 1=forepaw just touching floor, 2=forepaw held up off of floor, and 3=forepaw licked or bitten. Following this baseline determination, animals were injected with a 5% solution of 37% formaldehyde (50 mL of 5% formaldehyde in sterile saline prepared in 1.0 mL syringes with 26G3/8 needles) subcutaneously into the right forepaw. The animals were immediately be placed into the observation cages, and their behavior recorded over the following 30 minutes. After each experiment, rats were euthanized with CO2 followed by cervical dislocation. An average Pain Rating over time versus the baseline and formalin-only controls for each peptide tested were plotted, and statistical analysis were performed using a one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA). Differences were considered statistically significant at the 5% confidence interval. N=6 or greater for all experiments. A biphasic behavioral response has been established, with an initial phase (approximately 3 minutes after injection) reflecting the initial pain stimulus followed by a secondary phase after about 30 minutes reflecting sensitization due to instigation of inflammatory processes.
  • Chung assay. To assess tactile thresholds, rats are placed in a clear plastic, wire mesh-bottomed cage, divided into individual compartments. Animals are allowed to acclimate and then baseline thresholds are assessed prior to drug treatment. To assess the 50% mechanical threshold for paw withdrawal, von Frey hairs are applied to the plantar mid-hind paw, avoiding the tori (footpads). The eight von Frey hairs used are designated by [log(10*force required to bend hair, mg)] and range from 0.4-15.1 grams (#'s 3.61-5.18). Each hair is pressed perpendicularly against the paw with sufficient force to cause slight bending, and held for approximately 6-8 seconds. A positive response is noted if the paw is sharply withdrawn. Flinching immediately upon removal of the hair is also considered a positive response. Absence of a response (“−”) is cause to present the next consecutive stronger stimulus; a positive response (“+”) is cause to present the next weaker stimulus. Stimuli are presented successively until either six data points are collected, or the maximum or minimum stimulus is reached. If a minimum stimulus is reached and positive responses still occurred, the threshold sis assigned an arbitrary minimum value of 0.25 grams; if a maximum stimulus is presented and no response occurred, a maximum threshold value of 15 grams is assigned. If a change in response occurs, either “−” to “+” or “+” to “−”, causing a change in the direction of stimulus presentation from descending to ascending or vice-versa, four additional data points are collected subsequent to the change. The resulting pattern of responses are tabulated and the 50% response threshold computed using the formula: log (threshold, mg×10)=Xf+kd; where:
      • Xf=value of the last von Frey hair applied;
      • k=correction factor based on pattern of responses (from calibration table)
      • d=mean distance in log units between stimuli.
        Based on observations on normal, un-operated rats and sham-operated rats, the cutoff of a 15.1-g hair is selected as the upper limit for testing.
    Example 11 ABS201 as a Potential Analgesic
  • The antipsychotic and hypothermic effects of NT and derivatives are mediated through NTR-1 agonism while analgesic effects are mediated through NTR-2 agonism. To be a viable analgesic, a NT derivative should in vitro bind with high affinity to NTR-2 and in vivo be orally available and stable. ABS201 fulfills all of these requirements—having sub-micromolar NTR-2 affinity prolonged plasma stability and orally bioavailability as shown in Table 11.
  • TABLE 11
    Indication NT[8-13] ABS201
    NTR-1 receptor binding 0.21 ± 0.01 3.92 ± 0.01
    (ED50, nM)1
    Functional Yes Yes
    NTR-1 Agonist2
    NTR-2 receptor binding  4.1 ± 0.01 N.D.
    (ED50, nM)1
    Functional Yes Yes
    NTR-2 Agonist2
    Plasma stability 5 >10,000
    T1/2 (min)3
    Inhibits locomotor CNS administration CNS, IP, Oral
    activity4 Administration
    Hyperlocomotion CNS administration CNS, IP, Oral
    Inhibition4 Administration
    Catalepsy4 No No
    Toxicity5 — No
    (>100 × ED50)
    Dose Tolerance6 — No
    1Competitive NTR binding affinities versus radiolabeled NT[8-13][103]
    2Induction of cAMP and inositol phosphate production (Orwig, Ph.D. dissertation, 2005).
    3Quantitative MALDI-MS assay developed in our laboratory [53].
    4Behavioral assay methods as described in [103].
    5Single acute dose at 100x ED50 administered I.P. [unpublished]
    610x ED50 administered daily over 5 days. [103].
  • ABS201 also exhibits analgesic activity as indicated by % MPE in the hotplate assay comparable in extent and duration to morphine (FIG. 24). Of interest, however, are differences in the animals' affect after administration of these peptides. Rats given morphine looked “drugged”, becoming more rigid and completely unresponsive to environmental stimuli, while animals give ABS201 appeared simply to be relaxed. The rats do not become tolerant to the analgesic activity of ABS201 as rats dosed for five days straight show statistically identical % MPEs as when initially dosed (FIG. 25). This is especially noteworthy as the rats are not experimentally naïve by the end of the dose time course, which can result in them learning to avoid the hotplate and mask the potential for analgesia. Finally, the analgesic activity of ABS201 is not linked to its hypothermic effect since the two do not show parallel kinetics—specifically the analgesic effect wears off while the hypothermic effect is still strong. This clearly indicates that the effects are mediated by different receptors. Overall, these data indicate the usefulness of ABS201 as a potential analgesic and antipsychotic.
    • Example 12 Analgesic Peptides Having Side Chain Guanidinium Groups
  • By virtue of the fact that ABS201 binds both NTR-1 and -2 with high affinity, there is a chance that effects associated with NTR-1 binding may make the peptide less desirable as an analgesic. These effects include induction of systemic hypothermia in rats, which is actually a very small effect in humans (D. Feifel, personal communication), and antipsychotic potency, which may not be undesirable. A peptide highly selective for NTR-2 that maintains all of the favorable attributes of ABS201 would be a “cleaner” analgesic candidate.
  • In the process of developing an NTR-2 selective ligand, the peptides shown in FIG. 26 were evaluated. These peptides exhibited enhanced NTR-2 to NTR-1 binding affinities, and the relative selectivity for the two receptors are provided in Table 12.
  • TABLE 12
    NTR-1/NTR-2
    Peptide NTR-1 (nM) NTR-2 (nM) selectivity
    NT[8-13] 0.21 ± 0.01  4.1 ± 0.01 19.5
    ABS1 0.38 ± 0.07  0.7 ± 0.02 1.8
    ABS13  5.7 ± 0.37 11.1 ± 0.1  1.9
    ABS201 11.2 ± 0.3  n/d n/d
    ABS15 0.4 ± 0.1 0.9 ± 0.2 2.5
    ABS16  0.3 ± 0.05 0.67 ± 0.07 2.2
    ABS17 0.25 ± 0.07 0.3 ± 0.1 1.2
    ABS19 1.2 ± 0.7 0.23 ± 0.05 0.19
    1Competitive
  • Since NT[8-13] has a 20-fold preference for NTR-1 binding over NTR-2 (Table 12), it is less useful as an NTR-2 selective ligand. However, the data for peptides ABS1, ABS13, and ABS201 indicate that there is a structure-binding effect in varying the α-amino group. Changing the polar —NH2 (which is protonated at physiological pH significantly adding to its hydrophilicity) of ABS1 to nonpolar, uncharged —N3 (ABS13) resulted in about a 10-fold improvement of NTR-2 to NTR-1 selectivity. In addition, as the arginine side chains get larger and more nonpolar, significantly better binding to NTR-2 resulted. The differences in the arginine side-chain binding site of NTR-2 is illustrated in the progression of ABS15, ABS16, ABS17, ABS19. ABS19 has a 5-fold selectivity for NTR-2, and an overall selectivity improvement of about 100-fold over NT[8-13]. In addition, significant loss of receptor binding affinity is tolerated in this system as ABS201, which binds 50-fold less effectively than it's parent, still exhibited saturable effects in the rat schizophrenic models when given orally. ABS201 is about three times as physiologically active as ABS13 in the rat behavioral models of schizophrenia when administered orally, clearly defining this as the best substitution for the α-amino group. Based on this rationale, peptides designed to be better NTR-2 selective ligands are created and their structures are presented in FIG. 27. All of these peptides contain R=Arg-Pro-Tyr-tertleu-Leu-COOH and the N-terminal methyl group of ABS201, which are required for the potential of oral activity. These peptides also incorporate added steric bulk around the guanidinium group, elements that demonstratively improve NTR-2 versus NTR-1 selectivity versus NT[8-13] (as does the N-terminal methyl group). Desirable analgesic peptides are those which (1)exhibit analgesic activity comparable to or better than ABS201 in the hotplate, tail flick and formalin assays when IP injected, (2) exhibit activity when orally administered, (3) have desirable NTR-1 and NTR-2 binding activities, and (4) exhibit plasma stability.
    • Example 13 Analgesic NT Peptide Analogues
  • The process of identification of ABS201 enabled definition of the key structural parameters necessary for biological stability and blood brain barrier crossing. Accordingly, a group of neurotensin (NT)[8-13] derivatives that incorporate structural elements that may enhance IP or oral bioavailability were created. Within these parameters, other proprietary structural changes were incorporated that can affect various pharmacological and behavioral parameters relevant to the potential development as therapeutic agents. In sum, peptides with potential for (1) enhanced binding affinities for their receptors, e.g. enhanced binding and selectivity (e.g. NT-derivatives with selectivity for brain NTR-2 have analgesic activity, while those with selectivity for NTR-1 have antipsychotic activity); (2) enhanced biological barrier crossings; (3) enhanced stability; and (4) feasible synthetic costs were identified.
  • Specifically, chemical changes to the established NT[8-13] derivative included incorporation of an non-natural amino acid residue at position 8. The new peptides were designed to retain the structural elements of the antipsychotic lead ABS201 that are necessary for oral activity while varying the Arg(8) residue and moiety at the N-terminus. Peptides with enhanced analgesic activity, i.e. predicted to have NTR-2 selectivity, were screened via IP injection in the rat hotplate model of analgesia as described above. Initial screening experiments of five peptides using the three different assays for analgesic activity described above indicated that the assays yielded comparable relative activity, with the hotplate assay being the most sensitive. The IP dose chosen was designed to produce a maximal response from active compounds as measured by the % MPE (Maximal Positive Effect). An MPE of 100% indicates that the rat did not feel pain for the extent of time on the hotplate, using a cutoff of 30 seconds. Tmax indicates the time after dosing in which a maximum response was observed. The tmax for all compounds were recorded as this gave an indication of the duration of each compound's analgesic effect. Compounds that exhibited a % MPE of 100% were evaluated with oral dosing. Table 13 provides the sequences of the peptides tested, selectivity for the NTR-1 or NTR-2 as indicated by ability to induce hypothermia, and the results of the Hotplate assay. Compounds with an asterisk exhibited significant activity in the hotplate asay.
  • TABLE 13
    Analgesic Activity of ABS201 Derived Compounds1
    Hypo Hypo MPE Tmax MPE Tmax
    Peptide* N-terminus3 Peptide Sequence2 (I.P.) Tmax (oral) (I.P.)4 (I.P.)4 (oral)5 (Oral)5
    ABS201* CH3 hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −5.20 150.00 −2.58 100  15-45 39  30
    ABS202* CH3 1-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.00 150.00 −2.15 100  30-75 52  45
    ABS203 CH3 2-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.00 150.00 ND 60  60 ND ND
    ABS204 CH3 3-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.60 150.00 ND 19  45 ND ND
    ABS205* CH3 Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.00 195.00 −2.50 86  15-30 66  30
    ABS206 CH3 4-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.80 180.00 ND 55  60 ND ND
    ABS207* CH3 5-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.90 165.00 −1.50 84  45 36  60
    ABS208* CH3 6-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.80 135.00 −0.20 67 135 26 105
    ABS209 CH3 Orn-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.55 195.00 ND 89  60 IP IP
    ABS210* CH3 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.18 180.00 −2.13 82  60 49  75
    ABS211* CH3 8-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.20 210.00 −1.15 100  15, 16 120
     45-75
    ABS212* CH3 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.20 240.00 −2.45 100  30-135 39 120
    ABS213 CH3 Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.65 180.00 ND 48  30 ND ND
    ABS214 CH3 10-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.20 195.00 −2.40 100  30-75 30  15
    ABS215 CH3 11-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.45 165.00 ND 63  45 ND ND
    ABS216 CH3 12-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.83 195.00 ND 74 120 ND ND
    ABS217 CH3 13-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.80  90.00 ND 8  45 ND ND
    ABS218 CH3 18-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.88 180.00 ND 79  45 ND ND
    ABS220 CH3 15-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.30 180.00 −1.30 55  45 36  15
    ABS221 CH3 16-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.80 165.00 ND 76  60 ND ND
    ABS224 CH3 alkene-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.30 195.00 ND 45 150 ND ND
    ABS501 CH3 15-Arg-Pro-Tyr-Ile-Leu −4.20 100.00 ND ND ND ND ND
    ABS700 Boc-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.05  90.00 ND 51  90 ND ND
    ABS225* H hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.00 180.00 −1.20 100  15-45 38  30
    ABS226 H 1-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.55 150.00 −0.48 59  45 32  15
    ABS227 H 2-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.70 135.00 ND 29  60 ND ND
    ABS228 H 3-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.98 120.00 ND 55  75 ND ND
    ABS229 H Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.85 105.00 ND 48  60 ND ND
    ABS230* H 4-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.75 180.00 −1.10 100  30 36  30
    ABS231 H 5-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.38 135.00 −1.63 100  30-60 20  30
    ABS232* H 6-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.87 240.00 −0.38 84  45 49  60
    ABS233 H Orn-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.40 180.00 ND 51  45 ND ND
    ABS234* H 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.18 240.00 −0.83 100  15-120 39  75
    ABS235 H 8-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.58 165.00 −2.18 100  30-75 20  60
    ABS236 H 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.37 180.00 ND 100  30-60 IP IP
    ABS237 H Arg-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.85 165.00 ND 50  30 ND ND
    ABS238 H 10-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.80 165.00 −2.08 100  30, 37  30
     60-75
    ABS239 H 11-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.53 165.00 −0.78 92  15 32  60
    ABS240 H 12-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.55 165.00 ND 37  45 ND ND
    ABS241 H 13-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.35 135.00 −0.75 95  60 IP IP
    ABS242 H 18-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.65 135.00 ND 76  30 ND ND
    ABS243 H 19-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −2.38 135.00 ND 79  60 ND ND
    ABS244 H 15-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −4.25 165.00 −1.50 82  45 26  30
    ABS245 H 16-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −3.13 165.00 −1.27 50  45 ND ND
    ABS246 H 17-Arg-Pro-Tyr-t-Leu-Leu −1.68 165.00 ND 80  45 ND ND
    1Hot plate measurements were takend on a walled-in metal surface maintained at 52 C. The latency between the time the rat was placed on the surface and when it licks its back paw is measured. Animals are removed immediately at the cutoff latency of 30 sec, which corresponds to a %MPE of 100%.
    2Side chain residue at 8-position as defined in Scheme 3.
    3Group substituted for the α-amino group.
    4%MPE and Tmax of %MPE for compound administered IP at 10 mg/kg.
    5%MPE and Tmax of %MPE for compound administered orally at 20 mg/kg.
    ND = not determined, IP = in progress
  • Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00026
  • Initial screens of all peptides included (1) evaluating their analgesic ability when dosed IP or orally (indicative of NTR-2 agonism) and (2) evaluating their ability to induce hypothermia when IP, a secondary effect of NTR-1 agonist activity. Peptides that exhibited significant analgesic activity, that is, greater than a set threshold level, when IP dosed were evaluated with oral dosing. The peptides that have high analgesic and low hypothermia-inducing activity when dosed orally, indicating high selectivity for NTR-2, were preferred. However, peptides with high hypothermia activity may show significantly greater oral bioavailability and were also preferred as they were better analgesic candidates, particularly if side effects of NTR-1 binding were minor. A third parameter was that IP analgesics may have different utilities, and potencies, than orally administered peptides. Defined dose-response curves were also considered in selecting an analgesic candidate. Accordingly, the different parameters were weighed, and peptides that were not as “good” at others under the above analysis while showing overall similar profiles were not selected. A secondary screening that involved evaluating analgesia when dosed orally was performed, and the best peptides were subjected to a full dose-response analysis.
  • Based on the above criteria, peptides ABS201, ABS202, ABS205, ABS207, ABS208, ABS210, ABS211, ABS212, ABS220, ABS225, ABS230,ABS232, ABS234 and ABS239 were identified as preferred analgesic peptides. The structures for these peptides are summarized in the following table.
  • TABLE 14
    N-terminus
    Peptide (Rα) C-terminus*
    ABS201 CH3- hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS202 CH3- 1-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS205 CH3- Lys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS207 CH3- 5-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS208 CH3- 6-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS210 CH3- 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS211 CH3- 8-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS212 CH3- 9-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS220 CH3- 15-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS225 H- hLys-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS230 H- 4-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS232 H- 6-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS234 H- 7-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    ABS239 H- 11-Arg-Pro-Tyr-tLeu-Leu-COOH
    *See Scheme 3 above for the structure of the N-terminal moiety.
    • Example 14 Evaluation of the Analgesic Effects of Selected NT-analogues
  • The analgesic effects of ABS201, ABS205, ABS210, ABS212, and ABS220 administered by gavage at a dose of 20 mg/kg are shown in FIG. 28. These results indicate that ABS201, ABS205, ABS210 and ABS220 were as much or more active than ABS212 when given orally. The analgesic effects of ABS232 and ABS239 as determined using the hotplate assay are illustrated in FIGS. 29 A and B.
  • When administed by I.P. injection, however, the most active peptide was ABS212. The analgesic property of ABS212 was compared with that of morphine using the hotplate, tail flick and formalin assays. Results obtained from the hotplate assay and the formalin assays are shown in FIGS. 30 A and B, respectively, while results obtained from the tail flick assay is summarized in Table 15 below.
  • ABS212 at an approximately equal molar ratio exhibits analgesic activity (% MPE) in the hotplate assay comparable or better in extent and duration to morphine (FIG. 30A). Of interest, however, are differences in the animals' affect after administration of these peptides. Rats given morphine looked “drugged,” becoming more rigid and completely unresponsive to environmental stimuli, while animals give ABS212 appeared simply to be relaxed. In addition, the rats do not become tolerant to the analgesic activity of ABS212 as rats dosed for five days straight show statistically identical % MPEs as when initially dosed (data not shown). This is especially noteworthy as the rats are not experimentally naïve by the end of the dose time course, which can result in them learning to avoid the hotplate and mask the potential for analgesia. FIGS. 30B and C show the dose response data for ABS212 when administered IP or orally, respectively. Approximate ED50s for IP and oral doses are 2.5-5 mg/kg and 30-40 mg/kg respectively.
  • In the formalin assay, ABS212 provides a full analgesic effect for the time course of the experiment (FIG. 31A). As also seen in the hotplate assay, morphine at approximately equimolar concentrations, loses activity after 30 minutes. ABS212, however, has a more pronounced analgesic effect when administered by I.P. injection. FIGS. 31 B and C show the dose responses determined using the formalin assay for I.P. and oral administration, respectively. Approximate IP and oral ED50s are in the same range as the assays performed above. The analgesic activity ABS212 appears to be highly selective for NTR-2 as very little hypothermia (a secondary effect of NTR-1 binding) is elicited from this peptide at therapeutic analgesic doses. (In vitro receptor binding studiers are in progress).
  • In the tail flick assay, ABS212 exhibits statistically significant analgesia at 30 minutes, with an apparent greater effect at 60 minutes, when compared to saline (see Table 15). ABS212 statistically compares to morphine.
  • TABLE 15
    Comparison of ABS212 (10 mg/kg) to Morphine (5 mg/kg) and
    Saline in the Tail Flick Assay
    Treatment MPE (0 min) MPE (30 min) MPE (60 min)
    Saline −0.37 +/− 0.57   9.7 +/− 5.6 14.6 +/− 7.1 
    Morphine 0.03 +/− 0.05 63.7 +/− 41.9 67.5 +/− 25.8
    ABS212 1.16 +/− 0.05 75.4 +/− 28.4 88.7 +/− 19.6
  • FIGS. 32A and B show the dose response data for ABS212 when administered I.P. and orall, respectively, in the tail flick assay. Approximate IP and oral ED50s are in the same range as seen in the above assay. FIG. 33 demonstrate that ABS212 is highly active in the Chung model for neuropathic pain when administered by I.P. injection. In sum, ABS212 is a highly effective analgesic in the four key rat models for the spectrum of pain states: acute (hotplate, tail flick), chronic (formalin) and neuropathic (Chung).
    • Example 15 Preclinical Characterization of ABS212
  • To evaluate the pharmacokinetics of ABS212, plasma samples were collected from Sprague-Dawley (SD) rats at various time points following intravenous and oral administration of test article ABS212. These samples were used for the determination of plasma parent drug concentrations by LC/MS/MS for estimating pharmacokinetic parameters and oral bioavailability. The concentration versus time curve for IV and oral administration of ABS212 are shown in FIGS. 34 A and B.
  • Following IV bolus injection of ABS-212.2HCL at 5, 2.5 and 1 mg/kg, the mean±SD values of systemic clearance were 0.40±0.05, 0.40±0.17 and 1.07±0.15 L/hr/kg, which corresponded to 12.08%, 12.08% and 32.33% of rat hepatic blood flow (3.31 L/hr/kg), respectively. The mean±SD values of half-life (T1/2) for ABS-212.2HCL were 0.29±0.13, 0.28±0.11 and 0.28±0.08 hr. ABS-212.2HCL dose not distributes well into the tissues. The volume of distribution at terminal phase following IV administration at nominal doses of 5, 2.5 and 1 mg/kg were 0.16±0.06, 0.15±0.01 and 0.43±0.15 L/kg, respectively, which were less than the total body water (0.67 L/kg) in the rats. The dose-normalized AUC(0-∞) was 2.68:2.92:1 at respective doses of 5, 2.5, and 1 mg/kg, while the dose-normalized Cmax was 2.68:2.46:1 at doses of 5, 2.5, and 1 mg/kg, respectively, suggesting there was a saturable elimination when given high dosage.
  • Following oral administration of ABS-212.2HCL at a dose of 50 mg/kg, the mean±SD values of Cmax and Tmax for ABS-212.2HCL were 27.08±11.55 μg/L and 0.14±0.05 hr, respectively; the mean±SD values of AUC(0-∞) and half-life (T1/2) were 53.06±39.65 hr*μg/L and 1.42±0.87 hr, respectively. The mean±SD value of bioavailability for ABS-212.2HCL was 0.11±0.08% with choice of 1 mg/kg group as IV dose data.
    • Example 16 Synthesis of 5-oxo-Pro-His-Trp-Ser-Tyr-DLeu-Leu-(Nω-Me-Arg)-Pro-NHEt.3 TFA (2)
  • A sample of 5-oxo-Pro-His-Trp-Ser-Tyr-DLeu-Leu-Orn-Pro-NHEt.3 TFA (1) (100 mg, 0.066 mmole) was dissolved in 10 mL of acetonitrile/methanol (2:1 v/v), to which was added 1,2-dimethylisothiourea hydriodide (20 mg, 0.08 mmole, 1.2 eq) and triethylamine (33 mg, 0.33 mmole, 5 eq). The solution was stirred for 14 days at 40° C. The solution was then concentrated, purified by HPLC, and lyophilized to yield 5-oxo-Pro-His-Trp-Ser-Tyr-DLeu-Leu-(Nω-Me-Arg)-Pro-NHEt.3 TFA (2) as a fluffy, colorless solid. MS (m/e)+=1222.29, calc.=1222.66.
    • Example 17 Synthesis of butyryl-His-DPhe-(Nω-Et)Arg-Trp-Sar-NH2.3 TFA (4)
  • A sample of butyryl-His-DPhe-Orn-Trp-Sar-NH2.3 TFA (3) (100 mg, 0.092 mmole) was dissolved in 10 mL of acetonitrile/methanol (2:1 v/v), to which was added 1-ethyl-2-methylisothiourea hydriodide (113 mg, 0.46 mmole, 5 eq) and triethylamine (92 mg, 0.92 mmole, 10 eq). The solution was stirred for 2 days as 40° C. The solution was then concentrated, purified by HPLC, and lyophilized to yield butyryl-His-DPhe-(Nω-Et)Arg-Trp-Sar-NH2.3 TFA (4) as a fluffy, colorless solid. MS (m/e)+=812.63, calc.=812.44.
    • List of Documents
  • The following list of documents provide background information, synthetic information, scientific information, protocols and related disclosures. The complete text of each document is incorporated herein as an integral part of this application as if it were fully repeated, and all publications, patents and patent applications cited herein are herein incorporated by reference.
  • (1) Rowley, M., Bristow, L. J., and Hutson, P. H., “Current and novel approaches to the drug treatment of schizophrenia.” J Med Chem. 44: 477-501, 2001.
  • (2) Kitabgi, P. and Nemeroff, C. B. Eds. “The Neurobiology of Neurotensin.” Ann NY Acad Sci. 668: 1-374, 1992.
  • (3) Kapur, S., Remington, G., Jones, C., Wilson, A., DaSilva, J., Houle, S., and Zipursky, R. “High levels of dopamine D2 receptor occupancy with low dose haloperidol treatment: a PET study.” Am J Psych. 153: 948-50, 1996.
  • (4) Alvir, J. M. J., Lieberman, J. A., Safferman, A. Z., Schwimmer, J. L., and Schaff, J. A. “Clozapine-induced agranulocytosis: incidence and risk factors in the United States.” New Eng J Med. 329: 162, 1993.
  • (5) Andreasen, N. C., Arndt, S., Swayze, V., Cizadlo, T., Flaum, M., Oleary, D., Ehrhardt, J C., and Yuh, W. T. C. “Thalamic abnormalities in schizophrenia visualized through magnetic resonance imaging averaging.” Science. 266: 294-98,1994.
  • (6) Lawrie, S. M. and Abukmeil, S. S. “Brain abnormality in schizophrenia. A systematic and quantitative review of volumetric magnetic resonance imaging studies.” Br J Psych. 55: 433-40, 1998.
  • (7) Silberweig, D. A., Stem, E., Frith, C., Cahill, C., Holmes, A., Grootoonk, S., Seaward, J., McKenna, P., Chua, S. E., and Schnorr, L. “A functional neuroanatomy of hallucinations in schizophrenia.” Nature. 378: 176-79, 1995.
  • (8) McGaffin, P. Owen, M. J., and Farmer, A. E. “Genetic basis of schizophrenia.” Lancet. 346: 678-82, 1995.
  • (9) Carlsson, A. and Lindquist, M. “Effect of chlorpromazine and haloperidol on formation of methoxytyramine and normetanephrine in mouse brain.” Acta Pharmacol Toxicol. 20: 140-44, 1963.
  • (10) Creese, I., Burt, D. R., and Snyder, S. H. “Dopamine receptor binding predicts clinical and pharmacological potencies of antischizophrenic drugs.” Science. 192: 481-83, 1976.
  • (11) Nyberg, S., Nakashima, Y., Nordstrom, A. L., Hallidin, C., and Farde, L. “Positron emission tomography of in vivo binding characteristics of atypical antipsychotic drugs: review of D2 and 5-HT2 receptor occupancy studies and clinical response.” Br J Psych. 168 (suppl 29): 40-44, 1996.
  • (12) Carraway, R. and Leeman, S. E “The isolation of a new hypotensive peptide, neurotensin, from bovine hypothalami.” J Biol Chem. 248: 6854-61, 1973.
  • (13) Bissette, G., Nemeroff, C. B., Loosen, P. T., Prange Jr., A. J., and Lipton, M A. “Hypothermia and intolerance to cold induced by intracisternal administration of the hypothalamic peptide neurotensin.” Nature. 262: 607-9, 1976.
  • (14) Nemeroff, C. B., Osbahr, A. J., Manberg, P. J., Ervin, G. N., and Prange Jr., A J. “Alterations in nociception and body temperature after intracisternal administration of neurotensin, β-endorphin, other endogenous peptides, and morphine.” Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 76: 5368-71, 1979.
  • (15) Skoog, K. M., Cain, S. T., and Nemeroff, C B. “Centrally administered neurotensin suppresses locomotor hyperactivity induced by d-amphetamine but not by scopolamine or caffeine.” Neuropharm. 25:777-82, 1986.
  • (16) Nemeroff, C. B., Bissette, G., Prange Jr., A. J., Loosen, P. T., Barlow, T. S., and Lipton, M. A. “Neurotensin: central nervous system effects of a hypothalamic peptide.” Brain Res. 128: 485-96, 1977.
  • (17) Kitabgi, P., Checler, F., Mazella, J., and Vincent, J. P. “Pharmacology and biochemistry of neurotensin receptors.” Rev Clin Basic Pharmacol. 5: 397-486, 1985.
  • (18) Carraway, R. and Leeman, S E. “The amino acid sequence of a hypothalamic peptide, neurotensin.” J Biol Chem. 250: 1907-11, 1975.
  • (19) Carraway, R. and Leeman, S E. “Structural requirements for the biological activity of neurotensin, a new vasoactive peptide.” Edited by R. Walter and J. Meienhofer. Peptides: Chemistry, Structure, and Biology. Ann Arbor: Ann Arbor Science, 1975, p. 679-85.
  • (20) Tanaka, K., Masu, M., and Nakanishi, S. “Structure and functional expression of the cloned rat neurotensin receptor.” Neuron. 4: 847-54, 1990.
  • (21) Vita, N., Laurent, P., Lefort, S., Chalon, P., Dumont, X., Kaghad, M., Gully, D., Le Fur, G., Ferrara, P., and Caput, D. “Cloning and expression of a complementary DNA encoding a high affinity human neurotensin receptor.” FEBS Lett. 317: 139-42, 1993.
  • (22) Hermans, E. and Maloteaux, J. “Mechanisms of regulation of neurotensin receptors.” Pharmacol Ther. 79: 89-104., 1998.
  • (23) Vincent, J. P. “Neurotensin receptors: binding properties, transduction pathways, and structure.” Cell Mol Neurobiol. 15: 501-12, 1995.
  • (24) Chalon, P., Vita, N., Kaghad, M., Guillemot, M., Bonnin, J., Delpech, B., Le Fur, G., Ferrara, P., and Caput, D. “Molecular cloning of a levocabastine-sensitive neurotensin binding site.” FEBS Lett. 386: 91-4, 1996.
  • (25) Vita, N., Oury-Donat, F., Chalon, P., Guillemot, M., Kaghad, M., Bachy, A., Thurneyssen, O., Garcia, S., Poinot-Chazel, C., Casellas, P., Keane, P., Le Fur, G., Maffrand, J. P., Soubrie, P., Caput, D., and Ferrara, P. “Neurotensin is an antagonist of the human neurotensin NT2 receptor expressed in Chinese hamster ovary cells.” Eur J Pharmacol. 360: 265-72, 1998.
  • (26) Vincent, J. P., Mazella, J., and Kitabgi, P. “Neurotensin and neurotensin receptors.” Trends Pharm Sci. 20: 302-9, 1999.
  • (27) Mazella, J., Zsurger, N., Navarro, V., Chabry, J., Kaghad, M., Caput, D., Ferrara, P., Vita, N., Gully, D., Maffrand, J. P., and Vincent, J. P. “The 100 k-Da neurotensin receptor is gp95/sortilin, a non-G-protein-coupled receptor.” J Biol Chem. 273: 26273-6, 1998.
  • (28) Binder, E. B., Kinkead, B., Owens, M. J., and Nemeroff, C. B. “The role of neurotensin in the pathophysiology of action of antipsychotic drugs.” Biol Psych. 50: 856-72, 2001.
  • (29) Binder, E. B., Kinkead, B., Owens, M. J., and Nemeroff, C. B. “Neurotensin and dopamine interactions.” Pharm Reviews. 53: 453-86, 2001.
  • (30) Quirion, R., Rowe, W. B., Lapchak, P. A., Araujo, D. M., and Beaudet, A. “Distribution of neurotensin receptors in mammalian brain. What it is telling us about its interactions with other neurotransmitter systems.” Ann NY Acad Sci. 668: 109-19, 1992.
  • (31) Kinkead, B., Binder, E. B., and Nemeroff, C. B. “Does neurotensin mediate the effects of antipsychotic drugs?” Biol Psychiatry. 46: 340-51, 1999.
  • (32) Garver, D. L., Bissette, G., Yao, J. K., and Nemeroff, C. B. “Relation of CSF neurotensin concentrations to symptoms and drug response of psychotic patients.” Am J Psych. 148: 484-88, 1991.
  • (33) Breslin, N. A., Suddath, R. L., Bissette, G., Nemeroff, C. B., Lowrimore, P., and Weinberger, D. R. “CSF concentrations of neurotensin in schizophrenia: An investigation of clinical and biochemical correlates.” Schizophr Res. 12: 35-41, 1994.
  • (34) Sharma, R. P., Janicak, P. G., Bissette, G., and Nemeroff, C. B. “CSF neurotensin concentrations and antipsychotic treatment in schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder.” Am J Psych. 154: 1019-21, 1997.
  • (35) Kitabgi, P., Poustis, C., Granier, C., Van Rietschoten, J., Rivier, J., Morgat, J. L., and Freychet, P. “Neurotensin binding to extraneural and neural receptors: comparison with biological activity and structure-activity relationships.” Mol Pharmacol. 18: 11-19, 1980.
  • (36) Fuxe, K., Von Euler, G., Agnati, L. F., Merlo Pich, E., O'Connor, W. T., Tanganelli, S., et al. “Intermembrane interactions between neurotensin receptors and dopamine D2 receptors as a major mechanism for the neuroleptic-like action of neurotensin.” Ann NY Acad Sci. 668: 186-204, 1992.
  • (37) Li, X. M., Ferraro, L., Tanganelli, S., O'Connor, W. T., Hasselrot, U., Ungerstedt, U., et al. “Neurotensin peptides antagonistically regulate postsynaptic dopamine D2 receptors in rat nucleus accumbens: A receptor binding and microdialysis study.” J Neural Trans. 102: 125-37, 1995.
  • (38) Binder, E. B., Kinkead, B., Owens, M. J., Kilts, C. D., and Nemeroff, C. B. “Enhanced neurotensin neurotransmission is involved in the clinically relevant behavioral effects of antipsychotic drugs: evidence from animal models of sensorimotor gating.” J Neurosci. 21: 601-8, 2001.
  • (39) Al-Rodhan, N. R., Richelson, E., Gilbert, J. A., McCormick, D. J., Kanba, K. S. Pfenning, M. A., Nelson, A., Larson, E. W., and Yaksh, T. L. “Structure-antinociceptive activity of neurotensin and some novel analogues in the periaqueductal gray region of the brainstem.” Brain Res. 557(1-2): 227-35, 1991.
  • (40) Pettibone, D. J., Hess, J. F., Hey, P. J., Jacobson, M. A., Leviten, M., Lis, E. V., Mallorga, P. J., Pascarella, O. M., Snyder, M. A., Williams, J. B., and Zeng, Z. “The effects of deleting the mouse neurotensin receptor NTR1 on central and peripheral responses to neurotensin.” J Pharm Exp Ther. 300: 305-313, 2001.
  • (41) Tyler-McMahon, B. M., Stewart, J. A., Farinas, F., McCormick, D. J., and Richelson, E. “Highly potent neurotensin analog that causes hypothermia and antinociception.” Eur J Pharmacol. 390: 107-11, 2000.
  • (42) Farra, C. D., Sarret, P., Navarro, V., Botto, J. M., Mazella, J., and Vincent, J. P. “Involvement of the neurotensin receptor subtype NTR3 in the growth effect of neurotensin on cancer cell lines.” Int J Cancer. 92: 503-9, 2001.
  • (43) Moody, T. W., Chiles, J., Casibang, M., Moody, E., Chan, D., and Davis, T. P. “SR48692 is a neurotensin receptor antagonist which inhibits the growth of small cell lung cancer cells.” Peptides. 22: 109-15, 2001.
  • (44) Iwase, K., Evers, B. M., Hellmich, M, R., Kim, H. J., Higashide, S., Gully, D., Thompson, J. C., and Townsend Jr., C. M. “Inhibition of neurotensin-induced pancreatic cancer growth by a nonpeptide neurotensin receptor antagonist, SR48692.” Cancer. 79: 1787-93, 1997.
  • (45) Schimpff, R. M., Avard, C., Fenelon, G., Lhiaubet, A. M., Tenneze, L., Vidailbet, M., and Rostene, W. “Increased plasma neurotensin concentrations in patients with Parkinson's disease.” J Neurol Neuro Psych. 70: 784-6, 2001.
  • (46) Boules, M., Warrington, L., Fauq, A., McCormick, D., and Richelson, E. “Antiparkinson-like effects of a novel neurotensin analog in unilaterally 6-hydroxydopamine lesioned rats.” Eur J Pharmacol. 428: 227-33, 2001.
  • (47) Beeson, C. C. and Dix, T. A. “Thermodynamic description of a contact and solvent-separated ion pair as a function of solvation: A model for salt bridges and proton-transfer reactions in biology.” J Am Chem Soc. 115: 10275-81, 1993.
  • (48) Kennedy, K. J., Lundquist, J. T., Simandan, T. L., Kokko, K. P., Beeson, C. C., and Dix, T. A. “Design rational, synthesis, and characterization of non-natural analogs of the cationic amino acids arginine and lysine.” J Pept Res. 55: 348-58, 2000.
  • (49) Cusack, B., McCormick, D. J., Pang, Y. P., Sonder, T., Garcia, R., Fauq, A., and Richelson, E. “Pharmacological and biochemical profiles of unique neurotensin 8-13 analogs exhibiting species selectivity, stereoselectivity, and superagonism.” J Biol Chem. 270: 18359-66, 1995.
  • (50) Lundquist, J. T. and Dix, T. A. “Synthesis and human neurotensin receptor binding activities of neurotensin(8-13) analogues containing position 8 alpha-azido-N-alkylated derivatives of ornithine, lysine, and homolysine.” J Med Chem. 42: 4914-8, 1999.
  • (51) Lee, Y. C., Uttenthal, L. O., Smith, H. A., and Bloom, S. R. “In vitro degradation of neurotensin in human plasma.” Peptides. 7: 383-7, 1986.
  • (52) Kokko, K. P., Hadden, M. K., Price, K. L., Orwig, K. S., See, R. E., and Dix, T A. “Pharmacokinetic and behavioral effects of stable, receptor-selective neurotensin(8-13) analogues that cross the blood-brain barrier.” Neuropharm. Under Revision.
  • (53) Kokko, K. P. and Dix, T A. “Monitoring neurotensin [8-13] degradation in human and rat serum utilizing matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry.” Anal Biochem. 308: 34-41, 2002.
  • (54) Kokko, K. P., Hadden, M. K., Orwig, K. S., Mazella, J., and Dix, T. A. “In vitro analysis of stable, receptor-selective neurotensin(8-13) analogues.” J Med Chem. 46: 4141-48, 2003.
  • (55) Tyler-McMahon, B. M., Boules, M., and Richelson, E. “Neurotensin: peptide for the next millennium.” Reg Pept. 93: 125-36, 2000.
  • (56) Bednarek, M. A., Macneil, T., Kalyani, R. N., Tang, R., Van der Ploeg, L. H. T., and Weinberg, D. H. “Analogs of MTII, lactam derivatives of α-melanotripin, modified at the N-terminus, and their selectivity at human melanocortin receptors 3,4, and 5.” Biochem Biophys Res Comm. 261: 209-13, 1999.
  • (57) Lunquist, J. T. and Dix, T. A. “Asymmetric synthesis of ω-bromo-2(S)-azido acids as precursors for the synthesis of novel amino acids.” Tet Lett. 39: 775-8, 1998.
  • (58) Evans, D. A., Britton, T. C., Ellman, J. A., and Dorow, R. L. “The asymmetric synthesis of α-amino acids. Electrophilic azidation of chiral imide enolates, a practical approach to the synthesis of (R)- and (S)-α-azido carboxylic acids.” J Am Chem Soc. 112: 4011-30, 1990.
  • (59) Taylor, R. E., Galvin, G. M., Hilfiker, K. A., and Chen, Y. “A formal total synthesis of epothilone A: Enantioselective preparation of the C1-C6 and C7-C12 fragments.” J Org Chem. 63: 9580-3, 1998.
  • (60) Boules, M., McMahon, B., Warrington, L., Stewart, J., Jackson, J., Fauq A., McCormick, D., and Richelson, E. “Neurotensin analog selective for hypothermia over antinociception and exhibiting atypical neuroleptic-like properties.” Brain Res. 919: 1-11, 2001.
  • (61) Dubuc, I., Remande, S., and Costentin, J. “The partial agonist properties of levocabastine in neurotensin-induced analgesia.” Eur J Pharmacol. 381: 9-12, 1999.
  • (62) Kennedy, K. J., Simandan, T. L., and Dix, T A. “A facile route to cyclic and acyclic alkyl-arginines.” Synthetic Comm. 28: 741-6, 1998.
  • (63) Lundquist, J. T., Orwig, K. S., and Dix, T. A “Synthesis of ethylene-bridge (Nδ to Nω) analogues of arginine.” J Org Chem. 64:9265-7, 1999.
  • (64) Lundquist, J. T., and Pelletier, J. C. “Improved solid-phase peptide synthesis method utilizing alpha-azide protected amino acids.” Org Lett. 3: 781-3, 2001.
  • (65) Meienhofer, J., Waki, M., Heimer, E. P., Lambros, T. J., Makofske, R., and Chang, C. C. “Solid phase synthesis without repetitive acidolysis; preparation of leucyl-alanyl-glycyl-valine using 9-fluorenylmethyloxylcarbonyl amino acids.” Int J Pep Pro Res. 13: 35-42, 1979.
  • (66) Kaiser, E., Colescott, R. L., Bossinger, C. D., and Cook, P. I. “Color test for detection of free terminal amino groups in the solid-phase synthesis of peptides.” Anal Biochem. 34: 595-98, 1970.
  • (67) Boules, M., Warrington, L., Fauq, A., McCormick, D., and Richelson, E. “A novel neurotensin analog blocks cocaine- and D-amphetamine-induced hyperactivity.” Eur J Pharmacol. 426: 73-6, 2001.
  • (68) Tyler, B. M., Douglac, C. L., Faur, A., Pang, Y. P., Stewart, J. A., Cusack, B., McCormick, D. J., and Richelson, E. “In vitro binding and CNS effects of novel neurotensin agonists that cross the blood-brain barrier.” Neuropharm. 38: 027-34, 1999.
  • (69) Richelson, E., Cusack, B., Pang, Y. P., McCormick, D. J., Fauq, A., Tyler, B. M., and Boules, M. U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,790. United States Patent and Trademark Office, Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research, USA, 2000.
  • (70) Machida, R., Tokumura, T., Tsuchiya, Y., Sasaki, A., and Abe, K. “Pharmacokinetics of a novel hexapeptide with neurotensin activity in rats.” Biol Pharm Bull. 16: 43-7, 1993.
  • (71) Ogren, S. O. “The behavioural pharmacology of typical and atypical antipsychotic drugs.” Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology. Edited by J. G. Csernansky, Springer, Berlin, 1996, p. 225-66.
  • (72) Jones, G. H. and Robbins, T. W. “Differential effects of mesocortical, mesolimbic, and mesostriatal dopamine depletion on spontaneous, conditioned and drug-induced locomotor activity.” Pharmacol Biochem Behav. 43: 887-95, 1992.
  • (73) Hertel, P., Byskov, L., Didriksen, M., and Arnt, J. “Induction of tolerance to the suppressant effect of the neurotensin analogue NT69L on amphetamine-induced hyperactivity.” Eur J Pharmacol. 422: 77-81, 2001.
  • (74) Lowe, J. A., Seeger, T. F., and Vineck F. J. “Atypical antipsychotics—recent findings and new perspectives.” Med Res Rev. 8: 475-97, 1998.
  • (75) Dunn, A. J., Snijders, R., Hurd, R. W., and Kramery, N. R. “Induction of catalepsy by central nervous system administration of neurotensin.” Ann NY Acad Sci. 400: 345-53, 1982.
  • (76) Sarhan, S., Hitchcock, J. M., Grauffel, C. A., and Wettstein, J. G. “Comparative antipsychotic profiles of neurotensin and a related systemically active peptide agonist.” Peptides. 18: 1223-27, 1997.
  • (77) Cusack, B., Boules, M., Tyler, B. M., Fauq, A., McCormick, D. J., and Richelson, E. “Effects of a novel neurotensin peptide analog given extracranially on CNS behaviors mediated by apomorphine and haloperidol.” Brain Res. 865: 48-54, 2000.
  • (78) Hilgers, A. R., Conradi, R. A., and Burton, P. S. “Caco-2 cell monolayers as a model for drug transport across the intestinal mucosa.” Pharm Res. 7: 902-10, 1990.
  • (79) Artursson, P. and Karlsson, J. “Correlation between drug absorption in humans and apparent drug permeability coefficients in human intestinal epithelial (Caco-2) cells.” Biochem Biophy Res Comm. 175: 880-5, 1991.
  • (80) Borchardt, R. T. “Optimizing oral absorption of peptides using prodrug strategies.” J Cont Rel. 62: 231-38, 1999.
  • (81) Conradi, R. A., Hilgers, A. R., Ho, N. F. H., and Burton, P. S. “The influence of peptide structure on transport across Caco-2 cells.” Pharm Res. 8: 1453-60, 1991.
  • (82) McGuill, M. W. and Rowan, A. N. “Biological effects of blood loss; implication for sampling volumes and techniques.” ILAR Journal. 31(4), 1989.
  • (83) Lowry, O. H., Rosenbrough, N. J., Farr, A. L., and Randall, R. J. “Protien measurement with the folin phenol reagent.” J Biol Chem. 193: 265-75, 1951.
  • (84) Hadjiagapiou, C., Schmidt, L., Dudeja, K., Layden, T J., and Ramaswamy, K. “Mechanism(s) of butyrate transport in Caco-2 cells: role of monocarboxylate transporter 1.” Am J Physiol. 279: G775-80, 2000.
  • (85) Brandsch, M., Miyamoto, Y., Ganapathy, V., and Liebach, F. “Expression of protein kinase C-dependent regulation of peptide/H+ co-transport system in the Caco-2 human carcinoma cell line.” Biochem J. 299: 253-60, 1994.
  • (86) Garcia, C. K., Goldstein, J. L., Pathak, R. K., Anderson, R. G. W., and Brown, M. S. “Molecular characterization of a membrane transporter for lactate, pyruvate and other monocarboxylates: implications for the cori cycle.” Cell. 76: 865-73, 1994.
  • (87) Tamai, I., Sai, Y., Ono, A., Kido, Y., Yabuuchi, H., Takanaga, H., Satoh, E., Ogihara, T., Amano, O., Izeki, S., and Tsuji, S. “Immunohistochemical and functional characterization of pH-dependent intestinal transport of weak organic acids by the monocarboxylic acid transporter MCT1.” J Pharm Pharmacol. 51: 1113-21, 1999.
  • (88) Tamai, I., Onashi, R., Nezu, J., Yabuuchi, H., Oku, A., Shimane, M., Sai, Y., and Tsuji, A. “Molecular and functional identification of sodium ion-dependent, high affinity human carnitine transporter OCTN2.” J Biol Chem. 273: 20378-82, 1998.
  • (89) Walgren R. A., Karnaky, K. J., Lindenmayer, G. E., and Walle, T. “Efflux of dietary flavonoid quercetin 4′-β-glucoside across human intestinal Caco-2 cell monolayers by apical multidrug resistance-associated protein-2.” J Pharm Exp Ther. 294:830-6, 2000.
  • (90) Hunter, J., Jepson, M. A., Tsuruo, T., Simmons, N. L., and Hirst, B. H. “Functional expression of P-glycoprotein in apical membranes of human intestinal Caco-2 cells. Kinetics of vinblastine secretion and interaction with modulators.” J Biol Chem. 268: 14991-7, 1993.
  • (91) Jedlitschky, G., Leier, I., Buchholz, U., Center, M., and Keppler, D. “ATP-dependent transport of glutathione S-conjugates by the multidrug-resistance-associted protein.” Cancer Res. 54: 4833-36, 1994.
  • (92) Bohme, M., Buchler, M., Muller, M., and Keppler, D. “Differential inhibition by cyclosporins of primary-active ATP-dependent transporters in the hepatocyte canalicular membranes.” FEBS Lett. 333: 193-6, 1993.
  • (93) Hayer-Zillgen, M., Bruss, M., and Bonisch, H. “Expression and pharmacological profile of the human organic cation transporters hOCT1, hOCT2, and hOCT3.” Br J Pharmacol. 136: 829-36, 2002.
  • (94) Grundemann, D., Liebich, G., Kiefer, N., Koster, S., and Schomig, E. “Selective substrates for non-neuronal monoamine transporters.” Mol Pharmacol. 56; 1-10, 1999.
  • (95) Mentlein, R. and Dahms, P. “Endopeptidases 24.16 and 24.15 are responsible for the □egradation of somatostatin, neurotensin, and other neuropeptides by cultivated rat cortical astrocytes.” J Neurochem. 62; 27-36, 1994.
  • (96) Lipinski, C. A., Lombardo, F., Dominy, B. W., Feeney, P. J., “Experimental and computational approaches to estimate solubility and permeability in drug discovery and development settings.” Adv Drug Del Rev. 46: 3-26, 2001.
  • (97) Kilts, C. D. “Animal behavioral models of schizophrenia.” Current Issues in the Psychology of Schizophrenia, edited by A. Breier. Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2001, p. 111-130.
  • (98) Material in this section abstracted from “Schizophrenia” NIH Publication No. 99-3517.
  • (99) Lieberman, J. A, et. al (2005) Effectiveness of antipsychotic drugs in patients with chronic schizophrenia. New Engl. J. Med. 353, 1209-1222.
  • (100) The Boston Globe, Sep. 20, 2005.
  • (101) Vincent J.-P.; Mazella, J.; and Kitabgi, P. (1999) Neurotensin and neurotensin receptors. Trends. Pharmacol. Sci. 20, 302-309.
  • (102) Carraway, R. and S. E. Leeman, (1975) The amino acid sequence of a hypothalamic peptide, neurotensin. J. Biol. Chem. 259, 1907-1913.
  • (103) Nemeroff, C. B. (1980) Neurotensin: perchance an endogenous neuroleptic? Biol. Psychiatry, 15: 283-302.
  • (104) Benzing, W. C.; Mufson, E. J.; Jennes, L.; and Armstrong, D. M. (1990) Reduction of neurotensin immunoreactivity in the amygdala in Alzheimer's disease. Brain Res. 537: 298-302.
  • (105) Govoni, S.; Hong, J. S.; Yang, H. Y.; and Costa, E. (1980) Increase of neurotensin content elicited by neuroleptics in nucleus accumbens. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 215: 413-417.
  • (106) Widerlov, E.; Lindstrom, L. H.; Besev, G.; Manberg, P. J.; Nemeroff, C. B.; Breese, G. R.; Kizer, J. S.; and Prange Jr., A. J. (1982) Subnormal CSF levels of neurotensin in a subgroup of schizophrenic patients: normalization after neuroleptic treatment. Am. J. Psychiatry, 139: 1122-1126.
  • (107) Garver, D. L.; Bissette, G.; Yao, J. K.; and Nemeroff, C. B. (1991) Relation of CSF neurotensin concentrations to symptoms and drug response of psychotic patients. Am. J Psychiatry, 148: 484-488.
  • (108) Baldessarini, R. J. (1996) “Drugs and the treatment of psychiatric disorders: psychosis and anxiety.” Hardman, J. G.; and Limbird, L. E., eds. in Goodman and Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th ed. 399-420. 28.
  • (109) Kinkead B.; Binder E B. and Nemeroff C B. (1999) Does neurotensin mediate the effects of antipsychotic drugs? Biological Psychiatry. 46, 340-51.
  • (110) Hadden, M. K.; Kokko, K. P.; Orwig, K.; Mazella, J. and Dix, T. A. (2005) Design, synthesis, and evaluation of the antipsychotic potential of orally bioavailable neurotensin (8-13) analogues containing non-natural arginine and lysine residues. Neuropharmacology 49, 1149-1159.
  • (111) Orwig, K. (2005) Ph.D. dissertation, Medical University of South Carolina.
  • (112) Ogren S. O. (1996) The behavioral pharmacology of typical and atypical antipsychotic drugs, in Handbood of Experimental Pharmacology (Csernansky J. G. ed.) pp 225-266, Springer, Berlin.
  • (113) Hitzemann, R. (2000) Animal models of psychiatric disorders and their relevance. Alcohol Res. And Health 24, 149-158.
  • (114) Feifel, D.; Melendez, G. and Shilling, P. D. (2004) Reversal of sensorimotor gating deficits in Brattleboro rats by acute administration of clozapine and a neurotensin agonist, but not haloperidol: a potential predictive model for novel antipsychotic effects. Neuropsychopharmacology 29, 731-738.
  • (115) MacPherson, R. D., The pharmacological basis of contemporary pain management. Pharmacology & Therapeutics, 2000. 88(2): p. 163.
  • (116) Smith, B. H., et al., The impact of chronic pain in the community. Family Practice, 2001. 18(3): p. 292.
  • (117) Nitu, A. N., et al., Emerging trends in the pharmacotherapy of chronic pain. [Review] [101 refs]. (1354-3784).
  • (118) Jones, S. C., Relative Thromboembolic Risks Associated with COX-2 Inhibitors. The Annals of Pharmacotherapy, 2005. 39(7): p. 1249.
  • (119) Garber, K., Peptides lead new class of pain drugs. Nature Biotech., 2005. 23: p. 399.
  • (120) Carraway, R. and S. E. Leeman, The Isolation of a New Hypotensive Peptide, Neurotensin, from Bovine Hypothalami. Journal of Biological Chemistry, 1973. 248(19): p. 6854.
  • (121) Carraway, R. and S. E. Leeman, The amino acid sequence of a hypothalamic peptide, neurotensin. Journal of Biological Chemistry, 1975. 250(5): p. 1907.
  • (122) Chapman, C. R., et al., Pain measurement: an overview. Pain, 1985. 22(1): p. 1.
  • (123) Le Bars, D., M. Gozariu, and S. W. Cadden, Animal Models of Nociception. Pharmacological Reviews, 2001. 53(4): p. 597.
  • (124) Mogil, J. S. and S. E. Crager, What should we be measuring in behavioral studies of chronic pain in animals? Pain, 2004. 112(1-2): p. 12.
  • (125) Gracely, R. H., Pain Measurement. Acta Anaesthesiol. Scand., 1999. 43: p. 897-908.
  • (126) Mogil, J. S., B. Kest, B. Sadowski, and J. K. Belknap Differential Genetic Mediation to morphine in genetic models of opiate antinociception: Influence of nociceptive assay. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 1996, 276, 532-544.
  • (127) Kim S. H. and Chung J. M. An experimental model for peripheral neuropathy produced by segmental spinal nerve ligation in the rat. Pain 50: 355-363.
  • Additional advantages of the invention in part will be obvious from the description, or may be learned by practice of the invention. The advantages of the invention will be realized and attained by means of the elements and combinations particularly pointed out in the appended claims.
  • Throughout this application, where publications are referenced, the disclosures of these publications in their entireties are hereby incorporated by reference into this application in order to more fully describe the state of the art to which this invention pertains.

Claims (66)

1. A method of preparation of a compound of Formula (XI):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00027
or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue; or is NR, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an amino acid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
n is 1 to about 10,
R1, R2 and R3 are independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, wherein one of R1, R2 or R3 may be absent, wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
the method comprising contacting a compound of Formula (XII):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00028
wherein Y is a leaving group;
with an amine of the formula R1R2R3N, in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XI).
2. A method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (XIII):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00029
or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an amino acid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
R is independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
n is 1 to about 10;
R4 and R5 are independently at each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R4 or R5 is not a Boc group;
the method comprising contacting a compound of Formula (XV):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00030
wherein R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can further contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
with a compound of Formula (XIV):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00031
wherein R6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof;
in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XIII).
3. A method of preparation of a compound of formula (XIII):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00032
or a salt, hydrate, solvate, stereoisomer, or tautomer thereof,
wherein X is OH, O(C1-C6 alkyl), O(C6-C10 aryl), NR2, an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or wherein X is O, NR, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
Z is H, NR2, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, or is NR, an amino acid residue, or a peptide residue, respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
provided that X and Z are not both bonded to polymers; and provided that at least one of X or Z comprises an amino acid residue or a peptide residue, or an amino acid residue or a peptide residue respectively covalently bonded to a polymer;
R at each occurrence is independently H, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, a nitrogen protecting group, or a nitrogen capping group, or two R groups together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound form a 5-7 membered heterocyclic ring that can further comprise 1-3 additional heteroatoms N, O or S;
L is a saturated or unsaturated, linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbyl or a combination thereof, comprising n carbon atoms, wherein any carbon atom can be substituted or unsubstituted, wherein 0-3 heteroatoms O, S, or NR can be substituted for a carbon atom of L;
n is 1 to about 10;
R1 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycles, or heteroaryl; wherein any alkyl can contain 0-3 heteroatoms comprising N, O, or S, wherein any alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl may be unsubstituted or substituted;
R4 and R5 are at each occurrence independently H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl residue may be unsubstituted or substituted; provided that R4 or R5 is not a Boc group;
from a compound of formula (XII):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00033
wherein Y is a leaving group;
the method comprising contacting the compound of formula (XII) with an amine of the formula R1NH2, in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XV):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00034
then, contacting the compound of formula (XV) with a compound of Formula (XIV):
Figure US20080234202A1-20080925-C00035
wherein R6 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or aryl, or a salt thereof;
in a solvent for a time period and at a temperature sufficient for the formation of the compound of Formula (XIII).
4. The method of claim 1 wherein Z is not methyl.
5. The method of claim 1 wherein Y is halo, alkylsulfonoxy, arylsulfonoxy or alkarylsulfonoxy, wherein the alkyl or aryl is unsubstituted or is substituted with electron-withdrawing groups.
6. The method of claim 1 wherein Z is H.
7. The method of claim 1 wherein Z is methyl.
8. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound of Formula (XI) comprises a lysine residue, a N-methyllysine residue, a N,N-dimethyllysine residue, or an N,N-dimethyllysine N-metho salt residue.
9. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound of Formula (XI) is a neurotensin analog or an analog of a neurotensin fragment.
10. The method of claim 1 wherein X comprises a Pro-Tyr-Ile residue.
11. The method of claim 1 wherein Z comprises a PGlu-Leu-Tyr residue.
12. The method of claim 2 wherein R6 is methyl or ethyl.
13. A compound of Formula (XI) prepared by the method of claim 1.
14. A compound of Formula (XIII) prepared by the method of claim 2.
15. A compound of Formula (XIV) comprising a salt thereof.
16. The compound of claim 15 wherein the salt is a hydriodide salt.
17. The method of claim 1 wherein the solvent is water, methanol, or ethanol, or a mixture thereof.
18. The method of claim 1 wherein the solvent is DMSO, DMF, DMAc, or NMP, or a mixture thereof.
19. The method of claim 2 wherein the solvent is water, acetonitrile, methanol, ethanol, tetrahydrofuran, or N,N-dimethylformamide, or a mixture thereof.
20. The method of claim 1 wherein L is a linear or cycloalkylalkyl, saturated hydrocarbyl of 1 to about 10 carbon atoms.
21. A method of use of a peptide analog prepared according to claim 1 for treatment of a malcondition in a patient in need thererof, the method comprising administering the analog in a dosage, at a frequency, and over a period of time sufficient to provide a beneficial effect to the patient.
22. The method of claim 21 wherein the peptide analog is a neurotensin analog.
23. The method of claim 21 wherein the malcondition comprises pain.
24. The method of claim 21 wherein the malcondition comprises psychosis.
25. The method of claim 21 wherein the malcondition comprises obesity.
26. The method of claim 3 wherein Y is halo, alkylsulfonoxy, arylsulfonoxy or alkarylsulfonoxy, wherein the alkyl or aryl is unsubstituted or is substituted with electron-withdrawing groups.
27. The method of claim 4 wherein Y is halo, alkylsulfonoxy, arylsulfonoxy or alkarylsulfonoxy, wherein the alkyl or aryl is unsubstituted or is substituted with electron-withdrawing groups.
28. The method claim 2 wherein Z is H.
29. The method of claim 3 wherein Z is H.
30. The method of claim 4 wherein Z is H.
31. The method of claim 2 wherein Z is methyl.
32. The method of claim 3 wherein Z is methyl.
33. The method of claim 3 wherein the compound of Formula (XIII) comprises a lysine residue, a N-methyllysine residue, a N,N-dimethyllysine residue, or an N,N-dimethyllysine N-metho salt residue.
34. The method of claim 8 wherein Z is not methyl.
35. The method of claim 33 wherein Z is not methyl.
36. The method of claim 2 wherein the compound of Formula (XIII) is a neurotensin analog or an analog of a neurotensin fragment.
37. The method of claim 3 wherein the compound of Formula (XIII) is a neurotensin analog or an analog of a neurotensin fragment.
38. The method of claim 2 wherein the compound of Formula (XIII) is a neurotensin analog or an analog of a neurotensin fragment.
39. The method of claim 3 wherein the compound of Formula (XIII) is a neurotensin analog or an analog of a neurotensin fragment.
40. The method claim 4 wherein the compound of Formula (XI) is a neurotensin analog or an analog of a neurotensin fragment.
41. The method of claim 2 wherein X comprises a Pro-Tyr-Ile residue.
42. The method of claim 3 wherein X comprises a Pro-Tyr-Ile residue.
43. The method of claim 4 wherein X comprises a Pro-Tyr-Ile residue.
44. The method of claim 2 wherein Z comprises a PGlu-Leu-Tyr residue.
45. The method of claim 3 wherein Z comprises a PGlu-Leu-Tyr residue.
46. The method of claim 4 wherein Z comprises a PGlu-Leu-Tyr residue.
47. The method of claim 3 wherein R6 is methyl or ethyl.
48. A compound of Formula (XIII) prepared by the method of claim 3.
49. The method of claim 2 wherein the solvent is water, methanol, or ethanol, or a mixture thereof.
50. The method of claim 3 wherein the solvent is water, methanol, or ethanol, or a mixture thereof.
51. The method of claim 4 wherein the solvent is water, methanol, or ethanol, or a mixture thereof.
52. The method of claim 2 wherein the solvent is DMSO, DMF, DMAc, or NMP, or a mixture thereof.
53. The method of claim 3 wherein the solvent is DMSO, DMF, DMAc, or NMP, or a mixture thereof.
54. The method of claim 4 wherein the solvent is DMSO, DMF, DMAc, or NMP, or a mixture thereof.
55. The method of claim 2 wherein L is a linear or cycloalkylalkyl, saturated hydrocarbyl of 1 to about 10 carbon atoms.
56. The method of claim 3 wherein L is a linear or cycloalkylalkyl, saturated hydrocarbyl of 1 to about 10 carbon atoms.
57. A method of use of a peptide analog prepared according to claim 2 for treatment of a malcondition in a patient in need thererof, the method comprising administering the analog in a dosage, at a frequency, and over a period of time sufficient to provide a beneficial effect to the patient.
58. The method of claim 57 wherein the peptide analog is a neurotensin analog.
59. The method of claim 57 wherein the malcondition comprises pain.
60. The method of claim 57 wherein the malcondition comprises psychosis.
61. The method of claim 57 wherein the malcondition comprises obesity.
62. A method of use of a peptide analog prepared according to claim 3 for treatment of a malcondition in a patient in need thererof, the method comprising administering the analog in a dosage, at a frequency, and over a period of time sufficient to provide a beneficial effect to the patient.
63. The method of claim 62 wherein the peptide analog is a neurotensin analog.
64. The method of claim 62 wherein the malcondition comprises pain.
65. The method of claim 62 wherein the malcondition comprises psychosis.
66. The method of claim 62 wherein the malcondition comprises obesity.
US11/787,658 2004-06-17 2007-04-17 Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues Abandoned US20080234202A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/787,658 US20080234202A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2007-04-17 Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US58133304P 2004-06-17 2004-06-17
PCT/US2005/021580 WO2006009902A2 (en) 2004-06-17 2005-06-17 Non-natural amino acids
US11/787,658 US20080234202A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2007-04-17 Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2005/021580 Continuation-In-Part WO2006009902A2 (en) 2004-06-17 2005-06-17 Non-natural amino acids
US62980607A Continuation-In-Part 2004-06-17 2007-09-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080234202A1 true US20080234202A1 (en) 2008-09-25

Family

ID=35785718

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/629,806 Abandoned US20080139481A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2005-06-17 Non-Natural Amino Acids
US11/787,658 Abandoned US20080234202A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2007-04-17 Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues
US13/784,212 Expired - Fee Related US9359291B2 (en) 2004-06-17 2013-03-04 Non-natural amino acids

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/629,806 Abandoned US20080139481A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2005-06-17 Non-Natural Amino Acids

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/784,212 Expired - Fee Related US9359291B2 (en) 2004-06-17 2013-03-04 Non-natural amino acids

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (3) US20080139481A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1768951A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2008515768A (en)
CN (1) CN101035756A (en)
AU (1) AU2005265164A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2573109A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2006009902A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090062212A1 (en) * 2007-05-07 2009-03-05 Elliott Richelson Peptide analogs that are potent and selective for human neurotensin preceptor subtype 2
US8476221B2 (en) 2011-03-18 2013-07-02 Halimed Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of metabolic disorders

Families Citing this family (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2573109A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2006-01-26 Thomas A. Dix Non-natural amino acids
US8673848B2 (en) 2012-01-27 2014-03-18 Novartis Ag Synthetic apelin mimetics for the treatment of heart failure
BRPI0619213B8 (en) 2005-11-29 2021-07-27 Nihon Mediphysics Co Ltd radioactive halonium-labelled organic compound precursor compound
AU2009210570B2 (en) * 2008-01-30 2014-11-20 Indiana University Research And Technology Corporation Ester-based insulin prodrugs
AU2009304560A1 (en) 2008-10-15 2010-04-22 Angiochem Inc. Conjugates of GLP-1 agonists and uses thereof
US9914754B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2018-03-13 Angiochem Inc. Conjugates of neurotensin or neurotensin analogs and uses thereof
SG172291A1 (en) 2008-12-19 2011-07-28 Univ Indiana Res & Tech Corp Amide based glucagon superfamily peptide prodrugs
WO2010085661A1 (en) * 2009-01-23 2010-07-29 Musc Foundation For Reasearch Development Modified peptides and their use
JP5912112B2 (en) 2010-06-24 2016-04-27 インディアナ ユニバーシティー リサーチ アンド テクノロジー コーポレーションＩｎｄｉａｎａ Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓｉｔｙ Ｒｅｓｅａｒｃｈ Ａｎｄ Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｙ Ｃｏｒｐｏｒａｔｉｏｎ Amide insulin prodrug
US8921307B2 (en) 2012-11-20 2014-12-30 Novartis Ag Synthetic linear apelin mimetics for the treatment of heart failure
UY35144A (en) 2012-11-20 2014-06-30 Novartis Ag APELINE SYNTHETIC LINEAR MIMETICS FOR THE CARDIAC INSUFFICIENCY TREATMENT
KR20160031551A (en) 2013-07-25 2016-03-22 노파르티스 아게 Cyclic polypeptides for the treatment of heart failure
HK1218252A1 (en) 2013-07-25 2017-02-10 Novartis Ag Bioconjugates of synthetic apelin polypeptides
CA2955148A1 (en) * 2014-05-30 2015-12-03 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine, Inc. Targeting dimerization of bax to modulate bax activity
EP3307326B9 (en) 2015-06-15 2021-02-24 Angiochem Inc. Methods for the treatment of leptomeningeal carcinomatosis
WO2018187515A1 (en) * 2017-04-04 2018-10-11 Avidea Technologies, Inc. Peptide-based vaccines, methods of manufacturing, and uses thereof for inducing an immune response
WO2020072181A1 (en) * 2018-10-01 2020-04-09 University Of Houston System Engineered active single-polypeptide chain insulin analogs
US20230096766A1 (en) * 2018-12-12 2023-03-30 Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha Amino acid having functional group capable of intermolecular hydrogen bonding, peptide compound containing same and method for production thereof

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2947756A (en) * 1960-08-02 Process for preparation of

Family Cites Families (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
NL238542A (en) * 1958-04-25
US3322815A (en) * 1964-07-27 1967-05-30 Nat Distillers Chem Corp Aminoalkanenitriles and process for preparing the same
US3933797A (en) * 1972-02-22 1976-01-20 Pfizer Inc. 6-[α-(ω-QUANIDINOALKANOYLAMIDO)ACYLAMIDO]PENICILLANIC ACIDS
JPS5116638A (en) * 1975-04-30 1976-02-10 Ogawa Koryo Kk 22CHIKANN44AMINORAKUSANNOJUDOTAINOSEIZOHO
GB1552179A (en) * 1976-11-02 1979-09-12 Beecham Group Ltd Pharmaceutical compositions for treating hyperglycaemia
US4550163A (en) * 1979-02-05 1985-10-29 Abbott Laboratories Ligand analog-irreversible enzyme inhibitor conjugates
IL59557A (en) * 1979-03-12 1983-10-31 Lilly Co Eli 1,1-biphenyl-2-yl propyl butyl and pentyl amines,their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions comprising them
JPS5997562A (en) * 1982-11-20 1984-06-05 三洋化成工業株式会社 Cement shrinkage reducing agent
US4760136A (en) * 1984-04-27 1988-07-26 Ishihara Sangyo Kaisha, Ltd. Chartreusin derivatives and salts thereof
JPH0633311B2 (en) * 1985-10-24 1994-05-02 石原産業株式会社 CHA-TORSIN DERIVATIVE AND ANTI-CANCER AGENT CONTAINING THE SAME
JPS62129243A (en) * 1985-11-30 1987-06-11 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd 2-fluoro-4-biphenylylacetic acid derivative
FI890918A7 (en) * 1988-03-11 1989-09-12 Eisai Co Ltd POLYPEPTIDES.
FR2647674B1 (en) * 1989-06-06 1994-06-03 Centre Nat Rech Scient PYRROLE DERIVATIVES FOR USE IN PARTICULAR AS INTERCEPTORS OF ACTIVE DIOXYGEN SPECIES - PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION - COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
US5393740A (en) * 1991-07-30 1995-02-28 Tsumura & Co. Neurotensin Hexapeptides
US5589499A (en) * 1992-11-25 1996-12-31 Weth; Gosbert Dopaminergic agents for the treatment of cerebral and peripheral blood flow disorders
JP3624478B2 (en) * 1995-08-15 2005-03-02 旭硝子株式会社 Process for producing polyfluoroalkyl ester compound
US6566330B1 (en) * 1996-10-22 2003-05-20 Medical University Of South Carolina Foundation Research Development Positively charged non-natural amino acids, methods of making and using thereof in peptides
US6358992B1 (en) * 1998-11-25 2002-03-19 Cell Pathways, Inc. Method of inhibiting neoplastic cells with indole derivatives
WO2003013526A1 (en) * 2001-08-08 2003-02-20 Merck & Co. Inc. Anticoagulant compounds
CA2573109A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2006-01-26 Thomas A. Dix Non-natural amino acids
EP1962884A2 (en) * 2005-12-16 2008-09-03 Argolyn Bioscience, Inc. Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues thereof

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2947756A (en) * 1960-08-02 Process for preparation of

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090062212A1 (en) * 2007-05-07 2009-03-05 Elliott Richelson Peptide analogs that are potent and selective for human neurotensin preceptor subtype 2
US20110263507A1 (en) * 2007-05-07 2011-10-27 Elliott Richelson Peptide analogs that are potent and selective for human neurotensin receptor subtype 2
US20120178904A1 (en) * 2007-05-07 2012-07-12 Richelson Elliot Peptide analogs that are potent and selective for human neurotensin receptor subtype 2
US8476221B2 (en) 2011-03-18 2013-07-02 Halimed Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20130296226A1 (en) * 2011-03-18 2013-11-07 Halimed Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of metabolic disorders

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20130217632A1 (en) 2013-08-22
WO2006009902A3 (en) 2006-12-28
US20080139481A1 (en) 2008-06-12
US9359291B2 (en) 2016-06-07
AU2005265164A9 (en) 2006-01-26
CA2573109A1 (en) 2006-01-26
CN101035756A (en) 2007-09-12
AU2005265164A1 (en) 2006-01-26
JP2008515768A (en) 2008-05-15
EP1768951A2 (en) 2007-04-04
AU2005265164A2 (en) 2006-01-26
WO2006009902A2 (en) 2006-01-26
EP1768951A4 (en) 2011-06-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9359291B2 (en) Non-natural amino acids
US8338565B2 (en) Macrocyclic compounds for inhibition of tumor necrosis factor alpha
CN109251242B (en) Peptide for inhibiting osteoclast differentiation and use thereof
US11111273B2 (en) Cyclic peptides multimers targeting alpha-4-beta-7 integrin
CZ216694A3 (en) Derivatives of 4-oxo-2-thioxoimidazolidine as inhibitors of blood platelet aggregation
US20100130432A1 (en) Non-Natural Amino Acids and Neurotensin Analogues Thereof
US6858396B2 (en) Positively charged non-natural amino acids, methods of making and using thereof in peptides
US20230312653A1 (en) Cyclic cell penetrating peptides
US6783946B2 (en) Positively charged non-natural amino acids, methods of making thereof, and use thereof in peptides
CN101472601A (en) Non-natural amino acids and neurotensin analogues thereof
JP2000501083A (en) Novel LH-RH-antagonists with improved effects
WO1997010261A1 (en) Peptide derivatives
TW379216B (en) Novel LH-RH antagonists having improved action, harmaceutical composition comprising the same and process for preparing the same
AU2008200566A1 (en) Non-natural basic amino acids, their preparation and use
US20050118101A1 (en) Beta-homolysine conjugates and their use as transport enhancer
US20160159861A1 (en) APJ Receptor Compounds
JPWO1997010261A1 (en) Peptide Derivatives

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: MEDICAL UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH CAROLINA, SOUTH CAROLI

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:DIX, THOMAS A;REEL/FRAME:019648/0992

Effective date: 20070604

Owner name: ARGOLYN BIOSCIENCES, INC., SOUTH CAROLINA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROWER, JUSTIN O.;REEL/FRAME:019648/0972

Effective date: 20070622

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION